Music Atelier AT-900 - 楽器 ROLAND - 無料のユーザーマニュアル

製品タイプ	デジタルオルガン / ミュージックワークステーション
モデル	ミュージックアトリエ AT-900
ブランド	ローランド
鍵盤	タッチセンシティブ、61鍵（上鍵盤）、61鍵（下鍵盤）、25鍵（ペダル鍵盤）
音源	バーチャルトーンホイールオルガン、PCM音色
同時発音数	128音
エフェクト	リバーブ、コーラス、ロータリースピーカーシミュレーション
リズムパターン	100以上の内蔵スタイルとバリエーション
録音	16トラックシーケンサー、SMF再生
ディスプレイ	グラフィカルインターフェースのバックライト付きLCD
接続端子	USB（MIDI）、MIDIイン/アウト、オーディオイン/アウト、ヘッドフォンジャック
その他の機能	トランスポーザー、メトロノーム、レジストレーションメモリー、ピッチベンドホイール
寸法（幅×奥行×高さ）	約1,200mm×500mm×900mm
重量	約70kg
電源	AC100-240V、50/60Hz（付属アダプター使用）
消費電力	50W
付属品	取扱説明書、電源コード、譜面台、ベンチ
メンテナンス	柔らかい乾いた布で拭いてください。溶剤は避けてください。
安全上の注意	雨や湿気にさらさないでください。推奨のスタンドのみ使用してください。
修理・部品	修理についてはローランド正規サービスセンターにご連絡ください。

よくある質問 - Music Atelier AT-900 ROLAND

ローランドAT-900をコンピューターに接続するにはどうすればよいですか？

USBケーブルを使用して、オルガンのUSB MIDIポートをコンピューターに接続します。必要に応じて適切なMIDIドライバーをインストールしてください。

AT-900でヘッドフォンを使用できますか？

はい、標準のステレオヘッドフォンを前面パネルのPhonesジャックに差し込んでください。スピーカーは自動的にミュートになります。

オルガンにはどのようなメンテナンスが必要ですか？

定期的に柔らかい乾いた布で表面のほこりを拭き取ってください。液体や研磨剤入りのクリーナーは使用しないでください。鍵盤には、必要に応じて湿らせた布を使用し、その後乾いた布で拭いてください。

トランスポーズはどのように行いますか？

Transposeボタンを押し、Valueダイヤルを使ってピッチを半音単位で上下に調整します。

AT-900には内蔵メトロノームはありますか？

はい、Metronomeボタンを押すと作動します。Menuオプションを使ってテンポや拍子を調整できます。

演奏を録音できますか？

はい、内蔵の16トラックシーケンサーを使用して録音・再生できます。トラックを選択し、録音を開始、停止します。USBにSMFファイルとして保存することもできます。

どのようなペダルボードが付属していますか？

AT-900には25音ペダルボードとエクスプレッションペダルジャックが装備されています。ペダル割り当てはメニューで設定できます。

ファームウェアはどのようにアップデートしますか？

ローランドのウェブサイトから最新のファームウェアをダウンロードし、USBフラッシュドライブに保存してオルガンに挿入し、マニュアルのアップデート手順に従ってください。

オルガンの電源が入らない場合はどうすればよいですか？

電源コードの接続を確認し、コンセントが動作していることを確認してください。アダプターを使用している場合は、しっかりと差し込まれていることを確認してください。それでも電源が入らない場合は、ローランドサポートにご連絡ください。

鍵盤のタッチ感度を調整できますか？

はい、Keyboard設定メニューに移動し、Touch Sensitivityを選択します。Light、Medium、Heavy、Fixedから選べます。

使用説明書 Music Atelier AT-900 ROLAND

MUSIC

ATELIER

ROLAND ORGAN

OWNER'S MANUAL

AT900 AT900C

Roland®

ROLAND ORGAN

MUSIC ATELIER

AT900

AT900C

OWNER'S MANUAL

Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: "IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS" (p. 2), "USING THE UNIT SAFELY" (p. 3), and "IMPORTANT NOTES" (p. 6). These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation of the unit. Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit, Owner's manual should be read in its entirety. The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference.

ATTENTION

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN

: RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.

INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING - When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following:

1. Read these instructions.
2. Keep these instructions.
3. Heed all warnings.
4. Follow all instructions.
5. Do not use this apparatus near water.
6. Clean only with a dry cloth.
7. Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.

11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
12. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.
14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.

For the U.K.

WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED

IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE. GREEN-AND-YELLOW: EARTH, BLUE: NEUTRAL, BROWN: LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth symbol ⊕ or coloured GREEN or GREEN-AND-YELLOW.

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

USING THE UNIT SAFELY

INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PREVENTION OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS

About ⚠️ WARNING and ⚠️ CAUTION Notices

	Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of death or severe injury should the unit be used improperly.
	Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly.* Material damage refers to damage or other adverse effects caused with respect to the home and all its furnishings, as well to domestic animals or pets.

About the Symbols

###	The △ symbol alerts the user to important instructions or warnings. The specific meaning of the symbol is determined by the design contained within the triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.
###	The Ⓧ symbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it means that the unit must never be disassembled.
###	The ● symbol alerts the user to things that must be carried out. The specific thing that must be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power-cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.

ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING

WARNING

Safety grounding connection

Connect mains plug of this model to a mains socket outlet with a safety grounding connection.

Do not disassemble or modify

Do not disassemble or modify this device.

Do not repair or replace parts

Never attempt to repair this device or replace parts. If repair or part replacement should become necessary, you must contact your dealer or a Roland service center.

Do not use or store in the following types of locations

• Locations of extremely high temperature (such as in direct sunlight, near heating equipment, or on a device that generates heat)
• Near moisture (such as in a bathroom, near a sink, or on a wet floor) or in locations of high humidity
• Locations exposed to rain
• Locations of excessive dust
• Locations subject to heavy vibration

Do not place in an unstable location

Do not place this device on an unstable stand or a tilted surface. You must place it in a stable and level location.

Connect the power cord to an outlet of the correct voltage

You must connect the power cord to an AC outlet of the correct voltage as marked on the device.

WARNING

Use only the included power cord

You must use only the power cord included with the device. Do not use the included power cord with any other device.

Do not bend the power cord or place heavy objects on it

Do not bend the power cord excessively, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Doing so will damage the power cord, and may cause short circuits or faulty connections, possibly resulting in fire or electrical shock.

Do not share an outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices

Do not connect excessive numbers of electrical devices to a single power outlet. In particular, when using a power strip, exceeding the rated capacity (watts/amps) of the power strip may cause heat to be generated, possibly melting the cable.

Avoid extended use at high volume

This device, either by itself or used in conjunction with headphones, amps, and/or speakers, is capable of producing volume levels that can cause permanent hearing damage. If you experience impaired hearing or ringing in your ears, immediately stop using the device and consult a medical specialist.

Do not insert foreign objects

Never allow foreign objects (flammable objects, coins, wires, etc.) to enter this device. This can cause short circuits or other malfunctions.

WARNING

Turn off the power if an abnormality or malfunction occurs

If any of the following should occur, immediately turn off the power, disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet, and contact your dealer or a service center to have the device serviced.

• The power cord is damaged
• The device produces smoke or an unusual smell
- A foreign object enters the device, or liquid spills into the device
• The device becomes wet (by rain, etc.)
- An abnormality or malfunction occurs in the device

Do not allow children to use without supervision

In households with children, take particular care against tampering. If children are to use this device, they must be supervised or guided by an adult.

Do not drop or subject to strong impact

Do not drop this device or subject it to strong impact.

Do not use overseas

If you wish to use this device overseas, please contact your dealer or a service center.

Do not use a CD-ROM in an audio CD player or DVD player

If you attempt to play back a CD-ROM in a conventional audio CD player or DVD player, the resulting high volume may damage your hearing or your speakers.

Do not place containers of water on the device

Do not place containers of water (such as a flower vase) or drinks on the device. Nor should you place containers of insecticide, perfume, alcoholic liquids, nail polish, or spray cans on the device. Liquids that spill into the device may cause it to malfunction, and may cause short circuits or faulty operation.

Never expose Battery to excessive heat

Never expose Battery to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.

CAUTION

Place in a well ventilated location

When using this device, ensure that it is placed in a well ventilated location.

Grasp the plug when connecting or disconnecting the power cord

When connecting or disconnecting the power cord to/from an AC outlet or the device itself, you must grasp the plug, not the cord.

Periodically wipe the dust off the power cord plug

From time to time, you should unplug the power cord from the AC outlet and use a dry cloth to wipe the dust off of it. You should also unplug the power cord from the AC outlet if you will not be using the device for an extended period of time. Dust or dirt that accumulates between the power cord plug and the AC outlet can cause a short circuit, possibly resulting in fire.

Manage cables for safety

Ensure that the connected cables are organized and managed in a safe manner. In particular, place the cables out of reach of children.

Do not stand or place heavy objects on this device

Do not stand on this device, or place heavy objects on it.

Do not connect or disconnect the power cord with wet hands

Do not connect or disconnect the power cord to the device or AC outlet while holding the power cord plug with wet hands.

(For AT-900C)

Cautions when moving this device

If you need to move the instrument, take note of the precautions listed below. Since this product is very heavy, you must make sure that a sufficient number of people are on hand to help, so you can lift and move it safely, without causing strain. It should be handled carefully, all the while keeping it level. Make sure to have a firm grip, to protect yourself from injury and the instrument from damage.

• Check whether the knob bolts fastening the device to its stand have become loose. If they are loose, tighten them firmly.
• Disconnect the power cord.
• Disconnect external devices.
• Remove the music stand.

CAUTION

(For AT-900)

Cautions when moving this device

Before moving the unit, disconnect the power plug from the outlet, and pull out all cords from external devices.

Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet before cleaning

Before you clean the device, turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet (p. 23).

If there is a possibility of lightning strike, disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet

If there is a possibility of lightning strike, immediately turn off the power and disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet.

Cautions when using batteries

Batteries may leak or burst if they are used incorrectly. Please observe the following cautions (p. 255).

• When inserting batteries, carefully observe the correct polarity ("+" and "-").
• Do not mix new and partially used batteries, or batteries of different types.

- If you will not be using the device for an extended period of time, remove the batteries.

- If the batteries have leaked, use a soft dry cloth to carefully wipe the liquid off the battery compartment, and install new batteries. If liquid that leaks from a battery contacts your skin, it may cause skin irritation. Battery liquid that gets into your eye is dangerous; immediately wash out your eye with water.

- Do not carry or store batteries together with metallic objects such as pens, necklaces, or hairpins.

(For AT-900)

Cautions when opening/closing the lid

Be careful when opening/closing the lid so you do not get your fingers pinched (p. 22). Adult supervision is recommended whenever small children use the unit.

CAUTION

Cautions when using the seat

You must observe the following cautions when using the seat.

• Do not play with the seat or use it as a stepstool.
• Do not allow two or more people to sit on the seat simultaneously.
• Do not sit on the seat if the bolts fastening the legs are loose. (If they are loose, use the included tool to retighten them.)
• (For AT-900) When opening or closing the seat lid, be careful not to pinch your fingers. In particular, be careful not to pinch your fingers in the folding metal supports. (p. 27)

Keep small items out of the reach of children

To prevent small items such as the following from being swallowed accidentally, keep them out of the reach of children.

- Included items

• Screws for assembling the music rest
• Screws for attaching the music rest
• Cap for the stand screws on the rear of the AT-900C
• Stopper for the pedal keyboard included with the AT-900C stand
• Stopper screws for the pedal keyboard included with the AT-900C stand
• AT-900C stand assembly screws

Do not remove the speaker grille and speaker

Do not remove the speaker grille and speaker by any means. Speaker not user replaceable. Shock hazardous voltages and currents are present inside the enclosure.

* GS () registered trademark of Roland Corporation.
* XGlite ( ) is a registered trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
* All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

Power Supply

• Do not connect this device to the same electrical outlet as an inverter-controlled device such as a refrigerator, microwave oven, or air conditioner, or a device that contains an electric motor. Depending on how the other device is used, power supply noise could cause this device to malfunction or produce noise. If it is not practical to use a separate electrical outlet, please connect this device via a power supply noise filter.
• Batteries are included with this device. These batteries are for the purpose of testing the operation of this device, and their life span may be shorter than normal.
• Before you make connections, you must switch off the power on all devices to prevent malfunction and/or speaker damage.
• Although the LCD and LEDs are switched off when the Power switch is switched off, this does not mean that the unit has been completely disconnected from the source of power. If you need to turn off the power completely, first turn off the Power switch, then unplug the power cord from the power outlet. For this reason, the outlet into which you choose to connect the power cord's plug should be one that is within easy reach and readily accessible.

Location

• If this device is placed near devices that contain large transformers, such as power amps, hum may be induced in this device. If this occurs, move this device farther away or change its orientation.
• If this device is operated near a television or radio, color distortion may be seen in the television screen or noise may be heard from the radio. If this occurs, move this device farther away.
• Keep your cell phone powered off or at a sufficient distance from this device. If a cell phone is nearby, noise may be heard when a call is received or initiated, or during conversation.
• Do not leave this device in direct sunlight, near devices that produce heat, or in a closed-up automobile. Do not allow illumination devices operated in close proximity (such as a piano light) or powerful spotlights to shine on the same location on this device for an extended time. This can cause deformation or color change.
• If you move this device between locations of radically different temperature or humidity, water droplets (condensation) may form inside the device. Using the device in this condition will cause malfunctions, so please allow several hours for the condensation to disappear before you use the device.
• Do not allow items made of rubber or vinyl to remain on top of this device for an extended time. This can cause deformation or color change.
• Do not leave objects on top of the keyboard. This can cause malfunctions such as failure to sound.
• Do not affix adhesive labels to this device. The exterior finish may be damaged when you remove the labels.
• (AT-900C) Depending on the material and temperature of the surface on which you place the unit, its rubber feet may discolor or mar the surface. You can place a piece of felt or cloth under the rubber feet to prevent this from happening. If you do so, please make sure that the unit will not slip or move accidentally.

Care

• For everyday care, wipe with a soft dry cloth, or remove stubborn dirt using a tightly wrung-out cloth. If this device contains wooden components, wipe the entire area following the direction of the grain. The finish may be damaged if you continue strongly rubbing a single location.
• If water droplets should adhere to this device, immediately wipe them off using a soft dry cloth.
• Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, or alcohol, since these can cause deformation or color change.

Servicing

- If you return this device for servicing, the contents of memory may be lost. Please store important contents on USB memory, or make a note of the contents. We take utmost care to preserve the contents of memory when performing service, but there may be cases when the stored content cannot be recovered because the memory section has malfunctioned. Please be aware that we cannot accept responsibility for the recovery of lost memory content or for any consequences of such loss.

Other Cautions

• Stored content may be lost due to a malfunction of the device or because of inadvertent operation. You should back up important content on USB memory as a safeguard against such loss.
• We cannot accept responsibility for the recovery of any content lost from internal memory or USB memory, or for the consequences of such loss.
• Do not apply excessive force to the buttons, knobs, or input/output jacks, since this may cause malfunctions.
• Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.
• When connecting or disconnecting cables, grasp the plug (not the cable) to prevent short circuits or broken connections.
• This device may produce a certain amount of heat, but this is not a malfunction.
• Please enjoy your music in ways that do not inconvenience other people nearby, and pay particular attention to the volume at nighttime. Using headphones will allow you to enjoy music without having to be concerned about others.
• When transporting or shipping this device, package it in an appropriate amount of cushioning material. Scratches, damage, or malfunctions may occur if you transport it without appropriate packaging.
• If using the music rest, do not apply excessive force to it.

• Some connection cables contain a resistor. Do not connect such cables to this device. Doing so may make the volume extremely low or inaudible. Please use connection cables not containing a resistor.
  • (For AT-900)
  Before opening or closing the keyboard lid, always make sure that no pets or other small animals are located on top of the instrument (in particular, they should be kept away from the keyboard and its lid). Otherwise, due to the structural design of this instrument, small pets or other animals could end up getting trapped inside it. If such a situation is encountered, you must immediately switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the outlet. You should then consult with the retailer from whom the instrument was purchased, or contact the nearest Roland Service Center.

• The sensitivity of the D Beam controller will change depending on the amount of light in the vicinity of the unit. If it does not function as you expect, adjust the sensitivity as appropriate for the brightness of your location.

• In order to provide the highest possible image quality, the ATELIER uses a TFT liquid crystal display. Due to the nature of a TFT liquid crystal display, the screen may contain pixels that fail to light or that remain constantly lit, but please be aware that this is not a malfunction or defect.
• (For AT-900C) If you play at an excessive volume, a protection circuit will operate, causing the sound from the speakers to be temporarily muted. If this occurs, please lower the volume.

Floppy Disk Handling

(Using Optional Floppy Disk Drive)

• Floppy disks contain a plastic disk with a thin coating of magnetic storage medium. Microscopic precision is required to enable storage of large amounts of data on such a small surface area. To preserve their integrity, please observe the following when handling floppy disks:
• Never touch the magnetic medium inside the disk.
• Do not use or store floppy disks in dirty or dusty areas.
• Do not subject floppy disks to temperature extremes (e.g., direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle). Recommended temperature range: 10–50 degrees C (50–122 degrees F).
• Do not expose floppy disks to strong magnetic fields, such as those generated by loudspeakers.

- Floppy disks have a "write protect" tab which can protect the disk from accidental erasure. It is recommended that the tab be kept in the PROTECT position, and moved to the WRITE position only when you wish to write new data onto the disk.

Rear side of the disk Write Protect Tab Write (can write new data onto disk) Protect (prevents writing to disk)

• The identification label should be firmly affixed to the disk. Should the label come loose while the disk is in the drive, it may be difficult to remove the disk.
• Store all disks in a safe place to avoid damaging them, and to protect them from dust, dirt, and other hazards. By using a dirty or dust-ridden disk, you risk damaging the disk, as well as causing the disk drive to malfunction.

USB Memory Handling

• When connecting USB memory, firmly insert it all the way in.
• Do not touch the pins of the USB memory connector, or allow them to become dirty.
• USB memory is made using high-precision electronic components, so please observe the following points when handling it.
• To prevent damage from static electrical charges, discharge any static electricity that might be present in your body before handling USB memory.

• Do not touch the terminals with your fingers or any metal object.

• Do not bend or drop USB memory, or subject it to strong impact.

• Do not leave USB memory in direct sunlight or in locations such as a closed-up automobile. (Storage temperature: 0–50 degrees C)
• Do not allow USB memory to become wet.
• Do not disassemble or modify USB memory.

- When connecting USB memory, position it horizontally with the External Memory connector and insert it without using excessive force. The External Memory connector may be damaged if you use excessive force when inserting USB memory.

- Do not insert anything other than USB memory (e.g., wire, coins, other types of device) into the External Memory connector. Doing so will damage the External Memory connector.

- Do not apply excessive force to the connected USB memory.

- If you will not be using USB memory for an extended period of time, close the USB memory cover.

Handling the CDs (CD-ROMs)

• When handling the discs, please observe the following.
• Do not touch the encoded surface of the disc.
• Do not use in dusty areas.
• Do not leave the disc in direct sunlight or an enclosed vehicle.

- Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside (encoded surface) of the disc. Damaged or dirty CD-ROM discs may not be read properly. Keep your discs clean using a commercially available CD cleaner.

- Keep the disc in the case.

- Do not keep the disc in the CD drive for a long time.

- Do not put a sticker on the label of the disc.

- Wipe the disc with a soft and dry cloth radially from inside to outside. Do not wipe along circumference.

- Do not use benzine, record cleaner spray or solvents of any kind.

- Do not bend the disc. Bending discs may prevent proper reading and writing of data, and may further result in malfunction.

Copyright

• This product can be used to record or duplicate audio or visual material without being limited by certain technological copy-protection measures. This is due to the fact that this product is intended to be used for the purpose of producing original music or video material, and is therefore designed so that material that does not infringe copyrights belonging to others (for example, your own original works) can be recorded or duplicated freely.
• Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a copyright held by a third party. We assume no responsibility whatsoever with regard to any infringements of third-party copyrights arising through your use of this unit.

We want to take a moment to thank you for your purchase of the Roland Organ "Music ATELIER." The ATELIER is an electronic organ which provides a generous collection of rich organ sounds. In addition, it is designed to be easy to learn and use. In order to enjoy reliable performance of your new keyboard for many years to come, please take the time to read through this manual in its entirety.

* The AT-900 and AT-900C are abbreviated in this manual as "ATELIER" respectively.

Basic Concepts of the ATELIER Series

A full complement of organ sounds

A wide range of basic organ sounds, ranging from jazz organ and pipe organ to theatre organ, are onboard so you are sure to enjoy having access to all the sounds you expect from an organ.

Panel layout based on a tradition of emphasis on realtime operation

Based on the idea that you should be able to sit down and begin playing immediately, the operation buttons of the panel are arranged by function as dictated by classic organ traditions, ensuring easy and intuitive operation. All models of the ATELIER series feature the same operability, allowing you to start playing immediately even if you switch models.

High-quality sounds that you can use without editing

In addition to a full range of organ sounds, high-quality sounds such as strings and brass are also included onboard.

You can simply select sounds and enjoy playing the organ—no need to perform complicated editing operations.

Expansive lower keyboard with damper pedal for piano-like expressiveness

The piano is indispensable to contemporary music performance. All models of the ATELIER series contain high-quality grand piano sounds that you will enjoy performing. In addition, the range of the lower keyboard has been expanded, giving you greater expressive capabilities on the piano. A damper pedal and initial touch sensitivity are also provided, both necessities for piano performance.

Design utilizes your existing music data

The ATELIER series is designed so that even on new models, you will feel right at home and can begin playing immediately. Consideration has been given to data compatibility, and existing song data or Registration data can be moved to USB memory or used by connecting a floppy disk drive.

Music styles from around the world

Many of the best-loved musical styles from around the world (Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment patterns) are built in, allowing you to enjoy an international range of performances.

Utilizes SMF music files

Compatible with General MIDI 2, the world standard in SMF music files. Since an External Memory connector is provided, you can connect separately available USB memory or a floppy disk drive and take advantage of the wide range of commercially available SMF music files. You can also mute parts, allowing you to practice the part for each hand separately, and enjoy performing ensemble with the music files.

Features

Harmonic bars for creating organ sounds

The organ is equipped with "Harmonic bars," which are much like the controllers used on traditional jazz organs. By operating the harmonic bars, you can easily create a diverse variety of organ sounds.

By using the solo harmonic bars you can add orchestral sounds to the organ sounds for even more expressive performance potential.

Realistically expressing acoustic instrument performances (Articulation Voice)

In order to bring out the distinctive qualities of an acoustic instrument and perform in a musically significant way, it is essential to make use of the instrument's rich variety of tonal changes and diverse performance techniques (articulations). The ATELIER contains "Articulation Voices," which use Super Natural technology to realistically express the sounds and performance techniques of these acoustic instruments. For even more richly expressive performances, you can take advantage of aftertouch or a foot switch to modify the tone in various ways while you play.

Super Natural technology

SuperNATURAL

Proprietary Roland sound generation technology that realistically reproduces the tonal changes and performance techniques distinctive of an acoustic instrument, allowing you to perform music that is natural and richly expressive.

USB Memory

You can connect separately sold USB memory or a floppy disk drive, and play back SMF music files.

Performances you record or Registration data you create can also be saved on USB memory or a floppy disk, or you can save SMF music files or Registrations from USB memory or a floppy disk into internal User memory.

"Quick Registration" and "Music Assistant" functions

The "Quick Registration" function lets you use keywords to select wonderful Registrations created by top-ranking organists such as Hector Olivera. The "Music Assistant" function makes it easy to recall appropriate Rhythm and sound settings simply by selecting a desired atmosphere for your song.

Highly realistic Rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment functions

All Rhythms use data from performances by professional drummers, featuring high-quality patterns with all the grooves and subtle nuance of the real thing. In addition, you can use Automatic Accompaniments that are perfectly matched to each Rhythm to enjoy the feeling of playing with your own band in the background.

Human voices and phrases

In addition to a full array of organ sounds, the ATELIER series provides human voices such as "Jazz Scat," and human voice phrases such as "Amen."

Active Expression sounds

For some of the sounds, moving the expression pedal will vary not only the volume but also the tone, or add other sounds. From pianissimo to fortissimo, the tonal character of the sound itself will change as you perform a crescendo, or strings may appear behind the piano, creating dynamic changes in tonality.

Harmony Intelligence

The Harmony Intelligence function automatically adds harmony to the upper keyboard sound according to the chord you play in the lower keyboard. This gives you greater tonal depth and a more powerful performance.

76-note lower keyboard for plenty of range

The 76-note range can be split into zones, allowing a solo voice, pedal bass voice, percussion, etc., to be played independently for an even wider range of performance possibilities. Since the lower keyboard can be divided into a maximum of four parts, you have at your command expressive power that rivals that of a three-manual organ.

In addition, you can use the Drums/SFX function to play drum sounds or sound effects from the entire lower keyboard.

Connect external speakers for even greater presence

Using the Aux Out jack, the accompaniment parts and an enveloping ambience of RSS reverb sound can be played through external speakers to create the impression that you're playing along with a band or orchestra.

In addition, the drums, bass, and other sounds can be output separately, allowing you to adjust the volume balance during a concert.

Large, wide LCD

For convenience, the frame area of the wide LCD screen always displays buttons for frequently used functions. You can also view the tempo and measure number in any screen. The color liquid-crystal touch panel ensures excellent visibility and easy operability.

Conventions Used in This Manual

This manual uses the following conventions in the interest of simpler, more concise instructions.

• The AT-900 and AT-900C are abbreviated in this manual as "ATELIER" respectively.
• In this manual, an illustration of the AT-900 is sometimes used for explanatory purposes.
• Button names are enclosed in square brackets ("[]"), as in [Drums/SFX] button.
• On screen text is enclosed in angled brackets "< >", as in .

• [▲] [▼], [ ] [ ] means that you should press one or the other button.

Example: Reverb [▲] [▼] buttons, Tempo [◀] buttons.

- For easier readability, some screens and colors used here may differ in part from actual screens and colors.

- The act of lightly contacting the Touch Screen with your finger is called "touching."

- An asterisk (*) or a NOTE beginning of a paragraph indicates a note or precaution. These should not be ignored.

• (p. **) refers to pages within the manual.

- The diagram of the ATELIER at the top of the page shows the location of the buttons to be pressed, etc.

USING THE UNIT SAFELY.... 3

Important Notes......6

Main Features....8

Conventions Used in This Manual....10

Panel Descriptions.... 18

Before You Start Playing 20

Attaching the Pedalboard (AT-900)....20

Attaching the Pedalboard (AT-900C)....20

Setting Up the Music Rest....21

Connecting the Speaker Cable (AT-900C) 22

Opening/Closing the Lid (AT-900)....22

About the Adjuster (AT-900) 23

Connecting the Power Cord 23

Turning the Power On and Off 24

Turning On the Power 24

Turning Off the Power 24

Using Headphones 25

Using a Microphone 25

Using the Cord Hook 26

About the Hole of the ATELIER's Cabinet....26

About the Bench 27

Restoring All the Factory Default Settings 27

Using the External Memory 29

Connecting the USB Memory 29

Connecting the Floppy Disk Drive 29

Using a CD....30

Connecting a CD Drive 30

About the Display.... 31

Understanding the Main and Related Screens ....31

Convenient Functions 35

Listening to the Demo Songs....35

Choose a Keyword for Quick Registration Selection.... 37

Music Assistant Function 39

Music Assistant Search....41

About the Quick Guide Function....43

About the Index Menu....44

Settings for Easy Performance....46

Creating a Folder 47

Selecting and Playing Sounds.... 49

Selecting Voices 49

About the Voices and Parts ....49

Functions of the Upper/Lower/Pedal Bass Sound Select Buttons ....50

Selecting the Upper and Lower Voices ....51

Selecting Pedal Bass Voice ....52

Selecting Solo Voice ....53

Selecting a Voice Using the [Others] Button 54

Creating Organ Sounds (Vintage Organ) 56

Playing a Vintage Organ Voice....58

Realistically Expressing an Acoustic Instrument Performance (Articulation Voice) ......63

Selecting a Articulation Voice....64

Performing with an Articulation Voice....66

Using Aftertouch or the Expression Pedal....66

Making the Ideal Settings for Playing an Articulation Voice....67

Tips for Performing with an Articulation Voice 68

Performing with an Active Expression Voice 71

Performing with a Human Voice 72

Adjust the Volume Balance....74

Transpose the Pitch in Octave Units (Octave Shift)....76

Playing Drum Sounds or Sound Effects from the Entire Lower Keyboard (Drums/SFX)....78

Changing Drums/SFX Sets....79

Playing a Lower Voice with Percussion Instrument Sounds and a Voice Phrase (Manual Percussion) .80

Changing the Manual Percussion Sets.... 81

Sustaining Notes in the Lower Part (Lower Voice Hold) 82

Using Rhythm Performance 83

Selecting a Rhythm....83

Using Rhythms Stored in User Memory 84

Rhythm Search 85

Playing Rhythm 87

Starting at the Press of a Button 87

Starting the Rhythm Automatically When You Play the Lower Keyboard or

Pedalboard (Sync Start) 88

Stopping the Rhythm 89

Changing a Rhythm's Tempo....89

Playing the Count Sound at the End of the Intro 90

Playing Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment....90

Adding Variety to the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment ....91

Changing the Arrangement of the Rhythm and Accompaniment (Variation)....91

Playing Chords with Simple Fingering (Chord Intelligence)....92

Leading Bass Function 94

A Simple Way to Make Automatic Accompaniment Settings (One Touch Program) .....96

Using a Rhythm from a USB Memory....98

Reviewing the Rhythms on USB Memory 98

Copying Rhythms....99

Changing the Order of the Saved Rhythms 102

Renaming a Saved Rhythm....104

Deleting Saved Rhythm....106

Using the Registration Buttons 108

Storing Registrations....109

Recalling a Registration 110

How to Recall a Registration (DELAYED) 110

How to Recall a Registration (INSTANT) 110

Changing the Timing of Recalling Registrations 111

Automatically Registering When You Switch Panel Settings 112

Assigning a Name to a Registration Set....113

Saving Registration Sets....115

Loading Previously Saved Registration Sets Into the ATELIER 118

Loading a Set of Registrations 118

Loading an Individual Registration 119

Recalling the Order that the Registrations are Saved (Load Next)....122

Deleting a Set of Registrations 124

Changing the Name or Order of Registration....126

Copying Registrations 128

Using the Performance Functions 132

Transposing to a Different Key (Key Transpose) 132

Adjusting the Brightness of the Sound.... 133

Adding Decay to the Sound (Damper Pedal) 133

Using the Pitch Bend/Vibrato Lever 134

Using the Foot Switches....135

Changing the Function of the Foot Switch 136

Using the Foot Switch to Switch Registrations 137

Adjusting the Overall Volume Using an Expression Pedal....138

Adjusting the Depth of the Expression Pedal....139

Applying Various Effects to the Sound 140

Adding Harmony to a Melody (Harmony Intelligence) 140

Changing the Harmony Intelligence Type 141

Adding Modulation to the Sound (Rotary Effect)....143

Making Fine Adjustments to the Rotary Effect Speed (Rotary Speed).... 144

Changing the Brightness of the Rotary Effect (Rotary Color).... 145

Adding Richness to the Sound (Chorus Effect)....146

Adding Resonance to the Sound (Sustain Effect).... 148

Changing the Sustain Length....150

Adding Reverberation to the Sound (Reverb Effect)....151

Changing the Reverb Type.... 152

Changing the Wall Type 153

Changing the Depth of the Reverb 154

Using the D Beam Controller for Additional Enjoyment 156

Modifying the Sound....156

Moving Your Hand Above the D Beam Controller to Produce a Sound Effect.... 157

Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively 158

Making Effective Use of the Lower Keyboard....158

Playing the Solo Voice on the Lower Keyboard (Solo [To Lower] Button) 160

Changing How the Solo Voice Responds....161

Layering the Solo Voice and Lower Voice 161

Changing the Solo Split Point....162

Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Voice ([Bass Split] Button) 163

Changing the Bass Split Point....164

Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Voice (Pedal [To Lower] Button) 165

Recording/Playing Back What You Play 166

What is a Track Button? 167

Displaying the Track Buttons 168

Playing Back Performance Songs Stored on USB Memory and SMF Music Files....169

Silencing a Specific Track (Track Mute) 170

Muting Individual Tracks of Performance Data....172

Viewing a Notation 173

Changing the Notation Settings....174

Recording a Performance....176

Playing Back a Performance Song 177

Add a Count Sound to Match the Timing (Count In)....177

Recording Each Part Separately....178

Re-Recording....179

Erasing a Performance Song (Song Clear) 180

Changing the Name of a Performance Song (Rename)....180

Saving Performance Songs 182

Loading Performance Songs Into the ATELIER....183

Deleting Performance Songs Stored on "Favorites" or the USB Memory 184

Layering a New Recording onto SMF Music Files 185

Using Song with a Different Tempo Than That of the Performance Song.... 186

Re-Recording Part of Your Performance (Punch-in Recording) 187

Recording and Layering Drum Parts (Loop Recording)....188

Starting Recording at the Right Moment (Count-In Recording) 189

Copying Performance Song 190

Editing Your Musical Performance Data 192

Deleting a Specific Measure (Delete Measure)....192

Delete the Recording from a Track (Delete Track) 193

Erase Recording (Erase Event) 195

Copying Measures (Copy) 197

Correct Timing Inaccuracies (Quantize) 198

Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms 200

Preparations for Creating User Rhythms....201

Displaying the Rhythm Customize Screen....201

Selecting the Division ....202

Loading the Rhythm 203

Making the Division Settings 204

Creating the User Rhythm 205

Editing the Rhythm 205

Changing and Deleting the Instruments Used 208

Deleting Rhythms You Have Created 209

Saving the User Rhythm....209

Changing the Name of a User Rhythm (Rename) 209

Saving User Rhythms to the User Memory or USB Memory 210

Various Other Settings 211

Adjusting How the Instrument Responds.... 211

Turning Aftertouch On/Off 211

Adjusting the Depth of Aftertouch 211

Adjusting the Initial Touch Sensitivity 212

Changing the Pedalboard Polyphony....212

Performance Function Settings 213

Selecting the Keyboard Affected by the Damper Pedal 213

Changing the Function of the Expression Pedal....213

Choosing the Keyboard for which Pitch Bend and Vibrato will Apply....214

Changing the Pitch Bend Range 215

Adjusting the Sensitivity of the D Beam Controller 215

Rhythm Settings 216

Turning Chord Hold On/Off 216

Changing the Intro Countdown Sound (Count Down Sound) 216

Preventing Rhythm Tempos from Switching Automatically....217

Changing the Operation of [Intro], [Ending] Button and the Fill In Button .....217

Registration Settings....219

Changing the Timing at Which Arranger Settings are Recalled 219

Changing the Timing at Which Transposition Settings are Recalled....219

Composer Settings 220

Switching the Display of Lyrics On or Off 220

Changing the Key When Playing Back Songs (Playback Transpose)...... 220

Changing the Metronome Setting 221

Adjusting the Metronome Volume 221

Changing the Sound of the Metronome 222

Setting the Beat 222

Setting the Type of CD to Be Played Back 223

Adjusting the Timing of a Player Piano CD's Piano Sound and Accompaniment......224

Other Settings 224

Adjust the Standard Pitch (Master Tune).... 224

Adjusting the Mic Echo 225

Enabling Transmission of PC Numbers 225

Setting the PC Number....226

MIDI IN Mode.... 226

Selecting the MIDI Transmit Channel 227

Adjusting the Brightness of the Display 228

Eliminating the Bouncing Ball from the Main Screen....228

Switching the Background of the Main Screen.... 229

Changing the Ext Drive Connector Setting 229

Turning the Remote Function On/Off 230

Changing the Functions of the Remote Control's Buttons 230

Using the V-LINK Function.... 231

Repositioning the Touch Screen 232

Restoring the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings.... 233

Restoring All Settings Other Than the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings .....234

Formatting a USB Memory (Format)....235

Displaying a Graphic at Power-up 236

Deleting an Image Stored in Internal Memory....237

Copying Data from a Floppy Disk to USB Memory....238

Video-related Settings....239

Specifying the Television Format.... 239

Selecting the Aspect Ratio of the Video Output....240

Selecting the Type of Slide Show....241

Selecting the Interval at which Images will Change 242

Viewing the Contents of the ATELIER's Screen on a Television or a External Display ..... 243

Connecting with External Device.... 244

Name and Functions of Jack and Connectors 244

Connecting to Audio Equipment 245

Connecting an amp to produce sound (AT-900C) 246

Connecting a Computer....246

Making the Settings for the USB Driver 247

Connecting MIDI Devices....248

Connecting an External Display or Television 249

Changing the settings when external speakers are connected....251

Switching the Aux Out On/OFF 251

Switching the Aux Out Mode 251

Using the Remote 255

Installing Batteries in the Remote....255

Using the Remote....256

Remote Control Buttons.... 257

Enjoying Music and Video.... 259

Performing with a Background Image from a Video Camera 260

Performing with a Background Image from a DVD Player.... 262

Enjoying Powerful Sound and Big-screen Playback from Your Portable Audio/Video Player .... 264

Freely Switching Between Images 266

Enjoying VIMA TUNES Songs 267

Listening to a VIMA TUNES Song 267

Displaying a Slide Show while the Song Plays 269

Performing with Sounds that Match the Song (Recommended Tones)......271

Listening to Songs from Music CD 272

Enjoying Karaoke with a Music CD (Center Cancel) 273

Appendices

Troubleshooting 274

Error Message....281

Chord List 282

Glossary....284

Music Files That the ATELIER Can Use....285

The ATELIER Allows You To Use the Following Music Files....285

About the ATELIER Sound Generator ....285

Settings That Are Stored After the Power Is Turned Off....286

Settings That Are Stored After the Power Is Turned Off ....286

Settings That Are Stored In the Registration Buttons ....286

Settings That Are Stored In the Individual Registration Buttons....286

MIDI Implementation Chart 287

Demo Song List....288

Short Cut List 291

Main Specifications 292

Index 295

AT900 1 2 Organ Symphonic Orchestral 7 8 Video Input 10 9 Lower Audio Input 11 12 Vintage Organ Percussion 5 6 Power On 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Master Volume Rotary Sound 32 Rhythm Variation Tempo Fill In 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

1. Part Balance [▲] [▼] buttons → p. 74

Part Balance Indicator → p. 75

1. Lower Voice select buttons → p. 51

Lower Organ Part

Lower Symphonic Part

Lower Orchestral Part

[Alternate] button

Level [▲] [▼] buttons → p. 74

Level indicator → p. 75

1. Touch Screen → p. 31

2. [Harmony Intelligence] button → p. 140

3. Upper Voice select buttons → p. 51

Upper Organ Part

Upper Symphonic Part

Upper Orchestral Part

[Alternate] button

Level [▲] [▼] buttons → p. 74

Level indicator → p. 75

1. Solo Voice select buttons → p. 53

Solo Part

[Alternate] button

[To Lower] button → p. 160

Level [▲] [▼] buttons → p. 74

Level indicator → p. 75

1. [Power On] switch → p. 24

2. D Beam → p. 156, p. 157

3. Video Input buttons → p. 266

4. D Beam buttons → p. 156, p. 157

5. Upper Harmonic Bars → p. 56

6. Solo Harmonic Bars → p. 56, p. 74

7. Vintage Organ buttons → p. 56

8. Percussion buttons → p. 59

9. [H-Bar Manual] button → p. 60

10. [Video Monitor] button → p. 270

11. [Value] dial → p. 34

12. Pedal Harmonic Bars → p. 56

13. Lower Harmonic Bars → p. 56

14. Transpose [-] [+] buttons → p. 132

Organ Symphonic Orchestral 4 Harmony Intelligence Alternate Upper Lower Lower Alternate Alternate Solid 18-9 20 21 Transpose Composer Reset Play/Stop Rec 22 Top Top 2

1. Composer → p. 166

[Song] button

[Registration] button → p. 118-p. 128

[Demo] button → p. 35, p. 170

[Reset] button

[Play/Stop] button

[Rec] button → p. 176

1. Ext In jacks → p. 264

2. Lower

[Drums/SFX] button → p. 78

[Manual Perc] button → p. 80

1. Lower Voice [Hold] button → p. 82

2. [Pedal Sustain] button → p. 148

3. Global Settings → p. 46

[EZ One Finger] button

[EZ Touch] button

1. Pedal Bass Voice select buttons → p. 52

Pedal Organ Part

Pedal Orchestral Part

[To Lower] button → p. 165

[Bass Split] button → p. 163

1. Rhythm select buttons → p. 83

Variation buttons → p. 91

Tempo [ ] buttons → p. 89

Fill In [Auto] button → p. 91

Fill In [Break] button > p. 91

[Intro] button → p. 87-p. 89

[Ending] button → p. 87-p. 89

[Count Down] button → p. 90

[Sync Start] button → p. 88

[Start/Stop] button → p. 87, p. 89

Arranger [On/Off] button → p. 90

[One Touch Program] button → p. 96

1. [Master Volume] slider → p. 24

2. [Brilliance] slider → p. 133

3. Pitch Bender/Vibrato lever → p. 134

4. Rotary Sound → p. 143

[On/Off] button

[Fast/Slow] button

1. Registration buttons

[Write] button → p. 109

[Manual] button → p. 112

Registration [1]–[12] buttons → p. 108

[Load Next] button → p. 122

Attaching the Pedalboard (AT-900)

1. Detach the pedal cord that is temporarily fastened to the board on the upper part of the Expression Pedal.
2. Connect the pedal cord to the connector located at the right side of the Pedalboard.
3. Firmly tighten the screws of the pedal cable's plug.
4. Slide the Pedalboard firmly all the way back so that it is secure and unable to move.

Screw

Do not remove the fastener located near the Expression Pedal. Before transporting the AT-900, be sure to wind up the pedal cable so that there is no slack, and attach it to the fastener.

Attaching the Pedalboard (AT-900C)

A PK series pedal keyboard (sold separately) can be connected to the AT-900C.

The AC adaptor supplied with the pedal keyboard is not used. The pedalboard will be turned on/off by the power switch of the AT-900C, regardless of the position of the pedalboard's own power switch.

1. Make sure that the AT-900C and pedal keyboard (PK series) are powered off.
2. Use the PK cable that is supplied with the AT-900C to connect the AT-900C's PK IN connector to the pedalboard's PK OUT connector.

Roland

Once the connections have been completed, turn on power to your various devices in the order specified. By turning on devices in the wrong order, you risk causing malfunction and/or damage to speakers and other devices.

1. Turn on the power of the AT-900C (p. 24).

2. Make sure that the indicator on the rear panel of the pedalboard is lit.

Play the pedalboard. If you hear the pedal part of the ATELIER, connections are complete.

This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief interval (a few seconds) after power up is required before the unit will operate normally.

For details on pedal keyboard settings, refer to the owner's manual of the pedal keyboard.

For details on attaching the pedal keyboard and assembling the stand, refer to the leaflet that describes how to assemble the stand.

Setting Up the Music Rest

Attaching the Music Rest (AT-900)

1. Insert the supplied screws for the music rest into the screw holes located on the top of the instrument, and lightly tighten them (two locations).

Screw Screw

1. Put the music rest between the screws and the ATELIER's body.

Line drawing of a piano keyboard with an open tray and stand (no text or symbols)

1. While supporting the music rest with one hand, secure it in place by turning the screws.

When attaching the music rest, support it firmly with one hand to make sure that you don't drop it. Be careful, so you don't get your fingers pinched.

1. To set up the music stand, always use both hands to lift the base, and pull it gently toward yourself.

Illustration of hands using a tool to lift a flat surface, with a black arrow indicating the motion (no text or symbols present)

NOTE

Do not apply excessive force to the installed music rest.

NOTE

Be sure to use the supplied screws for attaching the music rest.

NOTE

Before moving the organ, be sure to remove the music rest to prevent accidents.

Attaching the Music Rest (AT-900C)

1. Place the music rest on top of the AT-900C and align the screw hole locations.

2. Insert the included music stand fastening screws into the screw holes of the music stand, and loosely tighten them (two locations).

Screw Screw

1. Put the music rest between the screws and the ATELIER's body.

Line drawing of a piano keyboard with an arrow indicating the key component (no text or symbols present)

1. While supporting the music rest with one hand, secure it in place by turning the screws.

When attaching the music rest, support it firmly with one hand to make sure that you don't drop it. Be careful, so you don't get your fingers pinched.

Removing the Music Rest

1. To remove the music rest, support it with one hand while loosening the screws.

2. Remove the music rest.

After removing the music rest, don't forget to retighten the screws.

Connecting the Speaker Cable (AT-900C)

1. Plug the speaker cable extending from the stand into the Speaker connector located at the rear of the AT-900C's bottom panel.

Pay attention to the shape of the speaker cable's connector, and insert it until you hear it click securely into place.

Roland Speaker Cable

Opening/Closing the Lid (AT-900)

Line drawing of a mechanical device with two arrows indicating motion or force direction (no text or symbols)

1. To open the lid, hold handles with both hands and lift it straight up. Then, slide it to the rear.

2. To close the lid, slowly pull it forward until it stops. Then, gently lower it into place.

NOTE Be careful not to get your fingers caught when opening or closing the lid. Adult supervision is recommended when small children are going to be using the instrument.

NOTE To prevent accidents, be sure to close the lid before moving the organ.

NOTE Make sure you don't have anything (such as sheet music) on the keyboard when you close the lid.

About the Adjuster (AT-900)

If you feel that the ATELIER has become unstable, for example after moving it to another location, turn the adjuster located on the bottom of the stand's legs as shown in the following.

- Rotate the adjuster to lower it so that it is in firm contact with the floor. Make adjustments so that there is no gap between the adjuster and the floor. In particular, when placing the ATELIER on carpet, turn the adjuster so that it is firmly in contact with the floor.

The legs of the AT-900's bench also have adjusters. If the bench is unstable, you can adjust its adjusters.

When turning the adjuster, be careful not to pinch your hand.

Connecting the Power Cord

1. First, make sure that the [Power On] switch at the panel's left side is OFF (not pushed in).

Power On

Upper position

OFF

1. Connect the supplied power cord to the AC Inlet connector, then plug the other end into an AC outlet.

AT-900 Related AC Outlet Power Cord

AT-900C Roland AC In Power Cord AC Outlet

Only use the power cord supplied with this instrument.

Whenever you do not intend to use the instrument for extended periods of time, pull out the power cord from the AC outlet.

Turning the Power On and Off

Once the connections have been completed, turn on or off power to your various devices in the order specified. By turning on or off devices in the wrong order, you risk causing malfunction and/or damage to speakers and other devices.

Turning On the Power

1. Make sure of the following before the power is turned on.

2. Is the power cord correctly connected to the AC inlet?

3. Is the power cord correctly connected to the AC outlet?
4. Is the [Master Volume] slider (located at the left of the Lower Keyboard) set to the Min (minimum) position?

1. Press the [Power On] button to turn on the power.

Power On

Lower position

The main screen will appear in the display.

Main Screen Biggest Band

This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief interval (a few seconds) after power up is required before the unit will operate normally.

1. Adjust the volume to an appropriate level by moving the [Master Volume] slider or operating the expression pedal.

Now adjust the [Master Volume] slider to a suitable level. The volume will be increased when the Expression Pedal is pressed down, and decreased when the pedal is returned.

increase the volume decrease the volume Master Volume

decrease the volume

me me

Turning Off the Power

1. Before switching the power off, set the [Master Volume] slider to the Min (minimum) position.

2. Press the [Power On] switch to turn off the power.

Power On

Upper position

OFF

If you need to turn off the power completely, first turn off the [POWER On] switch, then unplug the power cord from the power outlet. Refer to "Power Supply" (p. 6).

Using Headphones

The ATELIER features Phones jacks. These allow you to play without having to worry about bothering others around you, even at night.

Phenes Mic Vcc Mic MSU Out In USB

1. Connect your headphones to the [Phones] jack underneath the left side of the keyboard.

The sound from the built-in speakers stops.

Now, sound is heard only through the headphones.

1. Adjust the headphones volume with the [Master Volume] slider and Expression pedal.

Some Notes on Using Headphones

CAUTION

• To prevent damage to the cord, handle the headphones only by the headset or the plug.
• Headphones may be damaged if the volume is too high when they are plugged in. Lower the volume on the ATELIER before plugging in headphones.
  • To prevent possible auditory damage, loss of hearing, or damage to the headphones, the headphones should not be used at an excessively high volume. Use the headphones at a moderate volume level.
• Accepts connection of Stereo headphones.
• If plugs of the headphones are plugged into the [Phones] jack, no sound will be heard from the ATELIER's speakers.

Using a Microphone

Since this instrument has a Mic jack, you can use a microphone to enjoy a variety of possibilities such as singing along with your performance, or singing along with SMF music files (sold separately).

Phones Mic Volumes Mic Mio Out In USB

1. Connect your microphone to the [Mic] jack underneath the left side of the keyboard.
2. Use the [Mic Volume] knob to adjust the volume level for the microphone.

You can adjust the depth of the echo applied to sound from the microphone (p. 225).

The microphone must be purchased separately. When purchasing a microphone, please consult the vender where you bought the ATELIER.

Some Notes on Using a Microphone

CAUTION

• To avoid disturbing others, be careful of the volume level when playing late at night or very early in the morning.
- When connecting a microphone to the ATELIER, be sure to lower the volume. If the volume control is too high when the microphone is plugged in, noise may be produced by the speakers.
- Howling could be produced depending on the location of microphones relative to speakers. This can be remedied by:

• Changing the orientation of the microphone.
• Relocating the microphone so it is farther from the speakers.
• Lowering volume levels.

Using the Cord Hook

If you're using headphones or a mic, you can use the code hook to neatly bundle the cables near your feet.

Attaching the Cord Hook

1. Screw the cord hook (with wing nut) about 80% of the way into the screw Hole located at the bottom left of the organ.
2. After you've oriented the hook as desired, use the wing nut to fasten it.

Screw Hole Wing Nut Cord Hook

About the Hole of the ATELIER's Cabinet

AT-900

On the back of the AT-900 there are two holes through which you can pass cables.

When connecting an external device to the AT-900, you can pass the connection cables through these holes to the back.

1. Remove the cap from the cable pass-thru located on the back of the AT-900.
2. Pass the cables through the holes from which you removed the cover.

NOTE
If you remove a cap, keep it in a safe place so that it is not lost.

Roland

CAUTION

- Avoid inserting fingers into this hole.

AT-900C

On the back of the AT-900C there a hole through which you can pass cables.

When connecting a DVD player or other external device to the AT-900C, this allows you to organize the cables neatly.

1. Remove the cover from the cable pass-through located on the rear panel of the AT-900C.

Remove the screw that fastens the cover of the cable pass-thru.

2. Pass the cable through the hole from which you removed the cover.

Cable pass-thru cover Roland Cable pass-thru

* The side boards of the stand have grooves that allow the cables to be routed inside. You may use these if desired. For details, refer to the separate leaflet "STAND ASSEMBLY."

About the Bench

The bench seat can be opened, and sheet music and other items can be stored inside.

Caution When Using the Bench

CAUTION

- When opening/closing the seat, be careful not to pinch your fingers.

AT-900

AT-900C

Restoring All the Factory Default Settings

You can restore all of the settings stored in the ATELIER to what they were when the instrument shipped from the factory. This function is called "Factory Reset."

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The System screen appears.

System P.1/7 Send PC Switch OFF Bank MSB 0 Bank LSB 0 PC Number 1 Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. In the System screen, touch to open the Utility screen.

System Send PC Bank MS Bank LS PC Numb FactoryReset BMP Installer Panel Reset DiskToExtMem User Reset VIMA TUNES Touch Screen Video Exit Exit Utility J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. In the Utility screen, touch .

System Send PC Bank MS Bank LS PC Numb FactoryReset BMP Installer Panel Reset DiskToExtMem User Reset VIMA TUNES Touch Screen Video Exit Utility -130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

The confirmation message appears on screen.

Factory Reset OK? Cancel OK

If you touch , the Factory Reset will not be performed, and you will return to the System screen.

4. When you touch , the Factory Reset operation will begin, and the settings will return to the factory-set condition.

NOTE

Never switch off the power while this operation is in progress!

Executing...

NOTE

Loading factory default settings will erase any Registrations currently in the memory of the ATELIER. To save the Registrations you are currently using, refer to "Saving Registration Sets" (p. 115).

NOTE

If you want to restore settings other than those for User Memory (p. 84) to the factory-set condition, touch in the System Utility screen. If you want to restore only the User memory to the factory-set condition, refer to page 233.

You can also use the following method to return to the factory-set condition.

Method 1

1. Touch on the Main screen, to display the Quick Guide screen.

2. Press the [One Touch Program] button.

The confirmation message appears on screen.

Factory Reset OK? Cancel OK

If you touch , the Factory Reset will not be performed, and you will return to the Main screen.

1. When you touch , the Factory Reset operation will begin, and the settings will return to the factory-set condition.

Method 2

1. Turn down the volume to the minimum level, then turn off the power.

2. While holding down the [One Touch Program] button, press the [Power On] switch to turn the power on.

Power On

One Touch Program

The following screen appears.

Factory Preset is Loading...

Using the External Memory

Songs you record on the ATELIER and Registration sets you create can be copied to separately available USB memory for safekeeping. You can also copy songs to a floppy disk using a separately sold floppy disk drive (p. 99, p. 128, p. 190). You can also play back SMF music files saved on USB memory or a floppy disk (p. 169).

Use USB memory and floppy disk drive available from Roland. Proper operation cannot be guaranteed if other USB device is used.

Connecting the USB Memory

1. Connect the USB memory to the External Memory connector.

PUBP21

Carefully insert the USB memory all the way in—until it is firmly in place.

If you're using new USB memory or floppy disk, you'll need to initialize (format) it on the ATELIER. For details, refer to "Formatting a USB Memory (Format)" (p. 235).

Rotating the External Memory Connector Holder

The External Memory connector holder rotates 90 degrees left and right. Rotating the External Memory connector holder allows you to avoid damaging the connected External Memory if something happens to bump against it.

1. Grasp the External Memory connector holder and turn it 90 degrees to the left or right.

Be sure to grasp the External Memory connector holder itself when rotating it. Never rotate the External Memory connector holder by holding the connected External Memory.

Take care not to allow your fingers to become pinched when rotating the External Memory connector holder.

External Memory Holder 90 degrees to the left 90 degrees to the right

Connecting the Floppy Disk Drive

Attach the floppy disk drive as shown the figure, using the mounting holes on the ATELIER's bottom panel.

For details of the attachment, refer to the owner's manual of the floppy disk drive.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

1. Connect the USB cable of the floppy disk drive to the ATELIER's Ext Drive connector.

Ext Drive connector USB cable

Using a CD

You can play back audio CDs and CD-ROMs containing saved SMF music files.

You can also play songs on VIMA CD-ROMs (VIMA TUNES) sold by Roland.

Precautions Concerning Use of the CD

• The ATELIER is capable of playing back only commercial CDs that conform the official standards-those that carry the "COMPACT DISC DIGITAL AUDIO" logo.
• The usability and sound quality of audio discs that incorporate copyright protection technology and other non-standard CDs cannot be guaranteed.
• For more detailed information on audio discs featuring copyright protection technology and other non-standard CDs, please consult the disc vendor.
• You cannot save songs to CDs, and you cannot delete songs recorded to CDs. Furthermore, you cannot format CDs.

Connecting a CD Drive

CD drives that draw their power from the USB connector cannot be used.

Ext Drive Connector USB Cable

1. Switch off the power to the ATELIER and the CD drive to be connected.
2. Connect the USB cable included with the CD drive to the Ext Drive connector on the ATELIER.
3. Turn on the power to the ATELIER.
4. Turn on the power to the connected CD drive.

For information on how to perform the following CD-drive operations, refer to the owner's manual for the drive.

• Switching the power on and off
• Inserting and ejecting a CD

A list of the CD drives that have been tested and found to be compatible is available on the Roland website.

http://www.roland.com/

The ATELIER makes use of a Touch Screen.

This lets you carry out a wide variety of actions just by touching the screen lightly.

Understanding the Main and Related Screens

Main Screen

1 2 3 4 12 13 4/4 Transpose C C M: 1 5 6 Biggest Band 7 Quick Registration Music Assistant 8 Rhythm System Quick Guide 9 10 11 14 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main 15 16 17

Number	Description
1	Bouncing BallA ball will bounce in time with the Rhythm or song.
2	Beat
3	TransposeDisplays the keyboard transposition setting.
4	Chord NameDisplays the name of the chord that is played in the lower keyboard.
5	Indication buttonPressed to choose which name to have indicated; either the Rhythm Name, Song Name, or Registration Name.The name of the Rhythm will appear in the screen when you turn on the power. You can change this indication to the song name or the Registration name.
6	Rhythm Name/Song Name/Registration Name
7	Quick RegistrationPress this when you want to use the Quick Registration function (p. 37).
8	Music AssistantPress this when you want to use the Music Assistant function (p. 39).
9	RhythmYou can play Rhythms from this instrument, or play or store Rhythms from USB memory or User memory. Rhythm-related settings can also be made here.

NOTE

The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict what should typically be shown by the display. Note, however, that your unit may incorporate a newer, enhanced version of the system (e.g., includes newer sounds), so what you actually see in the display may not always match what appears in the manual.

NOTE

The Touch Screen is operated by touching it lightly with your finger. Pressing hard, or using a hard object can damage the Touch Screen. Be careful not to press too hard, and be sure to use only your fingers to operate the Touch Screen.

NOTE

The positioning of the Touch Screen may become displaced due to changes in the surrounding environment and over time. If this happens, follow the steps in "Repositioning the Touch Screen" (p. 232) to correct the pointer position.

NOTE

Do not place items on the touch screen.

MEMO

You can adjust the brightness of the screen (p. 228).

MEMO

You can make settings so that the bouncing ball is not shown in the main screen (p. 228), and change the background of the main screen (p. 229).

Number	Description
10	SystemMake various settings.
11	Quick GuideDisplays the Quick Guide screen.While the Quick Guide screen is displayed, you can press the keyboard, a button, or a foot switch to jump to the related setting screen (p. 43).
12	Tempo
13 Measure
14	Sound/KBD (Sound/Keyboard)Select a voice (tone), or make settings for the effect depth, keyboard, etc.
15	Rec/PlayPlay back or record a song. You can also view a notation display while a song plays.
16	RegistrationLoad Registrations from User memory into internal memory, or save Registrations. Registration-related settings can also be made here.
17	MainReturns you to the main screen if any screen other than the main screen is open.

V-LINK	This icon is displayed when the V-LINK function is on.→ V-LINK function (p. 231)
SMF	This icon is shown for SMF music files.
EDITED	This icon is displayed when any portion of the recorded song has been altered. This icon is also shown if you've recorded a song but not yet saved it.

Tempo, measure number, , , , and

are always shown in the right side of the screen.

About the Icons

Controller P1/3 L Foot Switch GLIDE R Foot Switch ROTARY FAST/SLOW Registration Shift OFF Damper Pedal to LOWER Exit

Drums/SFX P1/3 POP HIP HOP R&B VOX DRUM ROCK STANDARD JAZZ BRUSH STANDARD 2 Exit J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

Button	Meaning
	Depending on the function, some screens are spread over multiple pages.You can touch < ▼ < ▲ > < to displaythe next or previous page of the screen.In the Load screen, Save screen, or File Edit screen, you can select a file by touching < ▼ >. ▲
	Touch this when you want to exit (close) the currently displayed screen.
	This icon is shown for Active Expression voice.→ Active Expression Voice (p. 71)
	This icon is shown for EX voice.→ Ex Voice (p. 54)
	This icon is shown for Articulation voice.→ Articulation Voice (p. 63)

Sub-windows

When you touch or the like in a screen, a screen like the following will appear. This type of screen is called a "sub-window."

FactoryReset BMP Installer Panel Reset DiskToExtMem User Reset VIMA TUNES Touch Screen Video Exit Send PC Bank MS Bank LS PC Numb Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

You can return directly to the main screen by touching

shown in the right side of the screen.

When you touch a menu in the sub-window, the sub-window will close, and the selected menu screen will appear.

In a sub-window, touch to exit the sub-window.

Sub-windows for Setting Values

When you are making settings in the System screen, the following type of screen appears.

Factory	Return to the factory settings.
	Modify the value.

Controller P.1/3 L Foot Switch GLIDE R Foot FLIGHT/SLOW Registrar Factory + Damper Exit Main 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Exit

About the [Value] Dial

The ATELIER has a [Value] dial.

You can use the [Value] dial to change the tempo or edit the settings, or to select a file in screens such as the File Edit screen.

Editing the value of a setting (when a sub-window for editing the value is open)

Controller P.1/3 L Foot Switch GLIDE R Foot Registrar Damper GLIDE - Factory + Exit WER Exit Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

Switching files (when the File Edit screen, Save screen, or Load screen for Rhythms, songs, or Registrations is open)

Registration Load Internal Factory Reg. Next 01:REGIST-01 02:REGIST-02 03:REGIST-03 04:REGIST-04 Exit Media User Load go to Save File =130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

MEMO

If a sub-window for you to edit the settings is shown, you can use the [Value] dial to switch the settings.

Listening to the Demo Songs

The ATELIER provides demo songs. Here's how to play the Demo songs, and fully appreciate the sounds, Rhythms, and Automatic Accompaniment that are available with the ATELIER.

Composer Song Registration Demo Reset Play/Stop Rec

1. Press the [Demo] button to make the indicator light.

The Demo Screen appears.

Art.Violin In this song, the Art.Violin tone plays a sweet and colorful melody that draws its inspiration from a scene of cherry blossoms. The dynamic tonal changes, the lustrous vibrato, and portamento and pizzicato all combine to portray the rich expressiveness that is unique to the violin. Exit 125 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. Touch <> or <> on screen to select the demo song.

Art.Violin In this song, the Art.Violin tone plays a sweet and colorful melody that draws its inspiration from a scene of cherry blossoms. The dynamic tonal changes, the lustrous vibrato, and portamento and pizzicato all combine to portray the rich expressiveness that is unique to the music. Exit 125 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. Touch <> to start playback of the demo song.

When the selected demo song ends, the next demo song will begin playing.

For details on the composer of each demo song and their profiles, refer to "Demo Song List" (p. 288).

You can play/stop the demo songs by pressing the panel [Play/Stop] button.

1. Touch <> once again to stop playback of the demo song.

2. Press the [Demo] button to exit the demonstration screen.

If the following screen appears

If the performance song in the unit has not been saved to the "Favorites" (User memory) or USB memory, the following message appears, and it will not be possible to play the Demo songs.

Clear Song OK? Cancel OK

If you do not want to delete the performance data, touch .

1. If you want to delete the performance data, touch .

MEMO

The performance data can be saved on the "Favorites" (User memory) or USB memory. If you wish to save the performance data to the "Favorites" or USB memory, refer to "Saving Performance Songs" (p. 182).

NOTE

All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this material for purposes other than private, personal enjoyment is a violation of applicable laws.

NOTE

The data for the Demo song that is being played is not available at the MIDI Out connector.

Choose a Keyword for Quick Registration Selection

You can select a voice appropriate for your performance by selecting from keywords representing your situation, location, musical genre, etc. You can call up Registrations created by top-level organists, and refer to them for hints on how to select and layer sounds when creating your own Registrations.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

4 4 Transpose C C 130 M: 1 Biggest Band Quick Registration Music Assistant Rhythm System Quick Guide Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

The Quick Registration screen appears.

Quick Registration Classical P.1/2 Baroque Organ Beautiful Vienna Bach Style Classical Choir Romantic Organ Ave Maria French Organ Adeste Fideles Exit Pedal Lower Upper 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. Touch a button that shows a Quick Registration group.

Classical P.1/2 Baroque Organ Beautiful Vienna Bach Style Classical Choir Romantic Organ Ave Maria French Organ Adeste Fideles Exit Pedal Lower Upper 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

A sub-window appears, allowing you to select a Quick Registration group.

If another screen is open, touch

to access the main screen.

Classical American Jazz/Big Band European/UK Latin Oriental Movie & Show Harmonic Bar Festival Basic Theater Organ Favourite Song Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. In the sub-window, touch a Quick Registration group name to select the desired Quick Registration group.

The sub-window closes, and the Quick Registration screen returns to the display.

1. Touch , , or , switching the respective button's indicator on or off, to select the keyboard to which the voice is to be assigned.

Quick Registration Jazz P.1/3 Jazz Quartet Moonlight Oh, George... Sentimental Breathy Sax Licorice Stick String Bass Solo The Ensemble Exit Pedal Lower Upper 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

Setting	Keyboard for which you select a voice
Upper	Upper keyboard
Lower	Lower keyboard
Pedal	Pedalboard

1. Touch <> < > to switch pages, and touch the desired keyword.

The voice will be assigned to the selected keyboard.

If you want to continue changing the voice settings, repeat steps 2–5.

Music Assistant Function

A collection of the world's best, most well-known songs were carefully selected, then the optimum panel settings for each of them were determined, and the resulting data was stored inside the instrument.

Simply select the keyword that most closely suggests the character of the song you have in mind, and a Rhythm performance, a sound for the melody, and other selections will be made for you. Once you've selected a keyword, all you have to do is play the keyboard to start performing.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

4 4 Transpose C C 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main Biggest Band Quick Registration Music Assistant Rhythm System Quick Guide

The Music Assistant screen appears.

Music Assistant 1 Cent Lane 2Killa Sunrise 3/4 Christmas 3/4 Matilda 3/4 Tennessee 4 Love's Sake Exit Search 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

If another screen is open, touch

to access the main screen.

1. Touch <> < > to switch screens, and touch a keyword appropriate for the character of the song.

Music Assistant 1 Cent Lane 2Killa Sunrise 3/4 Christmas 3/4 Matilda 3/4 Tennessee 4 Love's Sake Exit Search

The Registration [1]–[4] buttons flash.

Panel settings appropriate for the keyword will automatically be called up for the Registration [1]–[4] buttons.

1. On the Lower keyboard, play a chord.
   At the moment you play the keyboard, the Intro will begin, and then the Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will play.
2. Press a Registration button from [1] through [4] to switch the panel settings.
3. Press the [Ending] or [Start/Stop] button to stop the Rhythm.
4. To end the Music Assistant function, press the [One Touch Program] button, extinguishing its indicator.

You can also switch screens by using the [Value] dial.

Music Assistant Search

You can specify a song name and other search terms and use these for a Music Assistant search.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Music Assistant screen appears.

Music Assistant P. 1 1 Cent Lane 2Killa Sunrise 3/4 Christmas 3/4 Matilda 3/4 Tennessee 4 Love's Sake Exit Search 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. Touch .

A sub-window appears.

Music Assistant 1 Cent Lane 2Killa Sunrise 3/4 Christ 3/4 Matild 3/4 Tenne 4 Love's S By Name By Conditions Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main Exit Search

Searching by Music Assistant Name

3. Touch .

Search By Name Specify initial letter of keyword to search, then touch . ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQR ST UV WX YZ Exit ABC/123 Start

If another screen is open, touch

to access the main screen.

4. Decide which character you will use for the search.

Enter the character you are searching for. For example, touching in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group ("A" > "B" > "C"...).

Touch to toggle between alphabets and numerals.

The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.

5. Touch (Start Search).

The results of the search appear in the display.

To cancel the search, touch in the Search Results screen.

6. Touch a Music Assistant name to select a Music Assistant.

Touch to return to the Music Assistant screen.

Searching by Conditions

3. Touch .

You can use four different criteria in searches: "Tempo," "Rhythm," "Genre," and "Scene."

Search By Conditions Tempo Any Rhythm Any Genre Any Scene Any Exit Start 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch the value for the search term.
2. Touch <▶◀> to adjust the settings.
3. Touch .
4. Touch (Start Search).

The results of the search appear in the display.

To cancel the search, touch in the Search Results screen.

8. Touch a Music Assistant name to select a Music Assistant.

Touch to return to the Music Assistant screen.

If you don't need to specify any search conditions, choose "Any."

About the Quick Guide Function

The ATELIER offers a Quick Guide function, which makes it easy for you to access various functions. While the Quick Guide screen is displayed, you can press the keyboard, a button, or a foot switch to jump to the related setting screen.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The following Quick Guide screen appears.

Quick Guide * Try pressing buttons or keys, or operating the controllers! Exit Index Rhydun 10 System M: 130 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. While the Quick Guide screen is displayed, press a button, keyboard, pedal, or foot switch.

You will be taken to the screen that contains settings related to the button, keyboard, pedal, or foot switch that you pressed.

3. Make settings in the screen to which you jumped.

4. When you are finished making settings, touch to close the screen.

If another screen is open, touch

to access the main screen.

For more on keys, buttons, and controllers that can be used with the Quick Guide function, refer to "Settings That Are Stored After the Power Is Turned Off" (p. 286).

About the Index Menu

In the Quick Guide screen, you can touch to access the Index Menu. In the Index Menu screen, you can touch a keyword to jump to the setting screen for that keyword.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The following Quick Guide screen appears.

Quick Guide * Try pressing buttons or keys, or operating the controllers! Exit Index Main Audio System Quick Guide

2. Touch .

The following screen appears.

Transpose A B C D E F H I L M N O P Q R S T U V W Exit Rhythm 10 System Quick Guide 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. Touch a letter of the alphabet to select the first letter of the desired keyword.

4 Transpose C A B C D E F H I L M N O P Q R S T U V W Exit Ruyum (1) System Quick Code J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

The Quick Guide Index screen appears, and the keywords will be displayed.

Quick Guide Index S P.1/3 Save Regist Solo Mode Save Song Solo Split Point Send PC Switch Song Edit Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

4. Touch the desired keyword.

Quick Guide Index S P.1/3 Save Regist Solo Mode Save Song Solo Split Point Send PC Switch Song Edit Exit J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

The setting screen for the specified keyword appears.

1. Make settings in the setting screen that appeared.
2. Touch .

Settings for Easy Performance

The ATELIER provides a Global Settings buttons.

If you press the Global Settings [EZ One Finger] button, you'll be able to produce chords simply by holding down one or two keys of the lower keyboard.

If you press the Global Settings [EZ Touch] button, you'll be able to play at a fixed volume regardless of variations in your keyboard playing strength.

1. Press the Global Settings [EZ One Finger] button or [EZ Touch] button.

Pressing these buttons will make the following performance settings.

Button	Explanations
EZ One Finger	Chord Intelligence function will be onA chord will be detected when you hold down one or two keys of the lower keyboard.
	Pedal To Lower function will be onYou can sound the Pedal Bass voice by playing the root note of a chord on the Lower keyboard in the area that is playing the Lower voice.
	EZ Touch function will be onInitial Touch will be turned off, so that you'll be able to play at a fixed volume regardless of variations in your keyboard touch.
	Lower Voice Hold function will be onYou can have Lower voice continue to sound after you release you fingers from the keys, until the next key is played.
	Chord Hold function will be onWhen you use Automatic Accompaniment, and you take your fingers off the keyboard after fingering a chord in the lower keyboard, the Automatic Accompaniment will continue playing until you play the next chord.
EZ Touch	Initial Touch will be turned offRegardless of the Initial Touch settings of the Registration, Initial Touch will be turned off. You'll be able to play at a fixed volume regardless of variations in your keyboard touch.

These settings make it easier for you to perform.

2. Go ahead and perform!

MEMO

If you press the Global Settings [EZ One Finger] button to turn it off (the indicator goes out), the following functions will return to their factory-set condition.

• Chord Intelligence function
• Pedal To Lower function
• EZ Touch function
• Lower Voice Hold function
• Chord Hold function

MEMO

If you press the Global Settings [EZ Touch] button to turn it off (the indicator goes out), the Initial Touch functions will return to their factory-set condition.

Creating a Folder

You can create folders in a connected USB memory device or in User memory (Favorites).

If you want to create a folder in USB memory, connect the USB memory to the External Memory connector.

About folders

The ATELIER lets you create up to 99 Registration sets or songs. If you create a folder, you'll be able to save up to 99 Registration sets or songs in each folder.

You can create as many folders as you wish, limited only by the capacity of the media.

It's a good idea to save the Registrations in a folder for each song.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Registration Load screen appears.

Registration Load Internal Factory Reg. Next 01:REGIST-01 02:REGIST-02 03:REGIST-03 04:REGIST-04 Media User Load go to Save File Exit J - 130 M : 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. Touch .

The Registration File Edit screen appears.

Registration File Edit 01:REGIST-01 02:REGIST-02 03:REGIST-03 04:REGIST-04 05:REGIST-05 Rename Up Down Delete Create Copy Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

NOTE

You can't create a folder on a floppy disk.

Convenient Functions

3. Touch < >> to select the desired media.

Choose “Ext Memory” if you want to create a folder on USB memory or “User” if you want to create a folder User memory.

4. Touch .

A screen will appear, allowing you to specify a name for the new folder.

5. Assign a name to the folder.

Touch the screen to specify the desired characters.

Rename the folder as described in “Assigning a Name to a Registration Set” (p. 113).

6. When you've finished, touch .

A new folder with the name you assigned will be created.

Creating a folder in the Rec/Play (record/playback) screen

Here's how to create a folder in the Rec/Play (record/playback) screen.

1. Touch on the Main screen.
   The Rec/Play screen appears.

2. Touch <> (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Song Select screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Song File Edit screen appears.

1. Touch <> <> to select the media.

Choose “Favorites” if you want to create a folder in “Favorites” or “Ext Memory” if you want to create a folder in USB memory.

1. Carry out steps 4 through 6 of "Creating a Folder" (p. 48).

NOTE

Only lowercase letters and the _ (underscore) character can be used in a folder name.

NOTE

You can't create a folder that has the same name as an already-existing folder.

Selecting and Playing Sounds

Selecting Voices

You can play the sounds of various instruments on the ATELIER. These sounds are called "Voices."

About the Voices and Parts

The ATELIER has two manual keyboards and a pedalboard.

From top to bottom these are called the "Upper Keyboard," "Lower Keyboard," and "Pedalboard."

Upper Keyboard Lower Keyboard Pedalboard

Four parts, "Organ," "Symphonic," "Orchestral," and "Vintage Organ" are assigned to the Upper and Lower keyboards, respectively, and you can select one voice from each part. Plus, with the addition of the "Solo" part voice, you can have up to five voices playing simultaneously (the Solo voice can be played in either the Upper or Lower keyboard).

The Pedalboard has three parts: "Pedal Organ," "Pedal Orchestral," and "Vintage Organ." You can select one voice for each part, meaning that it is possible to play up to three voices simultaneously.

Keyboard	Parts
Upper Keyboard	Upper Organ
	Upper Symphonic
	Upper Orchestral
	Upper Vintage
	Solo(This voice is sounded only when the Solo [To Lower] button be extinguished)
Lower Keyboard	Lower Organ
	Lower Symphonic
	Lower Orchestral
	Lower Vintage
	Solo(This voice is sounded only when the Solo [To Lower] button lights up)
Pedalboard	Pedal Organ
	Pedal Orchestral
	Pedal Vintage

The explanation at left uses an illustration of the AT-900.

The AT-900C allows a pedal keyboard (PK series; sold separately) to be connected and used to play the voice of the pedal part.

To play a Solo voice on the Lower keyboard, select the Solo voice and press the Solo [To Lower] button (p. 160).

To play a Pedal Bass voice on the Lower keyboard, select the Pedal Bass voice and press the [Bass Split] button (p. 163).

Functions of the Upper/Lower/Pedal Bass Sound Select Buttons

Organ Full 1 Full 2 Full 3 Jazz 1 Jazz 2 Jazz 3 Pipe 1 Pipe 2 Pipe 3 Theater 1 Theater 2 Others Level Harmony Intelligence Alternate Symphonic Strings Slow Strings Synth Strings French Horn Chair Other Level Alternate Orchestrall Piano E.Piano A.Guitar E.Guitar Brass Harp Harpi Vibes Marimba Mandolin Baro Accordion Remonkai Other Level Alternate Upper

graph TD
    A["Organ"] --> B["Full 1"]
    A --> C["Full 2"]
    A --> D["Full 3"]
    A --> E["Lower 1"]
    A --> F["Lower 2"]
    A --> G["Lower 3"]
    A --> H["Pipe 1"]
    A --> I["Pipe 2"]
    A --> J["Pipe 3"]
    A --> K["Theater 1"]
    A --> L["Theater 2"]
    A --> M["Others"]
    N["Symphonic"] --> O["Level"]
    N --> P["Alternate"]
    Q["Orchestral"] --> R["Level"]
    Q --> S["Alternate"]
    T["Orchestral"] --> U["Level"]
    T --> V["Alternate"]
    W["Orchestral"] --> X["Level"]

To Lower Bass Split Organ Organ 1 Organ 2 Pipe Theater October Up Other Orchestral String Cirrhodesi Octave Up Electric Bass & Cymbial Others Pedal

Each time you press a voice button, its indicator will switch between being lit and being turned off. Voices that have their button indicator lit can be played.

Two voices of the same family are assigned to each voice button. Buttons with voices from two different families have the names of both voices printed on them.

The [Alternate] button switches between these two voices.

The [Alternate] button	Voice that will be selected
Lit	The voice indicated on the button is selected.
Unlit	Another voice of the same category as the voice shown on the button will be selected.For buttons to which voices of the same category are not assigned, the voice printed below the button will be selected.

NOTE

No sounds are produced, even when the keys are played, when the Voice button is unlit and all vintage organ voices are off.

Selecting the Upper and Lower Voices

Press the "Organ," "Symphonic," or "Orchestral" buttons for each Keyboard (Upper/Lower) to select the desired voice.

When the power is turned on, the Upper keyboard will play "Full Organ1" and the Lower keyboard will play "Lower Organ1."

Example: Selecting "Full Organ 5" for the Upper Organ, "Full Strings" for the Upper Symphonic, and Upper Orchestral "Grand Piano" for the Upper Orchestral.

1. Press the Upper Organ [Full 2] button (indicator lights).

The name of the selected voice appears in the display for several seconds.

Upper Organ Voice Full Organ2

Now when you play the Upper keyboard, the "Full Organ 2" will sound.

2. Press the Upper Organ [Alternate] button (the indicator lights).

When you play the Upper keyboard, the "Full Organ 5" will sound.

Each time you press the [Alternate] button you will switch between the two voices which are assigned the button.

3. Press the Upper Symphonic [Strings] button (the indicator lights).

Now when you play the Upper keyboard, the two voices "Full Organ 5" and "Full Strings" will sound simultaneously (mixed together).

4. Press the Upper Orchestral [Piano] button (the indicator lights).

When you play the Upper keyboard, "Grand Piano" will be added, producing a mixture of three different voices.

The lower voice can be selected in the same way as the upper voice.

Selecting Pedal Bass Voice

Immediately after the power is turned on, the Pedal Bass voice will sound single notes using the "Organ Bass1" voice.

Press the buttons of the various parts of "Pedal Organ" and "Pedal Orchestral" to select voices.

Example: Select "Pipe Org. Bs" for the Pedal Organ part, and select "Str.Bass Pdl" for the Pedal Orchestral part

Organ Organ 1 Organ 2 Octave Up Pipe Theater Others Orchestral String Contrabass Octave Up Electric Bass & Cymbal Others To Lower Bass Split 1 Pedal 2

1. Press the Pedal Organ [Pipe] button (indicator lights).

The name of the selected voice appears in the display for several seconds.

Pedal Organ Voice Pipe Org. Bs

Now when you play the Pedalboard, "Pipe Org. Bs" (Pipe Organ Bass) will be heard.

2. Press the Pedal Orchestral [String] button (indicator lights).

Now when you play the Pedalboard, the two voices Pipe Organ Bass and Str.Bass Pdl (String Bass Pedal) will sound simultaneously (mixed together).

Normally, playing the pedalboard will sound one note at a time. Settings can be adjusted to allow multiple notes to be played on the Pedalboard (p. 212).

If you press the Pedal [To Lower] button (indicator lights → p. 165) or [Bass Split] button (indicator lights → p. 163), the Pedal Bass voice can now be played by the Lower keyboard, not by the Pedalboard.

The Pedal Organ part has an [Octave Up] button. Notice that when the [Octave Up] button is on, the selected Pedal Bass voice will sound an octave higher.

Selecting Solo Voice

The Solo section of the Upper keyboard is monophonic, that is, the Solo voice will only sound for the highest note played on the Upper keyboard. This allows you to play full chords and have the selected Solo voice playing the highest (solo) note.

Example: Selecting "Trumpet" for the Solo part

1 Violin Trumpet Sax Flute Oboe Others Alternate To Lower Level Solo

1. Press the Solo [Trumpet] button (indicator lights).

The name of the selected voice appears in the display for several seconds.

Solo Voice Trumpet

Play the Upper keyboard. The selected voice will sound by the highest note played.

When you press the [Alternate] button, the two voices assigned to the button will alternate.

You can use the Solo part's harmonic bar to adjust the volume of the Solo part (p. 74).

By pressing the Solo [To Lower] button, you can play the Solo voice from the Lower keyboard. For details refer to "Playing the Solo Voice on the Lower Keyboard (Solo [To Lower] Button)" (p. 160).

It is possible to change how a Solo voice will sound. Normally, the Solo voice will be sounded by the highest note you play on the Upper keyboard, but you can make settings so that the last-played note will sound the Solo voice. For details, refer to "Changing How the Solo Voice Responds" (p. 161).

You can use the Solo [Others] button to select richly expressive sounds (articulation voices) (p. 63).

Selecting a Voice Using the [Others] Button

Notice that there is an [Others] button for each part. By using the [Others] button, you can select all voices.

As with the other voice buttons, the [Others] button can be assigned two voices (one voice for "Pedal Organ" and one for "Pedal Orchestral"). You can use the [Alternate] button to switch between these two voices.

1. Press the [Alternate] button for the Part for which you wish to specify a voice to select ON (lit) or OFF (dark).

The setting of the [Alternate] button: ON (lit) or OFF (dark), determines to which of the two available locations a newly selected voice will be assigned.

2. Press the [Others] button for the Part for which you wish to specify a voice.

The Others Voice screen appears for several seconds.

Upper Organ Organ P.9/12 Theater 0r.3 Theater 0r.4 Theater 0r.5 Theater 0r.6 Theater 0r.7 Theater Ens. LyricTheater TheaterQuint Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. Touch a button that shows a sound group.

Organ P.9/12 Theater Or.3 Theater Or.7 Theater Or.4 Theater Ens. Theater Or.5 LyricTheater Theater Or.6 TheaterQuint Exit J - 130 M : 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

Step 1 is unnecessary in the case of Pedal Bass Part.

NOTE

When you press the [Others] button, the Others Voice screen appears in the display screen, but the basic screen will reappear if you wait several seconds without touching the screen.

If you want to change the voice for the [Others] button, press the [Others] button once more, then select the voice by quickly touching the screen while the Others Voice screen appears in the display.

A voice indicated by called an "EX voice." These voices are especially recommended.

Sounds marked by " " ACT EXP I support the Active Expression function (p. 71).

A sub-window appears, allowing you to select a sound group.

Organ Brass/Sax Strings Woodwinds Human Voice Lead/Pad Piano Bass Guitar Percussion AEx Voice Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

4. In the sub-window, touch a sound group name to select the desired sound group.

The indicator of the selected [Others] button will blink.

The Others Voice screen appears, showing the sounds of the specified sound group.

Upper Organ Strings P.1/5 Full Strings Chamber Str2 Full Tremolo Orch.Str.Ens Str/Spiccato Strings1 Chamber Str Strings2 Exit

1. Touch <> < > to switch screens, and touch a voice name to select a voice.

2. Once again, press the blinking [Others] button to confirm the voice.

The indicator of the [Others] button will change from blinking to lit.

MEMO

You can touch in the Voice Select screen to have only the Active Expression voices be displayed.

"Active Expression voices" can be assigned to the [Others] buttons of the Upper Orchestral part, Lower Orchestral part, Pedal Orchestral part, and Solo part.

For more on the active expression voices, refer to "Performing with an Active Expression Voice" (p. 71).

MEMO

You can also confirm the voice by touching in the Others Voice (Other Voice select) screen. You can also press the key for the part containing a changed voice to confirm the voice setting.

MEMO

For more information about the voices that can be assigned to an [Others] button, please refer to "Voice List" (Appendix: separate booklet).

Creating Organ Sounds (Vintage Organ)

The Vintage Organ button lets you add three types of vintage organ sounds to the upper, lower, and pedal parts.

In addition, you can also use the harmonic bars to modify the selected sound as desired.

The ATELIER provides nine harmonic bars for the upper part and lower part respectively, and two harmonic bars for the pedal part.

Each harmonic bar is assigned a sound of a different footage (pitch), and by layering these sounds you can create a variety of organ tones.

Vintage Organ Flute Pipe Theater Pedal Lower

Harmonic Bar

By sliding the harmonic bars forward or backward (in or out), you can adjust the volume of the various footages.

The volume can be adjusted over nine steps (0–8).

When a harmonic bar is pulled out all the way (8), the volume is loudest.

When it is pushed in all the way (0), there will be no sound.

8' is the footage that forms the basic pitch of the sound; this is the center around which you create the tone.

Each harmonic bar is assigned a sine wave (a pure pitch without overtones) of a different pitch, and by combining these pitches you can create a wide range of sounds.

You can use the Solo part's harmonic bars to adjust the volume of the Solo part voice.

If you've selected "Pipe" or "Theater" as the vintage organ type, the harmonic bars will turn the various footages on or off.

8' volume: 8 4' volume: 5 Time

What's the feet?

"Feet" is a term that began as a measurement of the length of the pipes in a pipe organ.

The pipes that produce the basic pitch (fundamental) for each note are considered to be "8 feet" in length. Therefore, a pipe producing a pitch one octave below that of the reference of 8' (eight feet) would be 16'; for one octave above the reference, the pipe would be 4', and to take the pitch up yet another octave it would be shortened to 2'.

The pitches of the harmonic bars are related as follows.

When the middle C (C4) note is pressed, each harmonic bar will sound the following notes.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 16' 8' 4'12'1'5 one octave below 8' 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 22/3' 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 13/5' 1 1/3' 15th 17th 19th 22nd 8' =

On tonewheel organs, the high-pitched footage for a portion of the high range, and the low-pitched footage for a portion of the low range are "folded-back" in units of one octave.

Folding back the high-frequency portion prevents the high-frequency sounds from being unpleasantly shrill, and folding back the low-frequency portion prevents the sound from becoming "muddy."

On the ATELIER faithfully simulates this characteristic.

Playing a Vintage Organ Voice

Selecting the Type of Vintage Organ

1. Press one of the Vintage Organ buttons so its indicator is lit.

Each time you press the button, the indicator will alternate between ON (lit) and OFF.

Vintage Organ

Flute	Pipe	Theater

There are three types of vintage organ.

Button	Description
[Flute] button	Full Organ
[Pipe] button	Pipe Organ
[Theater] button	Theater Organ

Modifying the Sound

2. Slide the harmonic bars that you want to hear.

You can layer the sound of multiple harmonic bars.

Various pitches can be combined for the Lower keyboard in the same way as for the Upper keyboard.

Vintage Organ Type	Function of the Harmonic Bars
Flute	Slide the harmonic bars to adjust the volume of each footage over a range of nine steps (0–8).
Pipe	Use the harmonic bars to turn each footage on/off. Pulling a harmonic bar out will turn it on, and pushing it in will turn it off.
Theater

The harmonic bar for the Solo part will adjust the volume of the voice selected for the Solo part. When you move the Solo part's harmonic bar, the Solo part's level indicator will also change.

NOTE

The glide effect cannot be applied to vintage organ voices. Additionally, if the vintage organ type is "Flute," the pitch bend and sustain effects cannot be applied.

MEMO

Percussion is often used with Flute. It can also be used with Pipe or Theater, but if you have selected percussion for Flute, switching to Pipe or Theater will cause percussion to be cancelled automatically.

Adding Sparkle to the Sound (Percussion)

This adds an attack sound to the beginning of the note, making the sound crisper.

3. Press the Percussion [4'] button or [2 2/3'] button (indicator lit).

Play the Upper keyboard and notice that an attack has been added.

Percussion 4' 2½/3' Fast Decay

Button	Description
Percussion [4'] button	Percussion one octave above
Percussion [2 2/3'] button	Percussion one octave and a fifth above

Adjusting the Rate at which the Percussion Decays

You can shorten the decay time of the percussion sound.

4. Press the Percussion [Fast Decay] button to switch the indicator between lit/unlit.

Percussion 4' 2½' Fast Decay

[Fast Decay] Button	Description
Lit	The percussion sound will disappear quickly.The percussion will have a sharper attack.
Unlit	The percussion sound will disappear slowly.The percussion will have a more gentle attack.

NOTE

Percussion [4'] and [2 2/3'] buttons cannot be used simultaneously.

NOTE

The Percussion [4'] button and Percussion [2 2/3'] button are valid only for vintage organ voices of the upper part.

Using the Harmonic Bar Settings of the Panel

If you've edited the harmonic bar settings in the screen, or if you've switched Registrations so that the Vintage Organ settings have changed, you can switch the Vintage Organ settings to the positions (settings) of the harmonic bars on the panel (p. 56).

1. Press the [H-Bar Manual] button.

A vintage organ screen will appear.

There are two types of vintage organ screens.

Vintage Organ Screen

When the Vintage Organ Type is "Flute"

Upper Vintage Organ Type Flute J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main Exit Hold Vib Cho U/L/P

The screen will show the harmonic bars.

By touching the harmonic bars and sliding them, you can adjust the volume of each footage. The volume can be adjusted over nine steps (0–8).

When a harmonic bar is pulled out all the way (8), the volume is loudest. When it is pushed in all the way (0), there will be no sound.

Icon	Description
Vib (Vibrato)	Adds a vibrato effect to the sound.
Cho (Chorus)	Adds a chorus effect to the sound.
U/L/P	Touching < CU/L/P > cycles you through the available choices, which are: Upper Vintage screen, Lower Vintage screen, and Pedal Vintage screen.
Hold	The Vintage Organ screen will automatically close after it has been displayed for several seconds. If you touch, the screen will remain displayed until you touch once again.

When you touch the Vintage Organ screen and then change the settings, the screen is held in that condition.

By touching the screen and sliding your fingertip to the left or right (horizontally), you can adjust the volume of all harmonic bars.

It is not possible to apply both vibrato and chorus simultaneously.

When the Vintage Organ Type is "Pipe" or "Theater"

Upper Vintage Organ Type Pipe 16' 5½' 8' 4' 2½' 2' 1½' 1½' 1' Exit Hold U/L/P 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

The buttons displayed in the screen are called "tablets."

You can press each tablet to turn it on/off.

You can turn tablets on/off by moving the harmonic bars in the panel.

Adjusting the Volume of the Flute Vintage Organ

If you've selected "Flute" as the vintage organ type, you can adjust the overall volume of the Flute sound to regulate the volume balance relative to the other sounds.

If you've selected "Pipe" or "Theater," the volume of the upper/lower/pedal organ part will change at the same time.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

4 4 Transpose C C 130 Volume 1 Biggest Band Sound/KBD Quick Registration Music Assistant Rhythm System Quick Guide Main

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

Sound/Keyboard Upper Org Full Organ1 Sym Orch Full Strings Grand Piano Solo Flute3 Lower Org Lower Organ1 Sym Orch. Str.Ens Orch Pedal Org Organ Bass1 Orch Str.Bass Pdl Exit Controller Effect SplitPoint J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. Touch .

The Effect screen appears.

Effect P.1/3 Rotary Speed NORMAL Rotary Color BRIGHT Reverb Type HALL 2 Wall Type ACOUSTIC TILE Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. Touch <> < > to display the VintageFlute Volume.

Effect P.3/3 Rev Depth A.Bass AUTO Rev Depth Vintage 8 VintageFlute Volume 9 Exit

4. Touch the value setting buttons for VintageFlute Volume to adjust the setting.

Effect P.3/3 Rev Depth A Bass AUTO 9 Rev Dep Vintage Factory + Exit Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

5. Touch < >> < > to edit the value.

Setting
1-12

6. Touch .

Realistically Expressing an Acoustic Instrument Performance (Articulation Voice)

What is an Articulation Voice?

In order to bring out the distinctive qualities of an acoustic instrument and perform in a musically significant way, it is essential to employ the instrument's rich variety of tonal changes and diverse performance techniques (articulations). Voices that are able to realistically express these acoustic instrument sounds and techniques are called "articulation voices" on the ATELIER. By using articulation voices, you can express the sounds and techniques of such instruments in real time.

Playing an Articulation Voice

When playing an articulation voice, playing the keyboard legato or staccato will cause the sound to change according to your playing technique. By also using aftertouch, foot switch, etc., while you play, you can apply a variety of effects to the sound, making your performance even richer and more realistic.

Terms Used with Articulation Voices

Legato playing

This refers to the play of successive notes without causing a break between them to be perceived. On a keyboard instrument, you would play the next note slightly before releasing the currently held key, causing the notes to briefly overlap.

Staccato playing

This is the opposite of legato playing, and means that you clearly separate each note you play. In other words, you would release the currently held key before playing the next note.

Dynamics

This refers to the variations between loud and soft when playing an instrument, and includes not only changes in volume but also performance techniques that affect the tonal character. For articulation voices, you can use aftertouch, initial touch, and expression pedal to vary the dynamics.

Portamento

This is a technique in which the pitch is changed smoothly from one note to the next. This smooth change in pitch is particularly effective when playing bowed string sounds such as violin or cello, or trombone.

What is aftertouch?

This allows you to apply various effects to the sound by pressing down on the key after you've played a note.

What is initial touch?

This refers to the way in which the loudness or character of the sound is affected by the force with which you strike the keys. Slight variations in your playing touch can add expressive character to the sound.

Selecting a Articulation Voice

Articulation voices can be selected only using the Solo part's [Others] button.

1. Press the Solo [Others] button.

The Others Voice screen appears for several seconds.

Solo Brass/Sax P.6/9 HarmonMuteTp AEx Trumpet Cup Mute Tp. Flugel Horn Mute Trumpet TromboneSolo MuteTrumpet2 Trombone Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. Touch a button that shows a sound group.

Brass/Sax Harmonmute1p AEx Trumpet Cup Mute Tp. Flugel Horn Mute Trumpet TromboneSolo MuteTrumpet2 Trombone Exit

A sub-window appears, allowing you to select a sound group.

Organ Brass/Sax Strings Woodwinds Human Voice Lead/Pad Piano Bass Guitar Percussion AEx Voice Art. Voice Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

NOTE

Articulation voices cannot be selected using the [Others] button of parts other than the Solo part.

NOTE

When you press the [Others] button, the Others Voice screen appears in the display screen, but the basic screen will reappear if you wait several seconds without touching the screen.

If you want to change the voice for the [Others] button, press the [Others] button once more, then select the voice by quickly touching the screen while the Others Voice screen appears in the display.

3. In the sub-window, touch (Articulation Voice).

The indicator of the Solo [Others] button will blink.

The Others Voice (Others Voice Select) screen appears, and only the Articulation Voices from the entire collection are displayed.

Solo Art. Voice P.1/1 Art.Violin Art.Cello Art.Trombone Art.TenorSax Exit Auto Set 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

4. Touch a voice name to select a voice.

Solo Art. Voice P.1/1 Art.Violin Art.Cello Art.Trombone Art.TenorSax Exit Auto Set 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

5. Once again, press the blinking Solo [Others] button to confirm the voice.

The indicator for the [Others] button of the Solo part will change from blinking to lit, and the articulation voice will be selected.

You can also confirm the voice by touching in the Others Voice (Other Voice select) screen.

You can also press the key for the part containing a changed voice to confirm the voice setting.

Performing with an Articulation Voice

Articulation voices let you vary the character of the sound by changing your playing technique.

If you play legato, the sound will change smoothly between notes. If you play staccato, the sound will have a crisp attack.

Using Aftertouch or the Expression Pedal

Aftertouch will affect the dynamics and vibrato of an articulation voice. As you apply stronger pressure to the keyboard, the dynamics will increase and the vibrato will become deeper. As you relax your pressure on the keyboard, the dynamics will decrease and the vibrato will become shallower.

The expression pedal will vary the dynamics and vibrato in the same way as aftertouch, but for voices other than the Solo part, the volume will change in the same way as a conventional expression pedal. You should use aftertouch if you want to apply expressive effects only to the articulation voice.

After Touch -> p. 63

Dynamics -> p. 63

What is vibrato?

This is an effect that modulates the pitch of the notes you play on the keyboard.

Making the Ideal Settings for Playing an Articulation Voice

You can perform even more effectively with an articulation voice by making the appropriate solo mode and foot switch settings.

You can automatically set these controller settings so that they are ideal for performing with an articulation voice.

1. In the articulation voice select screen, touch .

Solo Art. Voice P.1/1 Art.Violin Art.Cello Art.Trombone Art.TenorSax Exit Auto Set J: 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

The following message appears.

The following settings will be changed to the optimal settings for playing an articulation voice. OK? After Touch: ON Solo Mode: POLYPHONIC L Foot Switch: ART.CONTROL 1 Cancel OK

To cancel the change, touch .

2. Touch to change the setting.

The settings will be changed as follows.

Item	Setting Page
After Touch ON p. 211
Solo Mode POLYPHONIC p. 161
L Foot Switch ART. CONTROL1 p. 136

Tips for Performing with an Articulation Voice

Distinctive Features of the Violin (Art.Violin)

The distinctive character of the violin lies in its rich vibrato, the portamento playing technique, which allows the pitch to be changed smoothly, and the pizzicato technique, in which the string is plucked with a finger.

The Art.Violin sound lets you express these distinctive features of the violin.

Performance tips

Changes in the tonal character and the depth of vibrato are very important elements of violin performance. The most important thing is to skillfully use aftertouch to control the dynamics. You can also emphasize the attack of the notes by playing a key strongly.

Portamento is another distinctive element.

In order to perform with portamento, set the foot switch setting to ART.CONTROL1, and play legato on the keyboard while pressing the foot switch. Playing the new note strongly will produce a rapid portamento, while playing the new note gently will produce a slow portamento. Quickly playing an upward or downward chromatic step will produce a violin-like effect in which the sound is completely connected. By using this at appropriate points in your phrases, you can perform in a highly effective way.

Normally, the Art.Violin sound will play monophonically, but if you play multiple keys simultaneously or play, you'll be able to play the multiple-stop notes that are distinctive of the violin (up to four-note chords).

Foot switch effect

Item Explanation
ART. CONTROL1	By playing the keyboard legato while holding down the foot switch, you can produce portamento that changes the pitch smoothly.
ART. CONTROL2	By playing the keyboard while holding down the foot switch, you can produce a pizzicato sound of the string being plucked with the finger instead of being played with a bow.

Recommended pitch range

G3-G7 (when Octave Shift is 0. Middle C is C4.)

Distinctive Features of the Cello (Art.Cello)

Important aspects of the cello's sound are its deep body resonances and the rich tonal changes. The Art.Cello sound lets you fully express these distinctive nuances of the cello.

"Multiple stopping" is a technique by which more than one note can be played simultaneously on a violin or other stringed instrument.

Performance tips

The basic performance techniques are the same as for Art.Violin.

You can use aftertouch and expression pedal to control the dynamics and produce a richly expressive mid- and low-range sound. Striking the keys more strongly will emphasize the attack by adding a brief sound of the bow scraping on the strings.

The pizzicato that is heard when you set the foot switch setting to ART.CONTROL2 and play a note lets you instantly change from arco (bowed) sounds to pizzicato (plucked). You can make effective use of this by switching between the two sounds at the right moment within a phrase.

The Art.Cello instrument has a low pitch range. If you're playing it on the upper manual, you'll probably want to set Octave Shift to -1 to increase the area in which the sound can be played effectively.

Foot switch effect

Item	Setting
ART. CONTROL1	By playing the keyboard legato while holding down the foot switch, you can produce portamento that changes the pitch smoothly.
ART. CONTROL2	By playing the keyboard while holding down the foot switch, you can produce a pizzicato sound of the string being plucked with the finger instead of being played with a bow.

Recommended pitch range

C2-F5 (when Octave Shift is 0. Middle C is C4.)

Distinctive Features of the Trombone (Art.Trombone)

The most distinctive feature of the trombone is the portamento effect obtained by using the slide. The Art.Trombone sound supports this performance technique.

Performance tips

The dynamics control produced by aftertouch and expression pedal lets you smoothly and naturally transition from a softly blown gentle sound to a strongly blow intense sound. Striking the keys more strongly will produce a briefly "overblown" sound.

The portamento technique, which smoothly changes the pitch, is an important part of the trombone's distinctive character, but can sound unnatural if overused. The key is to use it only at a limited number of points in the song where it will be most effective.

The Art.Trombone instrument has a low pitch range. If you're playing it on the upper manual, you'll probably want to set Octave Shift to -1.

Foot switch effect

Item	Explanation
ART. CONTROL1ART. CONTROL2	If you hold down the foot switch and play the keyboard legato, you will obtain a portamento effect in which the pitch will change smoothly.

Recommended pitch range

E2-A5 (when Octave Shift is 0. Middle C is C4.)

Distinctive Features of the Tenor Sax (Art.TenorSax)

From soft and gentle tones to crisp, strong notes, the Art.TenorSax sound lets you express the broad range of the tenor sax.

Performance tips

An important aspect of sax performance is to make skillful distinctions between legato and staccato. Be aware of the difference between playing a smooth phrase with a single breath, and playing a phrase with sharply distinguished notes.

The first note of a phrase you play will include the slight upward swoop in pitch that is distinctive of wind instruments. When you play crisp staccato notes or rapid passages, the corresponding nuances distinctive of a sax will also be expressed in an appropriate manner.

By letting up a bit on the aftertouch at the end of a phrase, you can express the sensation of the sound's natural decay as you stop blowing into the instrument. The same effect can be produced by returning the expression pedal slightly toward yourself instead of using aftertouch.

The growl effect produced by the foot switch ART.CONTROL2 is particularly useful when you want to emphasize a phrase in styles such as jazz. It's effective when used on one or two notes at a musical climax.

Foot switch effect

Item	Setting
ART. CONTROL1	By playing the keyboard legato while you hold down the foot switch, you can apply portamento to smoothly vary the pitch between notes.
ART. CONTROL2	By playing the keyboard while you hold down the foot switch, you can apply a growl effect, as if the performer was “moaning” while blowing into the instrument.

Recommended pitch range

G#2-D#5 (when Octave Shift is 0. Middle C is C4.)

What is the growl effect?

This is an effect produced by vocalizing into the mouthpiece of a sax while blowing. It produces the powerful and distinctively distorted sound unique to a sax.

Performing with an Active Expression Voice

For "Active Expression Voices," operating the expression pedal will control not only the volume but also the tone, or may add additional sounds.

1. Touch the [Others] button of the Part to which you want to assign an Active Expression voice.

The Others Voice screens appears. "Active Expression voices" can be assigned to the [Others] buttons of the Upper Orchestral part, Lower Orchestral part, Pedal Orchestral, and Solo part.

2. Touch a button that shows a sound group.

A sub-window appears, allowing you to select a sound group.

3. fIn the sub-window, touch (Active Expression Voice).

Organ Brass/Sax Strings Woodwinds Human Voice Lead/Pad Piano Bass Guitar Percussion AEx Voice

The indicator of the selected [Others] button will blink.

The Others Voice (Others Voice Select) screen appears, and only the Active Expression Voices from the entire collection are displayed.

Upper Orchestral AEx Voice P.1/4 AEx Pipe Mix AEx PipeOrg AEx T.Mix AEx Theater AEx Str+Trml AEx Str+Brs AEx Str+Chr Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

4. Touch <> < > to change screens, and touch a voice name.

5. Once again, press the [Others] button for the part whose sound you wish to set to confirm the voice.

The indicator of the [Others] button will change from blinking to lit. An active expression voice will be selected.

For details on the active expression voices that are available, refer to "Voice list" (Appendix: separate booklet).

NOTE

Although you can select an Active Expression voice with the [Others] button for parts other than Lower Orchestral, Upper Orchestral, Pedal Orchestral, and Solo, no Active Expression effect is applied. The (Active Expression) icon does not appear when an Active Expression voice is selected for a part for which the Active Expression effect is not being used.

Sounds marked by " " support the Active Expression function.

MEMO

You can also confirm the voice by touching in the Others Voice (Other Voice select) screen. You can also press the key for the part containing a changed voice to confirm the voice setting.

Performing with a Human Voice

In addition to sounds such as organ and piano, you can also play "human voice," which produces a vocal-like sound.

1. Press the [Alternate] button for the Part for which you wish to specify a voice to select ON (lit) or OFF (dark).

The setting of the [Alternate] button: ON (lit) or OFF (dark), determines to which of the two available locations a newly selected voice will be assigned.

2. Press the [Others] button for the Part for which you wish to specify a voice.

The Others Voice screen appears for several seconds.

Upper Organ Organ P.9/12 Theater 0r.3 Theater 0r.7 Theater 0r.4 Theater Ens. Theater 0r.5 LyricTheater Theater 0r.6 TheaterQuint Exit J = 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. Touch a button that shows a sound group.

Organ P.9/12 Theater Or.3 Theater Or.7 Theater Ens. Theater Or.4 Theater Ens. Theater Or.5 LyricTheater Theater Or.6 TheaterQuint Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

A sub-window appears, allowing you to select a sound group.

Organ Brass/Sax Strings Woodwinds Human Voice Lead/Pad Piano Bass Guitar Percussion AEx Voice Exit J = 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

For details on the Human Voice that are available, refer to "Voice List" (Appendix: separate booklet).

Step 1 is unnecessary in the case of Pedal Bass Part.

When you press the [Others] button, the Others Voice screen appears in the display screen, but the Main screen will reappear if you wait several seconds without touching the screen. If you want to change the voice for the [Others] button, press the [Others] button once more, then select the voice by quickly touching the screen while the Others Voice screen appears in the display.

4. In the sub-window, touch .

The indicator of the selected [Others] button will blink.

The Others Voice screen appears, showing the sounds of the Human Voice group.

The Others Voice screen appears, and the sounds of the Human Voice group appears.

Upper Organ Human Voice P.1/5 Jazz Scat F.Chorus Luh Jazz Scat 2 F.Chorus Who Jazz Scat 3 Jazz Doo Dreamy Choir Jazz Doot Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

5. Touch < >> > to switch the screen, and touch a voice name to select the desired voice.

Upper Organ Human Voice P.1/5 Jazz Scat F.Chorus Luh Jazz Scat 2 F.Chorus Who Jazz Scat 3 Jazz Doo Dreamy Choir Jazz Doot Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

6. Once again, press the [Others] button for the part whose sound you wish to set to confirm the voice.

The indicator of the [Others] button will change from blinking to lit.

MEMO

For some human voices, such as "Jazz Scat," the sound will change depending on the strength at which you play the keyboard. If the Utility menu setting "Initial Touch" (p. 212) is "OFF," the sound will not change in response to the dynamics of your keyboard playing.

MEMO

You can also confirm the voice by touching in the Others Voice (Other Voice select) screen. You can also press the key for the part containing a changed voice to confirm the voice setting.

Adjust the Volume Balance

The ATELIER allows you to adjust the volume balance individually for each Part.

Reverb SMF Phipes Organ Cinch Accom/ Pippe Pipe Pipe Theater Theater Lower 1 Lower 2 Lower 3 Level Symphonic Settings Choir French Horn Level Orchestral Plano E.Pane A.Guitar Bran Harp Hapo Viburn Hapma Acondon Acondo Level Alternate Alternate Lower

Organ Symphonic Orchestral Solo Harmony Intelligence Alternate Upper Level Alternate Alternate Level Alternate Lower Alternate To Lower Violn Thumper Sax Flute Close Guitar Piano E.Piano A.Guitar E.Guitar Bran Harp Vibes Vibrates Mancolin Barra Astridor Hemisphere Level Alternate Level

The following buttons are used to adjust the volume of a multiple number of Parts.

Button	Part
Accomp/SMF [▲] [▼] button	Automatic Accompaniment (except Bass)
	Playback of performance songs from something other than the ATELIER performance songs (for example: SMF music files)
Rhythm [▲] [▼] button(When the [Manual Perc]button is ON)	Manual percussion
Rhythm [▲] [▼] button(When the [Manual Perc]button is OFF)	Rhythm performance
	Drums/SFX
Pedal Organ [▲] [▼] button	Pedal Organ voice
	Bass note of Automatic Accompaniment

You can use the Solo part's harmonic bar to adjust the volume of the Solo part.

1. The volume levels of each part are adjusted using the corresponding [▲] and [▼] buttons.

Pressing the upper button ([▲] button) will increase the volume.

Pressing the lower button ([▼] button) will decrease the volume.

The volume can be set to any value from 0 to 12.

When the volume value shown in the display is 0, that part will produce no sound.

You can also press the [▲] button or [▼] button of the part whose volume you wish to adjust, so that the "Part Balance Monitor screen" is displayed for several seconds, allowing you to check the volume balance.

You can check the volume by viewing the Level indicators of each part.

Violin Trumpet Sax Flute Oboe Clarinet Others Level Alternate To Lower Solo

The Part Balance Monitor screen is displayed for several seconds and then closes automatically.

If you touch , the screen continues to be displayed until you touch .

Transpose the Pitch in Octave Units (Octave Shift)

The pitch of the sound played by the keyboard can be adjusted in one-octave steps. This function is called "Octave Shift." You can apply an Octave shift to all Parts.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

4 4 Transpose C C 130 M: 1 Rhythm Regist Biggest Band Sound/KBD Quick Registration Music Assistant Rec/Play Registration Main Rhythm System Quick Guide

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

Sound/Keyboard Upper Org Full Organ1 Orch. Grand Piano Sym Full Strings Solo Flute3 Lower Org Lower Organ1 Orch. Orch.Str.Ens Pedal Org Organ Bass1 Orch Str.Bass Pdl Exit Controller Effect SplitPoint J = 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. Touch either , , or .

Menu	Part whose pitch will change
Upper	To change the pitch of the Upper and Solo part
Lower	To change the pitch of the Lower part
Pedal	To change the pitch of the Pedal part

3. Touch < >> < > to display the Octave Shift.

4. Touch the part display of the part whose Octave Shift settings you wish to change.

Upper Keyboard P.1/6 Octave Shift Ahorus Reverb Depth Org Full Organ1 0 8 Sym Full Strings 0 FF 8 Orch Grand Piano 0 FF 8 Solo Flute3 0 9 Exit Pedal Lower Upper Main J = 130 M : 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

5. Touch <▶◀> to adjust the settings.

The value can be set to a range of +/- 3 octaves.

Upper Keyboard P.1/6 Octave Shift Chorus Reverb Depth Org Full 0 8 Sym Full 8 Orch Gra Factory + Solo Flu Exit 9 Exit Pedal Lower Upper Main Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

6. Touch .

You will return to the Upper Keyboard/Lower Keyboard/Pedalboard screen.

MEMO

You can open the Pedalboard screen, Lower Keyboard screen, or Upper Keyboard screen with touching , , and .

MEMO

When the power is turned on, the Octave Shift setting for each part of the Pedal will be set to -1 (1 octave down). If you turn on the [Octave Up] button, the Octave Shift will be automatically set to "0" regardless of the previous setting. When you turn off the [Octave Up] button, the Octave Shift will always return to "-1" regardless of the previous setting.

NOTE

Please note that when you apply the Octave Shift function to certain voices, their pitch could be stretched beyond their recommended note ranges, and they may not sound as expected. Care should be taken when using Octave Shift.

Playing Drum Sounds or Sound Effects from the Entire Lower Keyboard (Drums/SFX)

You can use the Lower keyboard to play various drum sounds (drum set). In this case, the Lower voices will no longer sound.

Drums/ SFX Manual /erc Lower

1. Press the [Drums/SFX] button, getting its indicator to light up.

The [Drums/SFX] button indicator will alternate between on (lit) and off (dark) each time it is pressed.

The Drums/SFX (drums/sound effects) screen will be displayed for several seconds.

Drums/SFX P.1/3 POP HIP HOP R&B VOX DRUM ROCK STANDARD JAZZ BRUSH STANDARD 2 Exit J: 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. Play the Lower keyboard and listen to the various drum sounds on each key.

Refer to "Drum Set List" for details on which drum sound or Sound Effect will be played by each note.

It is not possible to select and play both [Drums/SFX] and [Manual Perc] buttons simultaneously.

For some drum sets, there will be keys that do not sound.

Changing Drums/SFX Sets

As the drum set, you can choose the types of drum set and sound effect. When you change the drum set, the sound produced by each note will change. Immediately after the power is turned on, the POP drum set will sound.

1. Press the [Drums/SFX] button, getting its indicator to light up.

The Drums/SFX screen will be displayed for several seconds.

Drums/SFX P.1/3 POP HIP HOP R&B VOX DRUM ROCK STANDARD JAZZ BRUSH STANDARD 2 Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. While the Drums/SFX screen is displayed, touch a Drum/SFX set name in the screen.

The [Drums/SFX] button indicator will begin to blink.

You can select from 18 different Drum Sets and one set of Sound Effects as follows:

Drums/SFX Set

POP, R&B, ROCK, JAZZ BRUSH, HIP HOP, VOX DRUM, STANDARD, STANDARD2, ROOM, ROOM2, POWER, ELECTRONIC, TR-808, DANCE, JAZZ, BRUSH, BRUSH2, ORCHESTRA, SOUND EFFECTS

3. Press the [Drums/SFX] button once again.

The [Drums/SFX] button indicator will change from blinking to lit, and your choice of drum set will be finalized.

For the types of drum set and the sound effects played by each key, refer to "Drum/SFX Set List."

NOTE

After the Drums/SFX (drums/sound effects) screen is displayed, it will close automatically after several seconds unless you touch the screen to select a drums/sound effects set. If you wish to switch drums/sound effect sets, quickly select the desired drums/sound effect set while the Drums/SFX (drums/sound effects) screen is displayed.

You can also confirm the Drums/SFX set by touching in the Drums/SFX screen.
You can also play the lower manual to confirm the drum set.

Playing a Lower Voice with Percussion Instrument Sounds and a Voice Phrase (Manual Percussion)

You can play various drum sounds and Sound Effects using the bottom 15 keys of the Lower keyboard. This is convenient when you wish to play the Lower voice together with drum sounds or Sound Effects.

Drums/ SF2 Manual Perc Lower

the keys for Drum sounds or Sound Effects

Lower Keyboard15 keys

1. Press the [Manual Perc] button (indicator lights).

The button will alternate between ON (lit) and OFF (dark) each time it is pressed.

The Manual Percussion screen will be displayed for several seconds.

Manual Percussion P.1/2 PERC SET 1 ORCHESTRA SET2 PERC SET 2 LATIN SET PERC SET 3 ASIAN SET ORCHESTRA SET VOICE PHRASE Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. When you play the bottom 15 keys of the Lower keyboard the chosen drum sound is played on each key.

NOTE

It is not possible to select and play both [Drums/SFX] and [Manual Perc] buttons simultaneously (p. 78).

Changing the Manual Percussion Sets

You can choose the type of Manual Percussion Set.

When you change the Manual Percussion Set, the sound played by each of the 15 lowest notes of the Lower keyboard will change.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the PERC SET1 drum set will sound.

1. Press the [Manual Perc] button (indicator lights).

The Manual Percussion screen will be displayed for several seconds.

Manual Percussion P.1/2 PERC SET 1 ORCHESTRA SET2 PERC SET 2 LATIN SET PERC SET 3 ASIAN SET ORCHESTRA SET VOICE PHRASE Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. While the Manual Percussion screen is displayed, touch a manual percussion set name in the screen.

The [Manual Perc] button indicator will begin to flash.

You can select from 14 different Manual Percussion Sets;

Manual Percussion Set

PERC SET 1, PERC SET 2, PERC SET 3, ORCHESTRA SET, ORCHESTRA SET2, LATIN SET, ASIAN SET, VOICE PHRASE, VOICE PHRASE 2, VOICE PHRASE 3, SFX SET, SFX SET 2, JAPANESE SET, JAPANESE SET 2

3. Press the [Manual Perc] button once again.

The [Manual Perc] button indicator will change from blinking to lit, and your choice of drum set will be finalized.

Refer to "Manual Percussion List" (Appendix: separate booklet) for details on which percussion sound will be played by each note.

NOTE

The Manual Percussion screen will automatically close after several seconds if you do not touch the screen to select a manual percussion set. If you wish to change the manual percussion set, you must select a manual percussion set quickly while the manual percussion screen is displayed.

You can also confirm the Manual Percussion set by touching in the Manual Percussion screen. You can also play the lower manual to confirm the manual percussion set.

Sustaining Notes in the Lower Part (Lower Voice Hold)

You can have Lower voice continue to sound after you release you fingers from the keys, until the next key is played.

Lower Voice

1. Press the Lower Voice [Hold] button (confirm that the indicator is lit).

The Lower voice will continue sounding.

While the Lower Voice [Hold] button is lit, pressing a key will cause the note to continue sounding.

1. When you press the Lower Voice [Hold] button to make the indicator go dark, the notes which had continued to sound will stop.

Using Rhythm Performance

The ATELIER lets you enjoy playing along with a Rhythmic accompaniment.

Selecting a Rhythm

The ATELIER provides various Rhythms and Automatic Accompaniments (Music Styles).

The ten buttons below are called "Rhythm buttons," and let you select Rhythms that are categorized by musical style.

BigBand/ Swing Country/ Gospel Oldies/ Contempo Ballad World Latin Waltz/ March Trad/ Showtime Acoustic User

Rhythm

1. Press a Rhythm button to select a Rhythm group.

The indicator will light.

A Rhythm screen like the following appears.

Rhythm P.1/5 Biggest Band Breezy Swing BigAppleBand MidniteSISwg BennysBigBnd Orch.Swing JimmysGroove Cool Swing Exit Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

The Rhythms in the selected Rhythm group appear in the display.

2. Touch < >> to switch screens, and touch a Rhythm name to select the desired Rhythm.

The indicator of Rhythm button will blink.

3. Press the Rhythm button once again (indicator lights constantly).

The Rhythm button's indicator will change from blinking to light.

For details, refer to the Voice List (Appendix: separate booklet).

You can also open the Rhythm screen by touching in the Main screen.

You can also confirm the Rhythm by touching in the Rhythm screen.

Using Rhythms Stored in User Memory

The ATELIER features a User memory.

What is the User Memory?

This is the internal memory area that lets you store user Rhythms you've created. You can also copy Rhythms saved on USB memory to the User memory (p. 99).

The ATELIER is shipped from the factory with Rhythms already stored in User memory. These Rhythms can be rewritten at will; either by copying Rhythms from USB memory to User memory, or by saving user Rhythms you've created using the Rhythm Customize function (p. 200). The content of User memory is retained even while the ATELIER's power is turned off.

You can call up Rhythms in User memory by pressing the [User] button.

Calling Up Rhythms Stored in User Memory

1. Press the [User] button.

The Rhythm screen appears.

Rhythm User P.1/1 LooseBigBand 6/8 Ballad Trad Tango MarchingBand Exit J: 118 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. Touch < >> on the Rhythm screen to select "User."

The Rhythms stored in User memory will be shown.

3. Touch <> to switch screens, and touch a Rhythm name to select the desired Rhythm.

The indicator of [User] button will blink.

4. After selecting a Rhythm, press the flashing [User] button once more.

The [User] button stops flashing and remains lit, indicating that the Rhythm has been selected.

MEMO

If you wish to copy a Rhythm saved on USB memory to User memory, refer to "Copying Rhythms" (p. 99).

MEMO

If you want to restore the original Rhythms that User memory contained at the time the instrument was shipped from the factory, refer to "Restoring the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings" (p. 233).

MEMO

If USB memory is connected, you can touch <→<> + to select "Ext Memory" so that Rhythms in the USB memory will be shown.

MEMO

You can also confirm the Rhythm by touching in the Rhythm screen.

Rhythm Search

You can search for Rhythm that match the tempo of the song, musical genre, or other criteria you set.

You can also search Rhythm using the first character of the Rhythm names.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

4 4 Transpose C C 130 M: 1 Biggest Band Quick Registration Music Assistant Rhythm System Quick Guide Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

The following Rhythm screen appears.

Rhythm P.1/5 Biggest Band Breezy Swing BigAppleBand MidniteSISwg BennysBigBnd Orch.Swing JimmysGroove Cool Swing Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. Touch < > on the Main screen.

A sub-window appears.

Rhythm P.1/5 Biggest Band Breezy Swing BigAppleBand By Name By Conditions BennysBigBn JimmysGroov Exit Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

If another screen is open, touch

to access the main screen.

You can also open the Rhythm screen by pressing Rhythm buttons.

You can also search only for Rhythms other than the internal Rhythms accessed with the

[User] button. The icon does not appear in the display while the [User] button Rhythms are displayed.

Searching by Rhythm Name

3. Touch .

4. Decide which character you will use for the search.

The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.

Enter the character you are searching for. For example, touching in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group ("A" > "B" > "C"...).

Touch to toggle between alphabets and numerals.

5. Touch (Start Search).

The search results appear in the display.

To cancel the search, touch in the Search Results screen.

6. Touch a Rhythm name to select a Rhythm.

Touch to return to the Rhythm screen.

Searching by Conditions

3. Touch .

You can use four different criteria in searches: "Tempo," "Beat," "Groove," and "Genre."

4. Touch the value for the search term.

5. Touch <▶◀> to adjust the settings.

6. Touch (Start Search).

The search results appear in the display.

To cancel the search, touch in the Search Results screen.

7. Touch a Rhythm name to select a Rhythm.

Touch to return to the Rhythm screen.

Playing Rhythm

There are two ways to start the Rhythm. You can press the [Start/Stop] button to start the Rhythm, or you can use Sync Start to have the Rhythm start when you play the lower keyboard or the pedal keyboard.

You can also make the Rhythm start with an intro, or stop with an ending.

Count Down Sync Start Intro Ending Start/ Stop

Starting at the Press of a Button

Starting with an Added Intro

1. Press the [Intro] button.
2. Press the [Start/Stop] button.

The Intro is played and the Rhythm starts.

While the Intro is playing, the [Intro] button indicator will light, until the Intro ends then the button indicator will go dark.

Starting Without an Intro

1. Press the [Start/Stop] button.

The Rhythm starts without an Intro being played.

Making the Intro Short and Simple

1. Press the Variation [1] button to make the indicator light up.
2. Press the [Intro] button.
3. Press the [Start/Stop] button.

A short Intro is played and the Rhythm starts.

The functions of the [Intro] button, [Ending] button and [Start/Stop] button can be assigned to the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal (p. 136).

You can change the operation of the Fill In [Auto] button, Fill In [Break] button, [Intro] button, and [Ending] button (p. 217).

For more on the Variation buttons, refer to "Adding Variety to the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment" (p. 91).

Starting the Rhythm Automatically When You Play the Lower Keyboard or Pedalboard (Sync Start)

Starting with an Added Intro

1. Press the [Sync Start] button to make the indicator light up.

2. Press the [Intro] button.

The [Intro] button's indicator will light.

1. Play either the Lower keyboard or the Pedalboard.

The Intro is played and the Rhythm starts.

While the Intro is playing, the [Intro] button indicator will light, until the Intro ends then the button indicator will go dark.

Starting Without an Intro

1. Press the [Sync Start] button to make the indicator light up.

2. Play either the Lower keyboard or the pedalboard.

The Rhythm starts without an Intro being played.

Making the Intro Short and Simple

1. Press the [Sync Start] button to make the indicator light up.

2. Press the Variation [1] button.

3. Press the [Intro] button.

[Intro] button indicator will light.

1. Play either the Lower keyboard or the Pedalboard.

A short Intro is played and the Rhythm starts.

NOTE

If the Arranger function is ON (the Arranger [On/Off] button indicator is lit), it is not be able to start the Rhythm by playing the Pedalboard (p. 90).

MEMO

For more on the Variation button, refer to "Adding Variety to the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment" (p. 91).

Stopping the Rhythm

Stopping with an Ending

1. Press the [Ending] button.

An Ending is played, then the Rhythm stops.

While the Ending is playing, the [Ending] button indicator will light, until the Ending finishes the button indicator will be turned off.

Stopping without an Ending

1. Press the [Start/Stop] button.

The Rhythm stops without an Ending being played.

Making the Ending Short and Simple

1. Press the Variation [1] button.

2. Press the [Ending] button.

A short Ending is played, then the Rhythm stops.

The functions of the [Intro] button, [Ending] button and [Start/Stop] button can be assigned to the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal (p. 136).

Changing a Rhythm's Tempo

You can change the tempo of the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment (p. 90).

Tempo

1. Press the Tempo [ ] and [ ] buttons to change the tempo (speed) of the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment.

Tempo [ ] button	The tempo becomes slower
Tempo [ ] button	The tempo becomes faster

By pressing the Tempo [ ] and [ ] buttons simultaneously, the tempo is returned to the standard (preset) tempo for the selected Rhythm.

The value of the tempo currently set (20–500 beats per minute) can be checked in the screen.

If "Auto Std Tempo" (p. 217) is on, and you switch the Rhythm while the Rhythm is stopped, the tempo will automatically be set appropriately for that Rhythm.

If you switch Rhythms when "Auto Std Tempo" is off, the tempo remains unchanged even when you switch the Rhythm.

You can confirm the tempo and beat with the "bouncing ball" in the Main screen (p. 31).

You can also use the [Value] dial to change the tempo.

Playing the Count Sound at the End of the Intro

If an intro is played before your performance, you can have a countdown played to the end of the intro, allowing you to understand easily where you are to start playing.

Count Down Sync Start Intro Ending Start/ Stop

1. Press the [Count Down] button, getting the indicator to light.
2. Press the [Intro] button.
3. Press the [Start/Stop] button.

The intro plays, and a countdown plays to the end of the intro.

When the [Sync Start] button is lit, specifying the chord on the Lower keyboard starts the intro and a countdown is given.

1. To stop the countdown, press the [Count Down] button, turning off the indicator light.

You can change the countdown sound (p. 216).

Playing Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment

The Arranger function of the ATELIER can add an Automatic Accompaniment to each Rhythm. Based on the selected Rhythm, the Arranger function automatically adds an accompaniment that is suitable for the chord being pressed on the Lower keyboard.

Arranger On/Off

When the Arranger [On/Off] button is on, Sync Start (p. 88) on the pedalboard cannot be used.

1. Press the Arranger [On/Off] button (indicator lights.)

Arranger [On/Off] button Function
Lit	Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment
Unlit	Rhythm

1. Start the Rhythm (p. 87).

The Rhythm and the Automatic Accompaniment will play together. If the Arranger [On/Off] button is ON and no Pedal Bass voice is selected, the Automatic Accompaniment will play the bass sound.

The lower voice is not played during the performance of the intro and ending, even when the Lower keyboard is played.

Adding Variety to the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment

You can add variety to the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment by changing the Rhythm pattern of the Rhythm or the arrangement of the Automatic Accompaniment, or by inserting a break (i.e., stopping the Rhythm for one measure).

Auto Break Fill In Count Down Intro Ending

Button name	Function
Fill In [Auto] button	A fill-in will automatically be added when you press a Variation button to change the accompaniment or Rhythm arrangement.
Fill In [Break] button	Stop the Rhythm at the end of that measure (Break).

What's a fill-in?

A Fill In is a short phrase that is inserted at a break in the melody or at a point where the character of the song changes (between Chorus's or Verses).

Changing the Arrangement of the Rhythm and Accompaniment (Variation)

You can change the arrangement of the accompaniment. This function is called "Variation." For each Rhythm, there are four types of arrangement for the accompaniment. The following buttons are called Variation buttons.

1 2 3 4

Variation

1. Press the Variation buttons to change the arrangement of the accompaniment.

The indicator of the button you pressed will light. The Variation [1] button produces the simplest arrangement, and the Variation [4] button produces the most florid. For an intro or ending, Variation [1] button is the shortest and simplest.

The functions of the Variation buttons and Fill In [Break] button can be assigned to the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal. Please refer to "Changing the Function of the Foot Switch" (p. 136).

You can change the behavior of the Fill In [Auto] button and Fill In [Break] button (p. 217).

Playing Chords with Simple Fingering (Chord Intelligence)

"Chord Intelligence" is a feature that intelligently plays the correct accompaniment chords the moment you play a key specifying a chord on the Lower keyboard during Automatic Accompaniment.

For example, in order to make the instrument detect a "C Major" chord, you must normally play the three keys "C," "E," and "G." If you use the Chord Intelligence function, you can simply press a single "C" key in the lower keyboard to sound a C Major chord with the voice selected for the Lower part.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rhythm screen appears.

Rhythm P.1/5 Biggest Band Breezy Swing BigAppleBand MidniteSISwg BennysBigBnd Orch.Swing JimmysGroove Cool Swing Exit

2. Touch < Utility) on the Rhythm screen.

The Utility screen appears.

Rhyth Biggest File Edit Options Customize BigApp Exit 130 M: 1 Svcs/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

For more information about chord fingering, refer to the "Chord List" (p. 282).

You can also open the Rhythm screen by pressing a Rhythm button.

3. Touch .

The Rhythm Options screen appears.

Rhythm Options P.1/2 Chord Intelligence OFF Chord Hold ON Leading Bass OFF Count Down Sound VOICE Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

4. Touch the Chord Intelligence setting to turn it "ON."

The Chord Intelligence function can now be used.

Each time you touch the Chord Intelligence setting, it will be switched ON/OFF.

If you press the root note of the chord (p. 284) in the lower keyboard when the Chord Intelligence function is ON, all notes in that chord will sound.

For example, if you press the root "C" of the C major chord in the lower keyboard, the notes of the C major chord "C," "E," and "G" will be sounded by the voice selected for the lower part.

5. If you wish to turn off the Chord Intelligence function, switch it "OFF."

When the Leading Bass function (p. 94) is on and the Chord Intelligence function is off, you can specify chords with a combination of the lower keyboard and pedalboard.

When you touch the [One Touch Program] button, the Chord Intelligence setting will automatically be turned ON.

Leading Bass Function

When Automatic Accompaniment is used, and the Pedal [To Lower] button is ON, the Pedal Bass voice will normally play the root note (p. 284) of the chord you play on the Lower keyboard.

If the Leading Bass function is enabled, the lowest note of the chord you play on the Lower keyboard will then be used as the bass note (the bottom note of the chord). This allows the bass to be a note other than the root of the chord you play and the bass note will change when inverted chords are played (p. 284).

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rhythm screen appears.

Rhythm P.1/5 Biggest Band Breezy Swing BigAppleBand MidniteSISwg BennysBigBnd Orch.Swing JimmysGroove Cool Swing Exit Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. Touch < Utility) on the Rhythm screen.

The Utility screen appears.

Rhyth P.1/5 Biggest File Edit Options Customize BigApp Exit Mezy Swing WhiteSISwg Bennys Swing Jimmys Main 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Exit

You can also open the Rhythm screen by pressing the Rhythm buttons.

When the Leading Bass function is on and the Chord Intelligence function (p. 92) is off, you can specify chords with a combination of the lower keyboard and pedalboard.

3. Touch .

The Rhythm Options screen appears.

Rhythm Options P1/2 Chord Intelligence OFF Chord Hold ON Leading Bass OFF Count Down Sound VOICE Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

4. Touch the Leading Bass setting to turn it "ON."

Each time you touch the Leading Bass setting, it will be switched ON/OFF.

5. To turn off the Leading Bass function, set the Leading Bass setting to "OFF."

MEMO

You can assign the Leading Bass functions to either of the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal. Please refer to "Changing the Function of the Foot Switch" (p. 136).

A Simple Way to Make Automatic Accompaniment Settings (One Touch Program)

The ATELIER provides a very convenient [One Touch Program] button. By simply pressing this button once, the Arranger function will be turned ON, and keyboard voices that are most appropriate for playing with the currently selected Rhythm/Automatic Accompaniment are selected.

By pressing the [One Touch Program] button, you can make the following settings.

• Panel settings (e.g., sounds and volume) suitable for the Rhythm
• Arranger [On/Off] button lit (Automatic Accompaniment playing)
• [Sync Start] button lit, [Intro] button blinking (Waiting for Sync Start) (p. 88)
  • Chord Intelligence function is ON (p. 92)

What is Sync Start?

Sync Start is a function that starts the Rhythm at the moment that you play the lower keyboard or pedalboard.

What is Chord Intelligence?

"Chord Intelligence" is a feature that intelligently decides on accompaniment chords the moment you play some keys specifying a chord during Automatic Accompaniment.

The panel settings specified by the One Touch Program function are as follows.

8 panel settings for each Rhythm (4 panel settings x 2 groups)

1 2 3 4 2 Group (Organ) 1 2 3 4 1 Group (Basic)

Rhythm

NOTE

If the Arranger function is ON (the Arranger [On/Off] button indicator is lit), it is not be able to start the Rhythm by playing the pedalboard (p. 90).

1. Select a Rhythm (p. 83).

2. Press the [One Touch Program] button.

The [One Touch Program] button's indicator will light.

One Touch Program

An One Touch Program Group (One Touch Program Group select) screen like the one shown below will be displayed for several seconds.

One Touch Program Group Band Orchestra Exit Hold Rhythm System Quick Guide 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. While the One Touch Program Group screen is displayed, touch the screen to select a One Touch Program group.

Panel settings appropriate for the Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will automatically be called up for Registration [1]–[4] buttons.

1. Press the Registration [1]–[4] button to select panel settings.

2. On the Lower keyboard, play a chord.

At the moment you play the lower keyboard, the Intro will begin, and then the Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will play.

1. Press the [Ending] or [Start/Stop] button to stop the Rhythm.

Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment stops.

1. Press the [One Touch Program] button, extinguishing its indicator.

You will return to the panel settings that were in effect prior to pressing the [One Touch Program] button.

When you press the [One Touch Program] button, the "Arranger Update" setting will automatically change to "INSTANT" (p. 111).

To redisplay the One Touch Program Group screen, while holding down the Registration [Write] button, press the [One Touch Program] button. Touch the One Touch Program Group screen to reselect the group.

The One Touch Program function will be turned off if you're using the Quick Registration function (p. 37) or if you've loaded a Registration (p. 110).

Using a Rhythm from a USB Memory

The ATELIER contains a variety of Rhythms, but you can also use Rhythms from USB memory or floppy disk to perform Rhythms in an even wider range of styles.

Reviewing the Rhythms on USB Memory

1. Press the Rhythm [User] button (confirm that its indicator is lit).

The Rhythm screen appears.

Rhythm User P.1/1 LooseBigBand 6/8 Ballad Trad Tango MarchingBand Exit J = 118 M : 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. Connect the USB memory containing the Rhythms to the External Memory connector.

3. Touch <▶◀> to select "Ext Memory" and see the Rhythms in USB memory.

The Rhythm screen will show the Rhythms on the USB memory.

Rhythm Exit Memory P1/1 LooseBigBand 6/8 Ballad Trad Tango MarchingBand Exit 118 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

4. Touch the Rhythm screen to select a Rhythm.

The [Start/Stop] button indicator will blink while the Rhythms are being loaded into internal memory. When loading is finished, you will be able to play the selected Rhythm.

5. Press the [Start/Stop] button.

The selected Rhythm is played.

NOTE

Unauthorized use of commercially available Music Style disk for purposes other than private, personal enjoyment is a violation of applicable laws.

MEMO

If you copy Rhythms from USB memory or floppy disk into User memory (p. 84), you'll be able to access those Rhythms simply by pressing the [User] button (p. 99).

MEMO

If you want to use Rhythms from a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector.

MEMO

If "User" is selected, the Rhythms saved in User memory (p. 84) will be shown. If "Disk" is selected, the Rhythms saved on the floppy disk will be shown.

Copying Rhythms

User memory (p. 84) already contains Rhythms, but you can replace these Rhythms with Rhythms from USB memory or floppy disk. Rhythms copied from the USB memory into User memory will not be lost even if the power is turned off. It is convenient to copy frequently-used Rhythms into User memory.

Rhythms that you've created and saved in User memory can also be copied to USB memory (p. 101).

Copying Rhythms from USB Memory to User Memory

1. Connect the USB memory to the External Memory connector.
2. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rhythm screen appears.

Rhythm P.1/5 Biggest Band Breezy Swing BigAppleBand MidniteSISwg BennysBigBnd Orch.Swing JimmysGroove Cool Swing Exit

1. Touch < Utility) on the Rhythm screen.

The Utility screen appears.

Rhyth P.1/5 Biggest File Edit Options Customize BigApp ezy Swing WhiteSISwg Bennys h.Swing Jimmyst Exit Main 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Exit

If you want to copy Rhythms from floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector.

4. Touch .

The Rhythm File Edit screen appears.

Rhythm File Edit 01:LooseBigBand 02:6/8 Ballad 03:Trad Tango 04:MarchingBand 05:---- Exit Rename Up Down Delete Copy 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

5. Touch (Rhythm Copy).

The Rhythm File Copy screen appears.

Rhythm File Copy 01:LooseBigBand Media Ext Memory User: 01:---- Exit Execute J 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

6. Touch <▶◀> to select the media (the location of the Rhythm you want to copy).

If you want to copy a Rhythm from USB memory, select "Ext Memory." If you want to copy a Rhythm from floppy disk, select "Disk."

7. Touch <> to select the Rhythm you want to copy.

8. Touch User <> to select the copy-destination number.

Rhythm File Copy 01:LooseBigBand Media Ext Memory User: 05:---- Exit Execute 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

Numbers for which a Rhythm name is shown already have a Rhythm saved to them.

If you choose , all the Rhythms stored in the currently selected folder of USB memory or the floppy disk will be copied in a single operation.

9. Touch .

The copying of the Rhythm to User memory begins.

When copying ends, the “----” in the screen will change to the Rhythm name that you copied.

If you select a number in which a Rhythm is already saved, a screen like the following will appear.

Overwrite Rhythm OK? Cancel OK

If you want to delete the previously saved Rhythm and overwrite it with the Rhythm you're newly saving, touch .

If you don't want to delete the previously saved Rhythm, touch , then select a number at which no Rhythm has been saved, and copy the Rhythm to that number.

Copying Rhythms from User Memory to USB Memory

You can copy Rhythms from User memory to USB memory.

In this case, touch the arrow icon located in the center of the "Rhythm File Copy screen" in step 5 of the above procedure, so the arrow points upwards. In this state, you'll be copying Rhythms from User memory to USB memory.

Rhythm File Copy 05:---- User: 03:Trad Tango Exit Media Ext Memory - + Execute 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

The rest of the procedure is the same as when copying Rhythms from USB memory to User memory.

NOTE

Never remove the USB memory or turn off the power while the Rhythm data is being copied from USB memory into the ATELIER. If you do so, the Rhythm data will not be loaded into the ATELIER, and malfunctions could result. After returning the Rhythm stored in the User memory to the factory settings (p. 233), copy the Rhythm from USB memory once more.

MEMO

You can return only the User memory to the factory settings. Refer to "Restoring the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings" (p. 233).

Changing the Order of the Saved Rhythms

You can rearrange the order of the Rhythms stored in User memory (p. 84) or USB memory.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rhythm screen appears.

Rhythm P.1/5 Biggest Band Breezy Swing BigAppleBand MidniteSISwg BennysBigBnd Orch.Swing JimmysGroove Cool Swing Exit

2. Touch < Utility) on the Rhythm screen.

The Utility screen appears.

File Edit Options Customize Exit P.1/5 Bigges BigApp Bennys Jimmys Exit Swezy Swing WhiteSISwg Swing Swing Switch Switch Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. Touch .

The Rhythm File Edit screen appears.

Rhythm File Edit 01:LooseBigBand 02:6/8 Ballad 03:Trad Tango 04:MarchingBand 05:---- Exit Rename Up Down Delete Copy 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

Button	Meaning Description
Rename	Modify the name	The Rename screen appears. You can touch the screen and rename the selected Rhythm (p. 104).
Up	Change the order (upward)	The selected Rhythm will be moved earlier in the order.
Down	Change the order (downward)	The selected Rhythm will be moved later in the order.
Delete	Delete the Rhythm	The selected Rhythm will be deleted (p. 106).
Copy	Copies the Rhythm	You can copy Rhythms from USB memory to User memory, or copy Rhythms from User memory to USB memory (p. 99).

4. Touch <▶◀> to select the desired media.

Choose "User" if you want to change the order of the Rhythms saved in User memory, or choose "Ext Memory" if you want to change the order of the Rhythms saved in USB memory. Choose "Disk" if you want to change the order of the Rhythms saved in floppy disk.

5. Touch <> < > to select the Rhythm.

6. Touch or to move the Rhythm.

7. Touch .

Renaming a Saved Rhythm

You can rename Rhythms stored in User memory (p. 84) or USB memory.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rhythm screen appears.

1. Touch < Utility) on the Rhythm screen.

The Utility screen appears.

File Edit Options Customize Exit P.1/5 Bigges BigApp Bennys Jimmys Exit Mezy Swing WhiteSISwg Swing Swing Switch Main Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration

1. Touch .

The Rhythm File Edit screen appears.

Rhythm File Edit 01:LooseBigBand 02:6/8 Ballad 03:Trad Tango 04:MarchingBand 05:---- Exit Ext Memory Rename Up Down Delete Copy J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch < >> < > to select the desired media.

Choose "User" if you want to change the name of the Rhythms saved in User memory, or choose "Ext Memory" if you want to change the name of the Rhythms saved in USB memory. Choose "Disk" if you want to change the name of the Rhythms saved in floppy disk.

1. Touch <> < > to select the Rhythm whose name you want to change.

6. Touch .

The Rename screen appears.

LooseBigBand ABC/abc/!#% A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Del Space Cancel OK 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

7. Touch <> to change among uppercase/ lowercase/symbols.

Each touch of the character switch button takes you to the next available choice, like this: uppercase > lowercase > symbols > uppercase ....

8. Touch the screen to specify the desired character.

The following characters can be selected.

Uppercase	A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Lowercase	a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z
Symbols	! " # % & ' () * + , . . / : = ? ^ _ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
	Delete a character.
	Insert a space.
	Move the cursor (the symbol that indicates the location at which characters will be input) to left or right.

To cancel the operation, touch .

9. When you're done making the settings, touch .

The Rhythm has now been named. The Edit User screen reappears.

10. Touch .

Deleting Saved Rhythm

You can delete Rhythms stored in User memory (p. 84) or USB memory.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rhythm screen appears.

2. Touch < Utility) on the Rhythm screen.

The Utility screen appears.

Rhyth Bigges File Edit Options Customize BigApp Exit 130 M: 1 ezy Swing whiteSISwg h.Swing Jimmys Main Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Exit

3. Touch .

The Rhythm File Edit screen appears.

Rhythm File Edit 01:LooseBigBand 02:6/8 Ballad 03:Trad Tango 04:MarchingBand 05:---- Exit Ext Memory Rename Up Down Delete Copy J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

Button	Meaning Description
Rename	Modify the name	The Rename screen appears. You can touch the screen and rename the selected Rhythm (p. 104).
Up	Change the order (upward)	The selected Rhythm will be moved earlier in the order (p. 102).
Down	Change the order (downward)	The selected Rhythm will be moved later in the order (p. 102).
Delete	Delete the Rhythm	The selected Rhythm will be deleted.
Copy	Copies the Rhythm	You can copy Rhythms from USB memory to User memory, or copy Rhythms from User memory to USB memory (p. 99).

4. Touch <▶◀> to select the desired media.

Choose "User" if you want to delete the Rhythm saved in User memory, or choose "Ext Memory" if you want to delete the Rhythm saved in USB memory. Choose "Disk" if you want to delete the Rhythm saved in floppy disk.

5. Touch <><> to select the Rhythm that you wish to delete.

6. Touch .

The following display appears.

Delete Rhythm OK? Cancel OK

To cancel operation, touch .

7. If you are sure that you wish to delete the Rhythm, touch .

When a Rhythm is deleted, the deleted Rhythm name will change to "----."

Rhythm File Edit 01:---- 02:6/8 Ballad 03:Trad Tango 04:MarchingBand 05:---- Exit Rename Up Down Delete Copy J 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

Using the Registration Buttons

The ATELIER allows you to store sound settings and panel settings in the Registration buttons.

The ATELIER has a total of twelve Registration buttons, and one set of panel settings can be registered to each button, for a total of twelve types of panel settings. Each set of panel settings that has been stored in a Registration button is called a "Registration."

This provides a convenient way to change large numbers of panel settings during a performance, or to recall a complex panel setting.

MEMO

Settings that have been stored to Registration buttons [1]–[12] are remembered even if the power is turned off. If you wish to restore the settings stored in the Registration buttons to their factory settings, use the "Factory Reset" operation (p. 27).

graph LR
    A["Write"] --> B["Local Load"]
    B --> C["Local Load"]
    C --> D["1"]
    D --> E["2"]
    E --> F["3"]
    F --> G["4"]
    G --> H["5"]
    H --> I["6"]
    I --> J["7"]
    J --> K["8"]
    K --> L["9"]
    L --> M["10"]
    M --> N["11"]
    N --> O["12"]
    O --> P["Local Load"]

About the Registration Buttons

In addition to assigning voices and Rhythms to the Registration buttons, you can also store the following settings:

• Panel button settings (for example, settings for the Level [▲] [▼] buttons and Solo [To Lower] button, etc.)
• Controller settings (functions assigned to foot switches, pitch bend range, etc.)
• Other types of settings (reverb type, tempo settings, degree of initial touch, etc.)

If you would like to know all of the settings that can be recorded to the Registration buttons, refer to "Settings That Are Stored In the Individual Registration Buttons" (p. 286).

The twelve settings stored at the Registration buttons can be saved as a "set" in USB memory, a floppy disk, or User memory (p. 115).

In addition to the settings saved to the Registration buttons, the following data is also saved when Registration sets are saved.

• Registration Name →p. 113
• Registration Shift →p. 137
• Arranger Update →p. 111
  • Trans. Update (Transpose Update) → p. 219
  • Exp. Curve (Expression Curve) → p. 139
  • Rhythm Mode setting → p. 217

With the factory settings, the Arranger Update setting is set to "DELAYED." If Arranger Update is set to "DELAYED," you will need to hold down the Registration button for several seconds in order to recall the tempo and Rhythm settings.

If you want the tempo and Rhythm settings to be recalled instantly when you press a Registration button, change the Arranger Update setting to "INSTANT." For details, refer to "Recalling a Registration" (p. 110)

MEMO

Recorded performance data and Rhythms from User memory (p. 84) are not stored in Registration sets.

When a Rhythm saved in User memory is assigned to a Registration set, that Rhythm is copied beforehand to the User memory.

Procedure for Creating Registration Sets

Prepare the Registrations

A convenient way to make the sequence of Registration buttons to be pressed easy to understand is to store the panel settings starting from the Registration [1] button, continuing with subsequent buttons in accordance with the progression of the song.

Save the Registrations to the USB memory or User memory

If you want to use more than twelve Registrations in a song, save the settings for Registration buttons [1]–[12] to a USB memory or User memory as a set, then continue to store further panel settings again, starting from Registration button [1]. Save all of the Registration sets you have set to the USB memory or User memory.

Arrange the Registrations in the sequence they are to be used

Save the Registration sets to the USB memory or User memory in the order they are to be used in the song. You can use the File Edit function (p. 126) to alter the sequence and names of Registrations contained on the USB memory or User memory (p. 113) as well as delete such Registrations (p. 124).

Using Registration Sets

Call up the Registration sets saved on the USB memory to the ATELIER

Insert the USB memory containing the saved Registration sets into the External Memory connector, and read the Registration sets into the ATELIER.

Switch the Registration sets as you perform

Press the Registration buttons to switch Registrations as you play the song. To call up the next Registration Set, press the [Load Next] button, then press the Registration buttons.

You can also assign the "Right + Load Next" to the foot switch and use it to call up subsequent Registration sets (p. 137).

Storing Registrations

graph LR
    A["Write"] --> B["Load Next"]
    B --> C["Manual"]
    C --> D["1"]
    C --> E["2"]
    C --> F["3"]
    C --> G["4"]
    C --> H["5"]
    C --> I["6"]

1. Make all the panel settings that you wish to store.

2. While holding down the [Write] button, press one of the Registration buttons [1]–[12].

The panel settings will be stored in the selected Registration button.

For details on the settings that are stored in a Registration, refer to "Settings That Are Stored In the Registration Buttons" (p. 286).

Recalling a Registration

Settings that have been registered to Registration buttons [1]–[12] can be recalled in two ways: "INSTANT" and "DELAYED."

At the factory this is set to "DELAYED."

How to Recall a Registration (DELAYED)

Recalling Voices and Other Panel Settings

1. Press and immediately release one of the Registration buttons [1]–[12].

Recalling Settings for Rhythm Performance and Automatic Accompaniment in Addition to the Panel Settings

1. Press and hold a Registration button [1]–[12] for several seconds.

The indicator of the Rhythm select button will blink, and the panel settings and settings related to Rhythm performance and Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled.

How to Recall a Registration (INSTANT)

Recalling Panel Settings of a Voice, or When Recalling Settings for Rhythm Performance and Automatic Accompaniment in Addition to Panel Settings

1. Press and immediately release one of the Registration buttons [1]–[12].

When changing the way Registrations are called up, refer to "Changing the Timing of Recalling Registrations" (p. 111).

Changing the Timing of Recalling Registrations

Settings for Rhythm play and Automatic Accompaniment are recalled when you continue holding a Registration button [1]–[12] for several seconds, but you can change this so that the settings are recalled the instant you press the button.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Registration Load screen appears.

Registration Load Internal Factory Reg. Next 01:REGIST-01 02:REGIST-02 03:REGIST-03 04:REGIST-04 Media User Load go to Save Exit File 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. Touch < Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

Registration Load Internal REGIST-01 Next 02:REGIST-02 03:REGIST-03 04:REGIST-04 05:REGIST-05 Load One Rename Format Options Exit J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. Touch .

The Registration Options screen appears.

Registration Options P.1/1 Arranger Update INSTANT Trans. Update INSTANT Exit

You can also open the Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] button on the panel.

You can also use the following method to open the Registration Options screen.

1. Touch on the Main screen, to display the Quick Guide screen.

2. Press the Registration [Write] button.

The Registration Options screen appears.

4. Touch the Arranger Update setting to switch between "DELAYED" and "INSTANT."

Each time you touch the Arranger Update setting, it will alternate between "DELAYED" and "INSTANT."

Setting Description
DELAYED	When you press and hold a Registration button [1]–[12] for several seconds, the settings for Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled in addition to the panel settings. If you press and immediately release a Registration button [1]–[12], only the settings that are not related to Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled.
INSTANT	The panel settings and settings for Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled the instant that you press a Registration button [1]–[12].

5. Touch .

You can change the timing of recalling the transpose setting when you press a Registration button.

For details refer to "Changing the Timing at Which

Transposition Settings are Recalled" (p. 219).

Automatically Registering When You Switch Panel Settings

When the [Manual] button is ON (lit), all panel settings you make will be stored automatically in the [Manual] button as they are made, thus updating the Registration that had been previously saved.

graph LR
    A["Write"] --> B["Load"]
    B --> C["Quick"]
    C --> D["1"]
    D --> E["2"]
    E --> F["3"]
    F --> G["4"]
    G --> H["5"]
    H --> I["6"]

The settings stored in the [Manual] button will return to their default values when the power is turned off.

Assigning a Name to a Registration Set

When saving Registration sets, names like "Factory Reg." will be assigned by default, but you can assign a name that will help you later to identify the contents of the Registration set.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Registration Load screen appears.

Registration Load Internal Factory Reg. Next 01:REGIST-01 02:REGIST-02 03:REGIST-03 04:REGIST-04 Media User Load go to Save File Exit J = 130 M : 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. Touch .

The Registration Save screen appears.

Registration Save Internal Factory Reg. 01:REGIST-01 02:REGIST-02 03:REGIST-03 04:REGIST-04 Exit Media User - + Save go to Load File J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. Touch < Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

Registration Save Internal Factory Reg. Rename Format Options Exit 01:REGIST-01 02:REGIST-02 03:REGIST-03 04:REGIST-04 J : 130 M : 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

You can also open the Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] button on the panel.

4. Touch .

The Rename screen appears.

Factory Reg. ABC/abc/!#% A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Del Space Cancel ← → OK 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

5. Touch < > to change among uppercase/ lowercase/symbols.

Each touch of the character switch button takes you to the next available choice, like this: uppercase → lowercase → symbols → uppercase ....

6. Touch the screen to specify the desired character.

The following characters can be selected.

Uppercase	A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Lowercase	a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z
Symbols	! " # % & ' ( ) * + , . . / : = ? ^ _ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Del	Delete a character.
Space	Insert a space.
	Move the cursor (the symbol that indicates the location at which characters will be input) to left or right.

To cancel the operation, touch .

7. When you're done making the settings, touch .

The Registration set in the ATELIER's internal memory has now been named.

Registration Save Internal MY REGIST 01:REGIST-01 02:REGIST-02 03:REGIST-03 04:REGIST-04 Media User + Save go to Load File Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

The Rename screen can also be opened in the following ways.

Main screen → Registration Load screen → Utility screen

Saving Registration Sets

With the settings of Registration buttons [1]–[12] considered as one set, you can store the Registration set to USB memory or User memory. We recommend that complex panel settings or Registrations you wish to keep be saved on USB memory. Furthermore, when you save Registrations created on the ATELIER to USB memory, you can call up their settings on other ATELIER Series instruments and use the Registrations the same way.

1. Connect your USB memory to the External Memory connector.

If you want to save Registration data to a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector. Into the floppy disk drive, insert a floppy disk that was formatted by the ATELIER.

2. Touch on the Main screen.

The Registration Load screen appears.

Registration Load Internal MY REGIST Next 01:REGIST-01 02:REGIST-02 03:REGIST-03 04:REGIST-04 Media User Load go to Save Exit File J: 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. Touch .

The Registration Save screen appears.

Registration Save Internal MY REGIST 01:REGIST-01 02:REGIST-02 03:REGIST-03 04:REGIST-04 Media User + Save go to Load File Exit J = 130 M : 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

4. Touch < >> to select the desired media.

If you want to save the Registration to User memory, select "User." If you want to save the Registration to USB memory, select "Ext Memory." If you want to save the Registration to floppy disk, select "Disk."

You can also open the Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] button on the panel.

If you wish to assign a name before you save, refer to "Assigning a Name to a Registration Set" (p. 113).

5. Touch <>in the screen to select the save-destination number.

Numbers which have not been used in the saving operation will be displayed as "----."

Registration Save Internal MY REGIST 02:REGIST-02 03:REGIST-03 04:REGIST-04 05: ---- Media User + Save go to Load File Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

To cancel the Save operation, touch to close the Registration Save screen.

6. Touch .

The Save Format screen appears.

Save Format Original R-Series Cancel OK 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

7. Touch or .

Settings	Description
Original	Save formats that can be used with the AT-900, AT-900C, AT-800, AT-500, AT-300, AT-100 and AT-75When saved in this format, the data can also be used by AT-SL Series, AT-45, AT-15 and AT-S Series devices.
R-Series	Save formats that can be used with AT-R Series devices

You can also save Registrations in a folder. Refer to "Saving Registrations in a folder" (p. 117).

8. Touch .

Saving of the Registration data will begin.

When saving ends, the "----" in the screen will change to the Registration name that you saved.

If you've named the Registration, it will be saved with that name.

If the following screen appears

If you select a number at which a Registration has already been saved and touch , the following screen appears.

Overwrite Registration OK? Cancel OK

If you wish to update the contents of the Registration data

1. Touch .

If you wish to save new data instead of updating the Registration

1. Touch .

Rewriting of the Registration will be canceled.

2. In the Registration Save screen, select the number that is displayed as “----” (a number that currently does not contain Registration data).

3. Touch .

When saving is complete, the saved Registration name will be displayed.

Saving Registrations in a folder

1. Carry out steps 1 through 4 of "Saving Registration Sets" (p. 115).
2. Touch < > < > to select a folder.
3. Touch the folder name.

The Registrations in the folder will be displayed.

1. Carry out steps 5 through 8 of "Saving Registration Sets" (p. 116).

To exit the folder

1. Touch < > < > to select "Up."
2. Touch the "Up" indication.

To create a folder, refer to

"Creating a Folder" (p. 47).

Loading Previously Saved Registration Sets Into the ATELIER

Here's how to recall a previously saved Registration set from the User memory or USB memory into the memory of the ATELIER. Registrations can be selected in the following three ways.

Loading a Set of Registrations (Load) → p. 118

You can load a "set" (a collection of settings for Registration buttons [1]–[12]) from USB memory or User memory.

Loading an Individual Registration (Load One) → p. 119

Recall the settings of one of the Registration [1]–[12] buttons.

Recalling the Order that the Registrations are Saved on the USB memory or User memory (Load Next) → p. 122

Press the [Load Next] button to recall Registration sets in the order in which they are saved on the USB memory or User memory.

Loading a Set of Registrations

1. If you want to load a Registration from USB memory, connect your USB memory to the External Memory connector.

If you want to load a Registration from a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the floppy disk containing the Registration into the floppy disk drive.

2. Touch on the Main screen.

The Registration Load screen appears.

Registration Load Internal Factory Reg. Next 01:REGIST-01 02:REGIST-02 03:REGIST-03 04:REGIST-04 Media User Load go to Save File Exit J : 130 M : 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

NOTE

Be aware that when you load Registrations from a USB memory or User memory, the Registrations that were previously in internal memory will be lost. It is a good idea to save important Registrations to USB memory or User memory (p. 115).

MEMO

You can also open the Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] button.

MEMO

When you touch , the instrument jumps to the Registration Save screen.

3. Touch < >> to select the desired media.

If you want to load from the Registration of USB memory, select "Ext Memory." If you want to load from the Registration of floppy disk, select "Disk." If you want to load from the Registration of User memory, select "User."

4. Touch <> to select the Registration that you wish to load into internal memory.

To cancel operation, touch .

5. Touch .

The Registration data will start being load.

When the Registration has been loaded, the Registration Load screen will reappear.

Loading an Individual Registration

1. If you want to load a Registration from USB memory, connect your USB memory to the External Memory connector.

If you want to load a Registration from a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the floppy disk containing the Registration into the floppy disk drive.

2. Touch on the Main screen.

The Registration Load screen appears.

Registration Load Internal Factory Reg. Next 01:REGIST-01 02:REGIST-02 03:REGIST-03 04:REGIST-04 Media User Load go to Save File Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. Touch < >> to select the desired media.

If you want to load from the Registration of USB memory, select "Ext Memory." If you want to load from the Registration of User memory, select "User." If you want to load from the Registration of floppy disk, select "Disk."

MEMO

To select a Registration from a folder, refer to "Selecting a Registration from within a folder" (p. 127).

NOTE

Since the ATELIER is designed with compatibility in mind, Registrations created on other instruments in the ATELIER series can be recalled. However, due to differences in the built-in sounds and functions, there will be cases in which the settings cannot be exactly replicated.

MEMO

You can also open the Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] button.

1. Touch <> to select the Registration that you wish to load into internal memory.

2. Touch < Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

Registration Load Internal REGIST-01 Next 02:REGIST-02 03:REGIST-03 04:REGIST-04 05:REGIST-05 Load One Rename Format Options Exit J +130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch .

The Load One Registration screen appears.

Load One Registration REGIST-02 Internal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Cancel OK *130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch <1>-<12> to select the number of the Registration button that you wish to load into internal memory.

Load One Registration REGIST-02 Internal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Cancel OK 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

8. Touch Internal <1>--<12> to select the number of the storage-destination button.

Load One Registration REGIST-02 Internal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Cancel OK 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

To cancel this operation, touch .

9. When you're done making the settings, touch .

The following display appears.

Executing...

When the Registration has been loaded, the Registration Load screen will reappear.

Recalling the Order that the Registrations are Saved (Load Next)

You can simply press the [Load Next] button to successively recall

Registrations in the order in which they were saved on the USB memory or User memory. This function is called "Load Next."

When you will be performing live, you can save Registration sets to USB memory in the order in which you will be performing. Then while you perform, you can recall the next Registration set easily and smoothly.

There are two [Load Next] buttons. Pressing either one will produce the same result.

MEMO

By using the "File Edit" function, you can modify the order or the name of the Registrations saved on USB memory or User memory, or delete an unwanted Registration (p. 113, p. 124, p. 126).

graph LR
    A["Start"] --> B["Step 1"]
    B --> C["Step 2"]
    C --> D["Step 3"]
    D --> E["Step 4"]
    E --> F["Step 5"]
    F --> G["Step 6"]
    G --> H["Step 7"]
    H --> I["Step 8"]
    I --> J["Step 9"]
    J --> K["Step 10"]
    K --> L["Step 11"]
    L --> M["Step 12"]
    M --> N["End"]

1. If you want to load a Registration from USB memory, connect your USB memory to the External Memory connector.

If you want to load a Registration from a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the floppy disk containing the Registration into the floppy disk drive.

2. Press the [Load Next] button.

The first Registration saved on the USB memory will be recalled into the ATELIER.

The following screen appears.

Registration Load OK? REGIST-02 Undo OK

Button	Description
Undo	Return to the Registration that had been selected before you pressed the [Load Next] button.
OK	Finalize the Registration. It will not be possible to return to the previous Registration.

3. Press one of the Registration [1]–[12] buttons.

The Registration will be loaded (recalled into internal memory).

MEMO

You can also assign the "RIGHT+Load Next" function to Registration Shift, and use the foot switch to operate the Next Load function (p. 137).

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to successively recall the Registration sets.

Checking the next Registration set

1. Access the Main screen.

4 4 Transpose C C 130 M: 1 Biggest Band Quick Registration Music Assistant Rhythm System Quick Guide Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. Touch < > icon several times to switch to < > (Regist).

The Main screen display will switch to the Registration.

4 4 Transpose C C 130 M: 1 REGIST-01 Next REGIST-02 Quick Registration Music Assistant Rhythm System Quick Guide Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

"Next" will indicate the name of the next Registration set.

Instead of performing step 3, you can also load the Registration by touching in the screen.

Deleting a Set of Registrations

Here's how to delete a Registration set that was saved to a USB memory, User memory (p. 233), or floppy disk.

1. Prepare the Registration that you want to delete.

If you want to delete Registration data from the USB memory, connect the USB memory to the External Memory connector.

If you want to delete Registration data from the floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector. Into the floppy disk drive, insert a floppy disk

2. Touch on the Main screen.

The Registration Load screen appears.

3. Touch .

The Registration File Edit screen appears.

Registration File Edit 01:REGIST-01 02:REGIST-02 03:REGIST-03 04:REGIST-04 05:REGIST-05 Rename Up Down Delete Create Copy Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

Button Meaning Description
Rename	Modify the name	The Rename screen appears. You can touch the screen and rename the selected Registration (p. 113).
Up	Change the order (upward)	The selected Registration will be moved earlier in the order (p. 126).
Down	Change the order (downward)	The selected Registration will be moved later in the order (p. 126).
Delete	Delete the Registration	The selected Registration will be deleted.
Create	Create new folder	A new folder will be created (p. 127).
Copy	Copies the Registration	You can copy Registration from USB memory to User memory, or copy Registration from User memory to USB memory (p. 128).

You can also open the Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] button.

4. Touch <▶◀> to select the desired media.

If you want to delete from the Registration to USB memory, select "Ext Memory."

If you want to delete from the Registration to User memory, select "User." If you want to delete from the Registration to floppy disk, select "Disk."

5. Touch <> to select the Registration that you wish to delete.

6. Touch .

The following display appears.

Delete Registration OK? Cancel OK

To cancel operation, touch .

7. If you are sure that you wish to delete the Registration, touch .

When the Registration has been deleted, the Registration File Edit screen will reappear.

When a Registration is deleted, the deleted Registration name will change to "----."

Registration File Edit 01:REGIST-01 02:REGIST-02 03:REGIST-03 04: ---- 05:REGIST-05 Rename Up Down Delete Create Copy Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

Changing the Name or Order of Registration

After saving Registrations on USB memory, User memory (p. 233), or floppy disk, you can change the order or name of the Registrations, or delete a Registration (p. 124). This is very convenient when you are preparing to use the [Load Next] button (Load Next function → p. 122) to recall successive Registrations while you play.

1. Prepare the Registration(s) that you want to rename or sort.

If you want to rename or sort Registrations saved on USB memory, connect your USB memory to the External Memory connector.

If you want to rename or sort Registrations saved on a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector and insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive.

2. Touch on the Main screen.

The Registration Load screen appears.

Registration Load Internal Factory Reg. Next 01:REGIST-01 02:REGIST-02 03:REGIST-03 04:REGIST-04 Exit Media User Load go to Save File 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. Touch .

The Registration File Edit screen appears.

Registration File Edit User 01:REGIST-01 02:REGIST-02 03:REGIST-03 04:REGIST-04 05:REGIST-05 Rename Up Down Delete Create Copy Exit J 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

You can also open the Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] button.

4. Touch <▶◀> to select the desired media.

Choose "Ext Memory" if you want to rename or sort Registrations saved on USB memory, or "Disk" if you want to rename or sort Registrations saved on a floppy disk. Choose "User" if you want to rename or sort Registrations saved in User memory.

5. Touch <> < > in the screen to select a Registration.

Changing the Order of Registration

6. Touch or to move the Registration.

Button Mean Description
Up	Change the order (upward)	The selected Registration will be moved earlier in the order.
Down	Change the order (downward)	The selected Registration will be moved later in the order.

Changing the Name of the Registration

7. Touch .

The Rename screen appears.

Rename the Registration as described in "Assigning a Name to a Registration Set" (p. 113).

8. Touch .

To cancel the operation, touch .

Selecting a Registration from within a folder

1. Touch on the Main screen to display the Registration Load screen.
2. Touch <> < > to select a folder.
3. Touch the folder name.

The Registrations in the folder will be displayed.

1. Touch the Registration name.

To exit the folder

1. Touch <> < > to select "Up."
2. Touch the "Up" indication.

NOTE

If there's a Registration that you

want to delete, touch

select the

Registration, then touch

. When a message

asking you to confirm the

deletion appears, touch .

You can rename the folder in the Registration File Edit screen.

To create a folder, refer to

"Creating a Folder" (p. 47).

Copying Registrations

Registrations from USB memory or floppy disk can be copied to User memory.

If a Registration saved in USB memory or on a floppy disk is stored in User memory, the stored Registration data will not disappear even when you turn off the power. It is convenient to load frequently-used Registration into User memory.

Registrations saved in User memory can also be copied to USB memory (p. 130).

Copying Registration from USB Memory to User Memory

1. Connect the USB memory to the External Memory connector.

2. Touch on the Main screen.

The Registration Load screen appears.

Registration Load Internal Factory Reg. Next 01:REGIST-01 02:REGIST-02 03:REGIST-03 04:REGIST-04 Media User Load go to Save File Exit J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch .

The Registration File Edit screen appears.

Registration File Edit 01:REGIST-01 02:REGIST-02 03:REGIST-03 04:REGIST-04 05:REGIST-05 Rename Up Down Delete Create Copy Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

If you want to copy Registration from floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector.

You can also open the Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] button.

4. Touch .

The Registration File Copy screen appears.

Registration File Copy 01:MY REGIST 1 Media Ext Memory User: 01:REGIST-01 Exit Execute J 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

5. Touch <▶▶> to select the media (the location of the Registration you want to copy).

If you want to copy a Registration from USB memory, select "Ext Memory." If you want to copy a Registration from floppy disk, select "Disk."

6. Touch <> to select the Registration you want to copy.

Registration File Copy 02:MY REGIST 2 Media Ext Memory User: 01:REGIST-01 Exit Execute J = 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

7. Touch User <> to select the copy-destination number.

Numbers for which a Registration name is shown already have a Rhythm saved to them.

8. Touch .

The copying of the Registration to User memory begins.

When copying ends, the "----" in the screen will change to the Registration name that you copied.

MEMO

If you choose , all Registrations stored in the currently selected folder of the USB memory or floppy disk will be copied in a single operation.

NOTE

Never remove the USB memory or turn off the power while the Registration data is being copied from USB memory into the ATELIER. If you do so, the Registration data will not be loaded into the ATELIER, and malfunctions could result. After returning the Registration stored in the User memory to the factory settings (p. 233), reload the Registration from USB memory.

If you select a number in which a Registration is already saved, a screen like the following will appear.

Overwrite Registration OK? Cancel OK

If you want to delete the previously saved Registration and overwrite it with the Registration you're newly saving, touch .

If you don't want to delete the previously saved Registration, touch , then select a number at which no Registration has been saved, and copy the Registration to that number.

Copying Registration from User Memory to USB Memory

You can copy Registration from User memory to USB memory.

In this case, touch the arrow icon located in the center of the "Registration File Copy screen" in step 4 of the above procedure, so the arrow points upwards. In this state, you'll be copying Registration from User memory to USB memory.

Registration File Copy 05:---- User: 01:REGIST-01 Media Ext Memory - + Execute Exit J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

The rest of the procedure is the same as when copying Registration from USB memory to User memory.

You can return only the User memory to the factory settings. Refer to "Restoring the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings"(p. 233).

Using the Performance Functions

Transposing to a Different Key (Key Transpose)

You can transpose the key of a performance without having to shift the position of your fingers on the keyboard. This feature is called "Key Transpose."

For example, even if the song is in a difficult key with numerous sharps or flats, you can transpose it to a key that is easier for you to play.

1. Set the value for the transposition with the Transpose [-] and [+] buttons.

Each time you press a Transpose [-] [+] button, the pitch will be transposed by a semitone.

Acceptable values range from A_b to G (in semitone steps).

The specified value will be displayed in the Main screen.

Transpose C Biggest Band Quick Registration Music Assistant Rhythm System Quick Guide 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

State of the Transpose [-] [+] buttons

If transposed (non-C)	One of the Transpose [-] [+] button indicators is lit.
If not transposed (C)	The Transpose [-] [+] button indicators are extinguished.

2. By pressing the Transpose [-] [+] buttons simultaneously, you can restore the default setting C.

The transposition setting is stored in the Registration. For details on the settings that are stored in the Registration, refer to "Settings That Are Stored In the Registration Buttons" (p. 286).

You can change the timing at which the transposition settings saved in a Registration will be recalled. For details refer to "Changing the Timing at Which Transposition Settings are Recalled" (p. 219).

Adjusting the Brightness of the Sound

Using the [Brilliance] slider, you can adjust the brightness of the sound.

For a brighter sound, push the slider away from you. For a mellower sound, pull the slider toward you.

Brilliance

You can adjust not only the treble range but the bass as well with the [Brilliance] slider. You can suppress the lower frequencies by moving the slider downwards.

NOTE

This setting is not stored in the Registration.

Adding Decay to the Sound (Damper Pedal)

When you depress the Damper (Sustain) pedal, a decay effect will be added to the voices.

While you continue depressing the damper pedal, notes will be sustained even if you release the keys.

Simple line drawing of a vase with a horizontal line above it (no text or symbols)

By default the decay effect will be applied to the voices played on the Lower keyboard.

MEMO

The explanation at left uses an illustration of the AT-900.

MEMO

You can modify the setting so that decay is only applied to notes played on the Upper keyboard (p. 214).

NOTE

Decay cannot be added to the Solo voices.

NOTE

Decay can be applied to Pedal Bass voices played on the Lower keyboard (when the Pedal [To Lower] or [Bass Split] button indicators are lit). In this case, a decay will not be applied to the pedal bass voice.

MEMO

You can connect a pedal keyboard (PK series; sold separately) to the AT-900C and use the pedal keyboard's hold pedal to sustain the sound.

Using the Pitch Bend/Vibrato Lever

When you move the Pitch Bend/Vibrato lever to the left or right, you can obtain a smooth change in the pitch of the notes being played (Pitch Bend effect). Move the lever to the right to raise the pitch, and to the left to lower it. Also, when you push the lever away from you, a vibrato effect can be obtained.

Vibrato Effect Pitch Bend Effect

By default (immediately after the power is turned on) the Pitch Bend effect is added to the voices of all the sections being played on the Upper keyboard.

You can also adjust the range of the pitch which is shifted by the Pitch Bend lever. For details, refer to "Changing the Pitch Bend Range" (p. 215).

Please note that only the appropriate voices will allow vibrato to be added.

You can change the settings so that both the Pitch Bend and Vibrato effects are applied to the Lower keyboard voice or the voices on the Pedalboard. Please refer to "Choosing the Keyboard for which Pitch Bend and Vibrato will Apply" (p. 214).

Using the Foot Switches

On either side of the expression pedal are two Foot Switches. Different functions are assigned to each of these two foot switches.

Diagram of a mechanical component with curved grooves and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

You can also change the functions assigned to the left and right Foot Switches. Please refer to "Changing the Function of the Foot Switch" (p. 136).

With the factory settings, the following functions are assigned to the left and right Foot Switches.

Right Foot Switch	Switch the Rotary effect between Fast/Slow.If Rotary is turned on, the Rotary effect will switch between "Fast" and "Slow" each time you press the Foot Switch.
Left Foot Switch	Glide (an effect by which the pitch is lowered by a semitone while the foot switch is pressed, and is returned to what is originally was when you release your foot).While you are pressing the Foot Switch, the pitch will be temporarily lowered. When you release the Foot Switch, the pitch will return to normal gradually.

You can store functions to be assigned to the foot switch to individual Registration buttons (p. 109).

You can connect a pedal keyboard (PK series; sold separately) to the AT-900C and use the pedal keyboard's foot switch.

If "Registration Shift" is turned "RIGHT," "LEFT," or "RIGHT +Load Next," the foot switch will function only to switch Registrations (p. 137).

The Glide effect will only be applied to the keyboard section that has been specified as being the destination for the Pitch bend/Vibrato lever. Please refer to "Choosing the Keyboard for which Pitch Bend and Vibrato will Apply" (p. 214).

Changing the Function of the Foot Switch

You can select any of the following functions and assign them to either Foot Switch on the right or left side of the Expression Pedal.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Controller screen appears.

1. Touch <▶◀> to display the L Foot Switch or R Foot Switch.

Controller P.1/3 L Foot Switch GLIDE R Foot Switch ROTARY FAST/SLOW Registration Shift OFF Damper Pedal to LOWER Exit

1. Touch or setting.

Controller P.1/3 L Foot Switch GLIDE R Foot GLIDE Registrar Factory + Damper Export WER Exit Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch < >> < > to change the setting.

2. Touch .

If the "Registration Shift" setting is "RIGHT," "LEFT," or "RIGHT + Load next," the Foot Switch will be dedicated to switching through the Registrations, and the "R Foot Switch" or "L Foot Switch" setting will be ignored (p. 137).

Available functions	Description
ROTARY FAST/SLOW	Switch the Rotary speed between "FAST" and "SLOW."
GLIDE	While the Foot Switch is pressed, the pitch will temporarily be lowered, and will gradually return to normal when you release the Foot Switch. When the power is turned on, Glide effect is added to the voice of all the sections being played on Upper keyboard.
LEADING BASS	The Leading Bass function (p. 94) will operate only while you continue pressing the Foot Switch.
RHYTHM START/STP	Start/Stop the Rhythm.
COMP PLAY/STOP	The same function as the Composer [Play/Stop] button. Each time you press the Foot Switch, the performance data will play back or stop.
INTRO/ENDING	Play an Intro or Ending.
VARIATION UP	Switches the Variation button. Each time you press the foot switch, the Variation number will increment.
VARIATION DOWN	Switches the Variation button. Each time you press the foot switch, the Variation number will decrement.
VARIATION ALT.	Switches the Variation button. If the Variation [1] button or [3] button is selected, this will switch between the Variation [1] and [3] buttons. If the Variation [2] button or [4] button is selected, this will switch between the Variation [2] and [4] buttons.
FILL IN	Adds a fill-in.
BREAK	Stop the Rhythm at the end of that measure.
DAMPER OF UPPER	Notes played on the Upper keyboard will be sustained only while you continue pressing the Foot Switch.
DAMPER OF LOWER	Notes played on the Lower keyboard will be sustained only while you continue pressing the Foot Switch.
ART. CONTROL1	Applies an effect to an articulation voice (p. 63).
ART. CONTROL2
OFF	Turns the foot switch function off.

Using the Foot Switch to Switch Registrations

You can use the Foot Switch as a dedicated switch for selecting Registrations in order. The Registration will be switched each time you press the foot switch.

NOTE

The Registration Shift settings are stored to each individual Registration Set. When "RIGHT + Load Next" is assigned to the foot switch and the Load Next function is used to switch Registration Sets saved to a USB memory or floppy disk, set the Registration Shift setting to "RIGHT + Load Next" for all saved Registrations.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Controller screen appears.

1. Touch < >> > to display the Registration Shift.

Controller P.1/3 L Foot Switch GLIDE R Foot Switch ROTARY FAST/SLOW Registration Shift OFF Damper Pedal to LOWER Exit

1. Touch the Registration Shift setting (OFF/RIGHT/LEFT/RIGHT + Load Next).

2. Touch <> < > to change the setting.

3. Touch .

MEMO

This setting remains stored in memory even while the power is turned off.

Setting	Description
OFF	You can use a function assigned to the foot switch.
RIGHT	The right foot switch is dedicated to switching Registrations. The function assigned to the right foot switch cannot be used.

Setting	Description
LEFT	The left foot switch is dedicated to switching Registrations. The function assigned to the left foot switch cannot be used.
RIGHT + Load Next	The right foot switch is dedicated to switching Registrations. The function assigned to the right foot switch cannot be used.Selecting the Registration [12] button and pressing the right foot switch activates the Load Next function, calling up the next Registration saved to the USB memory, User memory, or floppy disk. The Registration Load window appears in the display. When you then press the right foot switch again, the Registration Set is confirmed, and the Registration [1] button is selected.Example:1→2→3...→12 →Load Next→(Next Registration) 1

What is "Load Next"?

You can use the Load Next function to call up Registrations in the order saved to the USB memory, User memory, or floppy disk. When you will be performing live, you can save Registration sets to USB memory, User memory, or floppy disk in the order in which you will be performing. Then while you perform, you can recall the next Registration set easily and smoothly.

Checking the next Registration set

1. Display the Main screen (p. 31).

2. Touch < > icon several times to switch to

The Main screen display will switch to the Registration.

4/4 Transpose C C REGIST-01 Next REGIST-02 Quick Registration Music Assistant Rhythm System Quick Guide Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

"Next" will indicate the name of the next Registration set.

Adjusting the Overall Volume Using an Expression Pedal

You can use the expression pedal to adjust the overall volume. When you depress the Expression Pedal, the volume increases. The volume decreases as you tilt the pedal back.

decrease the volume increase the volume

Using the expression pedal enables you to give your performances even richer musical expressiveness.

The expression pedal features the following special characteristics:

• Completely releasing the expression pedal does not lower the volume to zero. If you do want to turn down the volume completely, set the [Master Volume] slider to the Min (Minimum) position.
• Even as you release your foot from the expression pedal and lower the volume, the lower-range portion will linger on. This provides a natural-sounding resonance.
• When an Active Expression voice is selected, the expression pedal can be used to produce changes in the voice (p. 71).

You can specify how the Expression Pedal will affect the sound when it is pressed (p. 139).

You can also specify whether the Expression Pedal will or will not control the volume during the recording of your performance (p. 213).

You can specify whether the Expression Pedal will or will not control the volume during the playback of recorded performance (p. 214).

You can connect a pedal keyboard (PK series; sold separately) to the AT-900C and use the pedal keyboard's expression pedal.

Adjusting the Depth of the Expression Pedal

You can set the amount of effect applied when you step on the expression pedal.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Controller screen appears.

1. Touch < ▶ < > to display the Exp. Curve (Expression Curve).

2. Touch setting.

Controller P.2/3 Exp. Src (Rec) PEDAL Exp. Sr 2 MPOSER — Factory + Bender Exit PER Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch <▶◀> to change the setting.

Setting	Description
1	The position of the expression pedal does not really affect the Rhythm performances and Automatic Accompaniment.This setting is convenient when you do not want to have the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment volume change much.
2	The expression pedal is applied to the Rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment just as it is to the keyboard performance.The volume is easily adjusted according to the angle of the expression pedal, making this setting perfect for use in songs with big changes in dynamics.
3	The expression pedal is applied to the Rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment just as it is to the keyboard performance.The expression affect is applied more gently than with Setting 2, so this setting is appropriate for quieter songs with less intense dynamic changes.
4	The expression pedal does not affect the Rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment at all.This setting is suitable for ensemble performances and other performances featuring multiple instruments.

1. Touch .

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Applying Various Effects to the Sound

The ATELIER allows you to apply various effects to the sounds you play from the keyboard.

Adding Harmony to a Melody (Harmony Intelligence)

Harmony appropriate for the chord you play in the lower keyboard can be added to the highest note played in the upper keyboard. This function is called "Harmony Intelligence."

When you press the [Harmony Intelligence] button, the voice most suitable for the selected harmony intelligence will be selected automatically.

1. Press the [Harmony Intelligence] button (indicator lights).

Each time you press the button, the indicator will alternate between ON (lit) and OFF (unlit).

The name of the selected Harmony Intelligence will be displayed for several seconds in the screen.

Harmony Intelligence P.1/5 ORGAN HYMN BIG BAND TRADITIONAL* STRINGS HARP BLOCK DUET Exit J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

Changing the Harmony Intelligence Type

There are 36 different Harmony types.

The manner in which notes will sound also depends on the Harmony type. When you press the [Harmony Intelligence] button to turn it on (lit), a voice most suitable for the selected harmony intelligence will be selected automatically.

1. Press the [Harmony Intelligence] button.

The Harmony Intelligence screen appears for several seconds.

Harmony Intelligence P.1/5 ORGAN HYMN BIG BAND TRADITIONAL* STRINGS HARP BLOCK DUET Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. Touch <> < > to switch the screen, and touch the screen to select the desired harmony intelligence.

The indicator of the Harmony Intelligence [Harmony Intelligence] button will blink.

Type of Harmony Intelligence

ORGAN, BIG BAND, STRINGS, BLOCK, HYMN, TRADITIONAL*, HARP, DUET, COMBO, JAZZ SCAT, COUNTRY, BROADWAY, BRASS, FLUTE, DIXIELAND, HYMN2, GOSPEL, SYNTH, OCTAVE 1*, OCTAVE 2*, 1 NOTE*, 2 NOTES*, 3 NOTES*, 4 NOTES*, ORGAN*, BIG BAND*, STRINGS*, BLOCK*, HYMN*, DUET/DIXIE*, COMBO/BRASS*, JAZZ SCAT*, COUNTRY/SYN*, BROADWAY*, FLUTE*, GOSPEL*

3. Press the [Harmony Intelligence] button once again.

The [Harmony Intelligence] button indicator will light, indicating that the selected harmony intelligence has been confirmed.

You can also confirm the Harmony Intelligence settings by touching on the Harmony Intelligence screen. You can also play the upper manual to confirm the type of the Harmony Intelligence.

The way in which the keys you press are sounded by each type of harmony intelligence is described below.

Type	Solo Voice Upper Voice		Number of notes of the harmony
ORGAN	—	Theater Or.3 3
BIG BAND	Trumpet	Flugel Horn 5
STRINGS	Strings 1	Strings 5 4
BLOCK	Vibraphone	Piano 1 5
HYMN	Choir	Choir 4
TRADITIONAL*	Currently Selected Tone		3
HARP	—	Harp 2
DUET	Trumpet	Tp. Section 2
COMBO	Clarinet	Trombone 3
JAZZ SCAT	Jazz Scat	Jazz Scat 4
COUNTRY	Full Organ1	Jazz Guitar 3
BROADWAY	Celesta	Theater Or.1 3
BRASS	Brass 1	Fr.HornSect3 3
FLUTE	Flute 3	Strings 7 4
DIXIELAND	Trumpet	Clarinet 2
HYMN2	Female 1	Classical 4
GOSPEL	Full Organ1	Gospel 3
SYNTH	Organ Bell	Synth. Pad2 3
OCTAVE 1*	Currently Selected Tone		2
OCTAVE 2*	Currently Selected Tone		2
1 NOTE*	Currently Selected Tone		2
2 NOTES*	Currently Selected Tone		3
3 NOTES*	Currently Selected Tone		4
4 NOTES*	Currently Selected Tone		5
ORGAN*	Currently Selected Tone		3
BIG BAND*	Currently Selected Tone		5
STRINGS*	Currently Selected Tone		4
BLOCK*	Currently Selected Tone		5
HYMN*	Currently Selected Tone		4
DUET/DIXIE*	Currently Selected Tone 2
COMBO/BRASS*	Currently Selected Tone		3
JAZZ SCAT*	Currently Selected Tone		4
COUNTRY/SYN*	Currently Selected Tone 3
BROADWAY*	Currently Selected Tone		3
FLUTE*	Currently Selected Tone		4
GOSPEL*	Currently Selected Tone 3

Harp-type harmony intelligence does not sound the keys you play. Use your left hand to play a chord in the lower keyboard and use your right hand to play a glissando in the upper keyboard, and a beautiful harp glissando will be produced.

The number of notes of the harmony will depend on the Harmony Intelligence type.

Adding Modulation to the Sound (Rotary Effect)

Rotary is an effect which simulates the sound of rotating speakers. There is a choice of two settings: Fast and Slow.

1. Select the voice to which you wish to apply the Rotary effect.

2. Press the Rotary Sound [On/Off] button (confirm that its indicator is lit).

The Rotary effect will be applied to the voice.

1. Press the Rotary Sound [Fast/Slow] button to switch between Rotary Fast (Lit) and Rotary Slow (Unlit).

Rotary [Fast/Slow] button	Effect
Lit (Fast)	The effect obtained is equivalent to speakers being rapidly rotated.
Unlit (Slow)	Effect simulating the slow rotation of speakers.

When you switch the rotary effect from "Fast" to "Slow," the modulation will slow down gradually, and when you switch from "Slow" to "Fast" the modulation will speed up gradually.

NOTE

For more on the tones to which the Rotary effect can be applied, refer to "Voice List" (Appendix: separate booklet).

MEMO

You can assign the Rotary Sound [Fast/Slow] button function to the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal (p. 136).

Making Fine Adjustments to the Rotary Effect Speed (Rotary Speed)

You can make fine adjustments to the speaker rotation speed of the rotary effect (p. 143).

1. Touch on the Main screen.

4 4 Transpose C C 130 Sound/KBD Biggest Band Quick Registration Music Assistant Rhythm System Quick Guide Main

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

Sound/Keyboard Upper Org Full Organ1 Orch. Grand Piano Lower Org. Orch. Pedal Org. Organ Bass1 Sym. Full Strings Solo Flute3 Orch.Str.Ens Orch. Orch. Str.Bass Pdl Exit Controller Effect SplitPoint J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. Touch .

The Effect screen appears.

Effect P.1/3 Rotary Speed NORMAL Rotary Color BRIGHT Reverb Type HALL 2 Wall Type ACOUSTIC TILE Exit J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. Touch <><> to display the Rotary Speed.

4. Touch the value setting buttons for Rotary Speed to adjust the setting.

Effect Rotary Speed NORMAL Rotary Reverb - Factory + Wall Typ Exit C TILE Exit P.1/3 M: 1 130 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

5. Touch <> < > to edit the value.

Setting

SLOW, NORMAL, FAST

6. Touch .

These settings remain stored in memory even while the power is off.

Changing the Brightness of the Rotary Effect (Rotary Color)

This setting allows you to choose the brightness of the Rotary sound obtained when using the Rotary effect (p. 143).

1. Touch on the Main screen.

4/4 Transpose C C 130 Biggest Band Sound/KBD Quick Registration Music Assistant Registration Main Rhythm System * Quick Guide

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

Sound/Keyboard Upper Org Sym. Full Organ1 Full Strings Orch Solo Grand Piano (Flute3) Lower Org Sym. Lower Organ1 Orch.Str.Ens Orch Pedal Org Orch Organ Bass1 Str.Bass Pdl Exit Controller Effect SplitPoint J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. Touch .

The Effect screen appears.

Effect P.1/3 Rotary Speed NORMAL Rotary Color BRIGHT Reverb Type HALL 2 Wall Type ACOUSTIC TILE Exit J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. Touch <> < > to display the Rotary Color.

4. Touch the value setting buttons for Rotary Color to adjust the setting.

Each time you touch the Rotary Color setting, it will switch between "BRIGHT" and "MELLOW."

Setting

BRIGHT, MELLOW

5. Touch .

These settings remain stored in memory even while the power is off.

Adding Richness to the Sound (Chorus Effect)

Chorus is an effect that adds expansiveness to a sound, making one instrument sound like several.

You can apply a chorus effect for the "Upper Symphonic," "Upper Orchestral," "Lower Symphonic," and "Lower Orchestral" voices.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

4 4 Transpose C C 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main Biggest Band Rhythm System Quick Guide

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

Sound/Keyboard Upper Org Full Organ1 Orch. Grand Piano Sym Full Strings Solo Flute3 Lower Org Lower Organ1 Orch. Sym Orch.Str.Ens Pedal Org Organ Bass1 Orch Str.Bass Pdl Exit Controller Effect SplitPoint J = 130 M : 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. Touch either or .

Menu	Description
Upper	To apply chorus to the Upper part
Lower	To apply chorus to the Lower part

For some of the voices, Chorus may already be turned ON.

3. For the part to which you wish to apply the chorus effect, touch the Chorus "ON/OFF" display to change the setting.

Each time you touch the Chorus setting, it will alternate ON/OFF.

Upper Keyboard P.1/6 Octave Shift Chorus Reverb Depth Org Full Organ1 0 8 Sym Full Strings 0 OFF 8 Orch Grand Piano 0 OFF 8 Solo Flute3 0 9 Exit Pedal Lower Upper J 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

Indication Description
ON	The Chorus effect will be applied to the voice.
OFF	The Chorus effect will not be applied to the voice.

4. Touch .

NOTE

Some voices do not allow the Chorus effect to be applied. For details refer to "Voice List" (Appendix: separate booklet).

MEMO

You can open the Lower Keyboard screen or Upper Keyboard screen with touching and .

Adding Resonance to the Sound (Sustain Effect)

Sustain allows you to add a sustain effect or decay to each voice after the keys are released.

The Sustain effect can be added to the Upper (except the Solo part), Lower, and Pedal voices.

When Applying Sustain to the Pedal Part

Pedal Sustain Ez One Finger EZ Touch Global Settings

1. Press the [Pedal Sustain] button to make the indicator light.

The Sustain effect is applied to the voices of the Pedal Bass part.

When Applying Sustain to the Upper Part and Lower Part

1. Touch on the Main screen.

4 4 Transpose C C 130 M: 1 Rhythm Bong Regist Biggest Band Sound/KBD Rec/Play Quick Registration Music Assistant Registration Main Rhythm System Quick Guide

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

Sound/Keyboard Upper Org Full Organ1 Orch. Grand Piano Lower Org Lower Organ1 Orch. Pedal Org Organ Bass1 Sym Full Strings Solo Flute3 Sym Orch.Str.Ens Orch Orch Str.Bass Pdl Exit Controller Effect SplitPoint 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

NOTE

The Sustain effect will not be applied to the Solo part voice.

MEMO

The length of Sustain can be modified independently for each part (p. 150).

2. Touch either or .

Indication	Description
Upper	To apply sustain to the Upper part
Lower	To apply sustain to the Lower part

3. Touch < > < > to display the Sustain.

4. Touch the Sustain setting to switch between "ON" and "OFF."

Each time you touch the Sustain setting, it will alternate ON/OFF.

Upper Keyboard P.3/6 Sustain Sustain Length Org Full Organ1 OFF LONG Sym Full Strings Orch Grand Piano Solo Flute3 Exit Pedal Lower Upper Main Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

5. Touch .

NOTE

You can touch to access the Pedalboard screen and change the sustain settings for the pedal part.

Changing the Sustain Length

The sustain length can be set independently (SHORT, MIDDLE (Medium) or LONG) for the Upper and Lower keyboards and Pedalboard.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

4 4 Transpose C C 130 Volume 1 Biggest Band Sound/KBD Quick Registration Music Assistant Registration Main Rhythm System Quick Guide

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

Sound/Keyboard Upper Org Full Organ1 Orch Grand Piano Sym Full Strings Solo Flute3 Lower Org Lower Organ1 Orch. Sym Orch.Str.Ens Pedal Org Organ Bass1 Orch Str.Bass Pdl Exit Controller Effect SplitPoint J 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. Touch either , , or .

Menu	Part whose sustain length you wish to change
Upper	Upper part
Lower	Lower part
Pedal	Pedal part

3. Touch <><> to display the Sustain Length.

Upper Keyboard P.3/6 Sustain Sustain Length Org Full Organ1 ON LONG Sym Full Strings Orch Grand Piano Solo Flute3 Exit Pada Lower Upper 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

You can open the Pedalboard screen, Lower Keyboard screen, or Upper Keyboard screen with touching , , and .

4. For the part whose sustain length you wish to adjust, touch the Sustain "SHORT/MIDDLE/LONG" display.

Upper Keyboard P.3/6 Sustain Sustain Length Org Full LONG Sym Full LONG Orch Gra Factory + Solo Flu Exit Exit Pedal Lower Upper 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

5. Touch < >> to change the value.

Setting

SHORT, MIDDLE, LONG

6. Touch .

Adding Reverberation to the Sound (Reverb Effect)

Reverb is an effect that adds a sense of spaciousness to the sound, creating the illusion of playing in a large or small concert hall, a large or small room, a small club, etc.

graph TD
    A["Max"] --> B["Reverb"]
    C["Max"] --> D["Accomp/SMF"]
    E["Max"] --> F["Rhythm"]
    G["Max"] --> H["Pedal"]
    I["Min"] --> J["Organ"]
    K["Min"] --> L["Orch"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style K fill:#f9f,stroke:#333

1. Press the Reverb [▲] or [▼] buttons to adjust the overall Reverb amount.

When you press the up button [▲], additional Reverb is applied. Pressing the down button [▼] decreases the Reverb level. If none of the Reverb indicators are lit, the Reverb effect will not be heard.

When you press the Reverb [▲] [▼] buttons, the Part Balance Monitor screen appears. In the Part Balance Monitor screen you can check the reverb depth.

Part Balance Monitor Hold Exit 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 8 8 8 10 Acc/ Rev SMF Rhy Pedal Org Orch Org Lower Sym Orch Org Upper Sym Orch Solo Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

MEMO

The Part Balance Monitor screen is displayed for several seconds and then closes automatically.

If you touch , the screen continues to be displayed until you touch again.

Changing the Reverb Type

By changing the reverberations of the notes, you can enjoy the atmosphere of performance in a wide variety of different locations.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

4 4 Transpose C C 130 Wol 1 Biggest Band Sound/KBD Quick Registration Music Assistants Registration Main Rhythm System Quick Guide

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

Sound/Keyboard Upper Org Full Organ1 Orch Grand Piano Sym Full Strings Solo Flute3 Lower Org Lower Organ1 Orch. Sym Orch.Str.Ens Pedal Org Organ Bass1 Orch Str.Bass Pdl Exit Controller Effect SplitPoint J-130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. Touch .

The Effect screen appears.

Effect P.1/3 Rotary Speed NORMAL Rotary Color BRIGHT Reverb Type HALL 2 Wall Type ACOUSTIC TILE Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. Touch <> < > to display the Reverb Type.

4. Touch the value setting buttons for Reverb Type to adjust the setting.

The following screen appears.

Effect P.1/3 Rotary Speed NORMAL HALL 2 Rotary Reverb Factory + 2 Wall Typ Exit C TILE Exit Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

5. Touch <> < > to change the setting.

Display	Description
ROOM 1	Simulates the reverb of a conference room
ROOM 2	Simulates the reverb of a performance lounge
ROOM 3	Simulates the reverb of a large, open room
HALL 1	Simulates the reverb of a large concert hall
HALL 2	Simulates the reverb of a small concert hall
SMALL CHURCH	The reverberation of a small church
LARGE CHURCH	The reverberation of a large church
CATHEDRAL	The reverberation of a cathedral
PLATE	Applies a bright, metallic reverb
DELAY	An echo-like sound repeated several times
PAN DELAY	Similarly to the above but where the sound is panned between the left and right speakers

NOTE It is not possible to modify the delay time (delay interval) when "DELAY" or "PAN DELAY" is selected.

6. Touch .

Changing the Wall Type

By changing the type of reverb (p. 152) you can experience the feeling of performing in various different locations, and by changing the Wall Type (wall material) you can make further adjustments to the way in which reverberation occurs.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

4 4 Transpose C C 130 Wol 1 Sound/KBD Biggest Band Quick Registration Music Assistants Rhythm System Quick Guide Main

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

Sound/Keyboard Upper Org Full Organ1 Sym Orch Full Strings Grand Piano Solo Flute3 Lower Org Lower Organ1 Sym Orch.Str.Ens Orch Pedal Org Organ Bass1 Orch Str.Bass Pdl Exit Controller Effect SplitPoint J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. Touch .

The Effect screen appears.

Effect Rotary Speed NORMAL Rotary Color BRIGHT Reverb Type HALL 2 Wall Type ACOUSTIC TILE Exit

3. Touch <><> to display the Wall Type.

4. Touch the value setting buttons for Wall Type to adjust the setting.

The following screen appears.

Effect Rotary Speed NORMAL Acoustic Tile Rotary Reverb Factory 2 Wall Typ TILE Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

5. Touch <><> to change the setting.

Display	Description
DRAPERY	Pleated curtain
CARPET	Carpet
ACOUSTIC TILE	Acoustical tile, sound-absorptive tile
WOOD	Wood
BRICK	Brick
PLASTER	Plaster
CONCRETE BLOCK	Concrete block
MARBLE	Marble

6. Touch .

Changing the Depth of the Reverb

You can specify the reverb depth for each part.

To adjust the reverb depth for Upper/Lower/Pedal/Solo

1. Touch on the Main screen.

4/4 Transpose C C 130 Volume 1 Biggest Band Sound/KBD Quick Registration Music Assistant Registration Main Rhythm System Quick Guide

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

Sound/Keyboard Upper Org Full Organ1 Sym Full Strings Orch Grand Piano Solo Flute3 Lower Org Lower Organ1 Sym Orch.Str.Ens Orch Pedal Org Organ Bass1 Orch Str.Bass Pdl Exit Controller Effect SplitPoint J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. Touch either , , or .

Menu	Part whose reverb depth you wish to change
Upper	Upper part, Solo part
Lower	Lower part
Pedal	Pedal part

3. Touch <> < > to display the Reverb Depth.

Upper Keyboard P.1/6 Octave Shift Chorus Reverb Depth Org Full Organ1 0 8 Sym Full Strings 0 OFF 8 Orch Grand Piano 0 OFF 8 Solo Flute3 0 9 Exit Pedal Lower Upper 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

You can open the Pedalboard screen, Lower Keyboard screen, or Upper Keyboard screen with touching , , and

4. Touch the part whose reverb depth you wish to adjust.

The following screen appears.

Upper Keyboard P.1/6 Octave Shift | Chorus | Reverb Depth Org Full 8 8 Sym Full 8 Orch Gra Factory + Solo Flu Exit 9 Exit Pedal Lower Upper 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

5. Touch <> < > td-adjust the setting.

Setting
0-10

6. Touch .

To Adjust the Reverb Depth for Something Other Than Upper/Lower/ Pedal/Solo

1. Touch on the Main screen.

4 4 Transpose C C 130 Sound/KBD Rhythm Regist Biggest Band Quick Registration Music Assistant Rhythm System Quick Guide Main

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

Sound/Keyboard Upper Org Full Organ1 Sym Orch Full Strings Grand Piano Solo Flute3 Lower Org Lower Organ1 Sym Orch.Str.Ens Orch Pedal Org Organ Bass1 Orch Str.Bass Pdl Exit Controller Effect SplitPoint 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. Touch .

The Effect screen appears.

Effect Rotary Speed NORMAL Rotary Color BRIGHT Reverb Type HALL 2 Wall Type ACOUSTIC TILE Exit -130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. Touch < >> <> to display the Rev Depth (Reverb Depth).

Effect P.2/3 Rev Depth Accomp AUTO Rev Depth Rhythm AUTO Rev Depth Drums 3 Rev Depth M.Perc 4 Exit

Effect P.3/3 Rev Depth A.Bass AUTO Rev Depth Vintage 8 VintageFlute Volume 9 Exit

Part

Accomp (Automatic accompaniment other than the bass part) Rhythm (Rhythm performance), Drums (Drums/SFX) M.Perc (Manual Percussion) A.Bass (Bass part of the Automatic Accompaniment) Vintage (Vintage Organ)

4. Touch the part whose reverb depth you wish to adjust.

The following screen appears.

Effect P.2/3 Rev Depth Accomp AUTO Rev Dep 0 Rev Dep Factory + Rev Dep Exit Exit Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

5. Touch <> < > to adjust the setting.

Setting

0–10, AUTO (Accomp, Rhythm, A.Bass only)

For the three Parts of the Accomp, Rhythm and Accompaniment Bass, you have the option of selecting the "AUTO" setting. Parts for which "AUTO" is selected will be set to the Reverb Depth that is most suitable for the Rhythm currently selected.

6. Touch .

Using the D Beam Controller for Additional Enjoyment

Modifying the Sound

You can modify the sound simply by moving your hand above the D Beam controller located on the panel.

1. Press either the [Pitch], [Filter], or [Volume] button for the D Beam so the button is lit in red.

Button	Button status Description
Pitch Lit (red)		Changes the pitch of the sounds you play on the upper keyboard.
Filter	Lit (red)	Changes the tonal character of the sounds you play on the upper keyboard.* For some sounds, the tonal change may be difficult to notice.
Volume	Lit (red)	Changes the volume of the sounds you play on the upper keyboard.

2. Move your hand above the D Beam controller.

The effect assigned to the D Beam controller will be applied to the sound.

Effective range of the D Beam controller

The illustration at right shows the effective range of the D Beam controller. Moving your hand outside this range will not produce any effect.

The effective range of the D Beam controller will be drastically decreased under strong direct sunlight. Please be aware of this when using the D Beam controller outdoors.

Illustration of a hand pressing down an object with an upward arrow (no text or symbols)

Turning the D Beam Controller Off

3. Press the button you pressed in step 1 several times so its light is turned off.

MEMO

When the [Pitch], [Filter], or [Volume] button for the D Beam is lit in green, the sound effect assigned to the D Beam controller will play when you move your hand above the D Beam controller (p. 157).

NOTE

The sensitivity of the D Beam controller will vary according to the brightness of its surroundings. If it does not operate as you expect, you can readjust the sensitivity. Increasing the D Beam sensitivity value (p. 215) will make it more sensitive.

Moving Your Hand Above the D Beam Controller to Produce a Sound Effect

You can produce various sound effects simply by moving your hand above the D Beam controller on the panel.

D Beam
Pitch	Filter	Volume

1. Press either the [Pitch], [Filter], or [Volume] button for the D Beam so the button is lit in green.

Button Button	status Description
Pitch Lit (green)		A bass drum and cymbal will sound.
Filter	Lit (green)	The cymbal will be struck with gradually increasing force.
Volume	Lit (green)	The sound of a wind chime is produced.

1. Move your hand above the D Beam controller. The sound effect assigned to the D Beam controller will play

Turning the D Beam Controller Off

1. Press the button you pressed in step 1 several times so its light is turned off.

When the [Pitch], [Filter], or [Volume] button for the D Beam is lit in red, an effect will be applied to the sound when you move your hand above the D Beam controller (p. 156).

Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively

Making Effective Use of the Lower Keyboard

Since the lower keyboard of the ATELIER provides a generous 76 notes, you can use it to play piano pieces with ease. In addition, you can divide the keyboard into two or more sections and play solo voices, play the pedal bass voice, or combine a variety of uses for even more versatility.

For example, the following applications are possible.

Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Solo Voice

- Press the Solo [To Lower] button in the Solo section to Play the Solo voice to the Lower keyboard (p. 160).

Drums/SFX Manual Perc. Bass Lower Solo

Using the Lower Keyboard to Play Drum Sounds or Sound Effects

- Press the [Manual Perc] button to play drum sounds or sound effects with the Lower voice on the lower keyboard (p. 80).

Drums/SFX Manual Perc. Bass Lower Solo

Playing Drum Sounds from the Entire Lower Keyboard

- Press the [Drums/SFX] button (p. 78).

■ Drums/SFX ■ Manual Perc. ■ Bass ■ Lower ■ Solo

Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Part by Hand

- Press the [Bass Split] button in the Pedal section to play the Pedal Bass voice from the Lower keyboard (p. 163).

Drums/SFX Manual Perc. Bass Lower Solo

Using the Lower Keyboard to Play Drum Sounds and Solo Voice

- Press the [Drums/SFX] button (p. 78), and then press the Solo [To Lower] button (p. 160).

Drums/SFX Manual Perc. Bass Lower Solo

By changing the combination of voices that are played on the Lower keyboard, and by changing the Solo Split Point (p. 162) and Bass Split Point (p. 164), you can create the following types of setup.

Drums/SFX Manual Perc. Bass Lower Solo Drums/SFX Manual Perc. Bass Lower Solo Drums/SFX Manual Perc. Bass Lower Solo

Playing the Solo Voice on the Lower Keyboard (Solo [To Lower] Button)

Normally, the solo voice will sound on the upper keyboard.

By using the Solo [To Lower] button, you can play the solo voice in the right-hand side of the lower keyboard that includes the B4 key. The state in which the keyboard is divided in this way is called "split," and the location at which the keyboard is divided to play the solo voice in the lower keyboard is called the "Solo Split Point."

Violin Trumpet Sax Flute Oboe Clarinet Others Alternately To Lower Level Solo

1. Select a Solo voice (p. 53).
2. Press the Solo [To Lower] button (indicator lights).

When you play the Lower keyboard, the Solo voice will sound in the range to the right of the Solo Split Point.

Lower keyboard Solo voice Solo Split Point

1. To turn off the Solo split, press the Solo [To Lower] button (indicator turns off).

The Solo voice will no longer sound in the Lower keyboard; the Solo voice will now be played in the Upper keyboard.

You can adjust the Solo Split Point (p. 162).

If the Solo [To Lower] is ON, the Solo voice will not be heard from the upper keyboard.

You can change how the Solo voice will sound (p. 161).

The key used for the solo split point is included in the Solo voice range.

You can layer the Solo voice with the Lower voice so that they will sound together (p. 161).

Changing How the Solo Voice Responds

When the Solo voice is assigned to the Upper keyboard or the Lower keyboard, you can specify how the Solo voice will respond when more than one key is pressed.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Upper Keyboard screen appears.

1. Touch <> < > to display the Solo Mode.

Upper Keyboard P.5/6 Solo Mode Org Full Organ1 Sym Full Strings Orch Grand Piano Solo Flute3 TOP NOTE Exit Pedal Lower Upper 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch the Solo Mode setting (the TOP NOTE, LAST NOTE, or POLYPHONIC indication).

Upper Keyboard P.5/6 Org Full Sym Full Orch Gra Solo Flur Solo Mode TOP NOTE Factory + Exit Exit Pedal Lower Upper 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch <> < > to change the setting.

Setting	Description
TOP NOTE	The Solo voice will sound the highest note that is played for the Solo part.
LAST NOTE	The Solo voice will sound the note that was most recently played for the Solo part.
POLYPHONIC	The Solo voice will sound all notes that are played for the Solo part.

1. Touch .

Layering the Solo Voice and Lower Voice

When the Solo voice is being played by the Lower keyboard (i.e., when the Solo [To Lower] button is ON), you can specify whether the Lower voice and the Solo voice will sound together (layered), or will sound separately (split).

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

2. Touch . The Upper Keyboard screen appears.

3. Touch <> < > to display the Solo To Lower Mode.

Upper Keyboard P.B/6 Solo To Lower Mode Org. Full Organ1 Sym. Full Strings Orch. Grand Piano Solo Flute3 SPLIT Exit Pedal Lower Upper 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch the Solo To Lower Mode setting to switch between "SPLIT" and "LAYER."

Each time you touch the Solo To Lower Mode setting, it will alternate between "SPLIT" and "LAYER."

Setting	Description
SPLIT	The parts will sound separately.
LAYER	The Lower voice and Solo voice will sound together.

1. Touch .

Changing the Solo Split Point

This setting is used to determine the Solo Split Point (lower limit of the playable range of the Solo voice) on the Lower keyboard to any desired position.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

4 4 Transpose C C 130 Volume 1 Biggest Band Sound/KBD Quick Registration Music Assistant Registration Main Rhythm System Quick Guide

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

Sound/Keyboard Upper Org Full Organ1 Orch. Grand Piano Sym. Full Strings Solo Flute3 Lower Org Lower Organ1 Orch. Sym. Orch.Str.Ens Pedal Org Organ Bass1 Orch Str.Bass Pdl Exit Controller Effect SplitPoint J 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. Touch .

The Split Point screen appears.

Split Point Drums/SFX M.Perc Bass Lower Solo C 3 B 4 Split Point Solo Split Point Exit J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. Touch < > < > to change the Solo Split Point.

Setting

E1-G7

4. Touch .

The key used for the solo split point is included in the Solo voice range.

You can also set the split point by pressing the key of the lower keyboard that you want to be the Solo Split Point.

Split Point Drums/SFX M.Perc. Bass Lower Solo C 3 B 4 Bass Split Point Solo Split Point Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. While touching the Solo Split Point value (E1-G7 indication) in the Split Point screen, press the key in the Lower keyboard that you want to specify as the Solo Split Point. The Solo Split Point will be set.

Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Voice ([Bass Split] Button)

By using the [Bass Split] button you can play the bass voice in the left-hand side (including C3) of the lower keyboard. The location at which the lower keyboard is divided in this way, to play the pedal bass voice, is called the "Bass Split Point."

Organ Organ 1 Organ 2 Octave Up Pipe Theater Others Orchestral String Contrabass Octave Up Electric Bass & Cymbal Others To Lower Bass Split Pedal

1. Select a Pedal Bass voice (p. 52).
2. Press the [Bass Split] button (indicator lights).

When you play the Lower keyboard, the Pedal Bass voice will sound in the range to the left of (and including) the C3 note.

Pedal Bass voice Lower keyboard Bass Split Point

1. To turn off the Bass split, press the [Bass Split] button (indicator turns off).

The Pedal Bass voice will no longer sound in the Lower keyboard; the Pedal Bass voice will now be played in the pedalboard.

You can adjust the Bass Split Point (p. 164).

NOTE

It is not possible to select and play both [Bass Split] and Pedal [To Lower] buttons simultaneously.

MEMO

The bass split point is included in the left-hand area of the keyboard.

NOTE

If the [Bass Split] is ON, the Pedal Bass voice will not be heard from the Pedalboard. The Pedal Bass voice will sound from the Lower keyboard.

Changing the Bass Split Point

You can assign the Bass Split Point (the highest key up to which the Pedal Bass voice will sound), to any key of the Lower keyboard.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

4/4 Transpose C C 130 Wol. 1 Biggest Band Sound/KBD Quick Registration Music Assistants Registration Main Rhythm System Quick Guide

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

Sound/Keyboard Upper Org Full Organ1 Orch Grand Piano Sym Full Strings Solo Flute3 Lower Org Lower Organ1 Orch. Sym Orch.Str.Ens Pedal Org Organ Bass1 Orch Str.Bass Pdl Exit Controller Effect SplitPoint J 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. Touch .

The Split Point screen appears.

Split Point Drums/SFX M.Perc Bass Lower Solo C 3 B 4 Split Point Solo Split Point Exit J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. Touch < >> to modify the Bass Split Point.

Setting

E1-G7

4. Touch .

The bass split point is included in the left-hand area of the keyboard.

You can also set the bass split point by playing the desired key of the lower keyboard.

Split Point Drums/SFX M.Perc. Bass Lower Solo C 3 B 4 Bass Split Point Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. While touching the Bass Split Point value (E1-G7 indication) in the Split Point screen, press the key in the Lower keyboard that you want to specify as the Bass Split Point. The bass split point will be set.

Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Voice (Pedal [To Lower] Button)

By using the Pedal [To Lower] button, you can sound the Pedal Bass voice by playing the root note (see p. 284) of a chord on the Lower keyboard in the area that is playing the Lower voice.

To Lower Bass Split Organ Organ 1 Organ 2 Octave Up Pipe Theater Others Orchestral String Contrabass Octave Up Electric Bass & Cymbal Others Pedal

1. Select a Pedal Bass voice (p. 52).
2. Press the Pedal [To Lower] button (indicator lights).

When you play a chord in the area of the Lower keyboard that sounds the Lower voice, the Pedal Bass voice will also be heard and will play the root note.

If the "Leading Bass" function is on (p. 94), the lowest note played in the lower keyboard will sound the pedal bass voice.

1. Press the Pedal [To Lower] button (indicator turns off).

The Pedal Bass voice will no longer sound in the Lower keyboard.

NOTE

If no portion of the Lower keyboard is sounding the Lower voice (the [Drums/SFX] button is ON), the Pedal Bass voice will not sound.

NOTE

It is not possible to select and play both [Bass Split] and Pedal [To Lower] buttons simultaneously.

NOTE

If the Pedal [To Lower] is ON, the Pedal Bass voice will not be heard from the Pedalboard.

MEMO

If no voice is selected for the lower keyboard, you can use the lower keyboard to play the pedal voice.

Recording/Playing Back What You Play

The internal composer can record performances and play back commercial SMF music files.

The composer can be used in the following two ways.

Using the Panel Composer Buttons

Composer

Button Description
Reset	Returns you to the beginning of the song.
Play/Stop	Starts and stops playback of the song.
	After the [Rec] button has been pressed, putting the composer in record standby mode, recording then starts when the [Play/Stop] button is pressed.
Rec	The unit switches to record standby mode.* In record standby, the [Rec] button is lit, and the [Play/Stop] button flashes.
Song	The Song Select screen appears in the display.
Registration	The Registration Load screen appears in the display.
Demo	The Demo screen opens.

Touching in the Main Screen to Open the Rec/Play Screen and Using the Rec/Play Screen's Composer Buttons

Rec/Play NEW SONG Track R A B L U S C Rhythm Accomp Bass Lower Upper Solo Control Reset Stop Play Rec Bwd Fwd Exit Track/DigiScore 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD VIMA TUNES Registration Main

Button	Description
TrackRhythmAccompBassLowerUpperSoloControl	Buttons for tracks to which performances are recorded light up.A lighted button can be toggled between lighted and unlit by pressing it. Tracks are muted when the button's light is off.→ For more about the track buttons, refer to p. 167.
Reset	Returns you to the beginning of the song.
Stop	Stops playback of the song.
Play	Starts playback of the song.
	Afterhas been touched to put the composer in record standby mode, recording then starts when you touch.
Rec	The unit switches to record standby mode.* In record standby,is lit, andflashes.
Bwd	Rewinds the song.
Fwd	Fast forwards the song.
	You can toggle between display of the track buttons, the bouncing ball, or the track mute buttons by touching the button.
	The Notation screen appears in the display.
	The Utility screen for the Composer is displayed.
	The VIMA TUNES screen is displayed. This button is shown only in the Rec/Play (record/play) screen.

What is a Track Button?

The recorded performance will be automatically assigned to the seven Track buttons according to the recorded part. You can record or play back independently by specifying the desired Track button; for example, when you wish to re-record a track.

Rec/Play NEW SONG Track R A B L U S C Width Accomp Bass Lower Upper Solo Control Reset Stop Play Rec Bwd Fwd Exit Track/ DigitScore Main 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD VMA Tubes Registration Main

You can record different kinds of performance data into each track:

Track Recorded Performance
Rhythm	Rhythm performance
	Drums/SFX
	Manual percussion
Accomp	Automatic Accompaniment (except Bass)
Bass	Pedal Bass Voice Performance Data (Note, Bender, Modulation)
	Bass part of the Automatic Accompaniment
Lower	Lower Voice Performance Data (Note, Hold, Bender, Modulation)
Upper	Upper Voice Performance Data (Note, Hold, Bender, Modulation, After Touch)
Solo	Solo Voice Performance Data (Note, Hold, Bender, Modulation, After Touch)
Control	Glide
	Expression
	Reverb Type
	Reverb Depth
	Solo [To Lower] button (ON/OFF)
	Pedal [To Lower] button (ON/OFF)
	Transpose [-] [+] button setting
	[Harmony Intelligence] button] (ON/OFF)
	Harmony Intelligence Type
	Rotary [Fast/Slow] button (ON/OFF)
	Rotary [On/Off] button (ON/OFF)
	Pedal Bass Mode

Track	Recorded Performance
Control	Solo Mode
	Solo To Lower Mode
	Solo Split Point
	[Bass Split] button (ON/OFF)
	Bass Split Point
	Sustain ON/OFF
	Sustain Length
	Initial Touch
	Vintage Organ Setting
	Wall Type
	The Voices assigned for each part
	Level [▲][▼] button (Part Balance Volume)
	The Reverb depth for each part
	The Chorus settings (ON/OFF) of the voice
	The Octave shift settings for each part
	[Drums/SFX] button (ON/OFF)
	Drums/SFX Set
	[Manual Percussion] button (ON/OFF)
	Manual Percussion Set
	Chord Intelligence
	Chord Hold
	Leading Bass
	Lower Voice [Hold] button (ON/OFF)
	Tempo setting
	Volume of the Rhythm Accompaniment part
	Reverb depth of the Rhythm Accompaniment part
	Volume of the Rhythm drum part
	Reverb depth of the Rhythm drum part
	Volume of the Rhythm bass part
	Reverb depth of the Rhythm bass part

More information about the track assignments when playing commercial SMF music files, please refer to

"Correspondence Between Track Buttons and Track Mute Buttons When Playing Back Commercial SMF Music Files" (p. 171).

During recording, the control track will store the operations as follows.

- Recording panel operations (Voice selections, Tempo changes, etc.) Newly recorded performance data will be added without erasing the previously recorded data.

- Recording expression pedal operations This will depend on the function of the expression pedal. Recording of expression operations will differ depending on the setting for "Exp. Src (Rec)." For details refer to "Changing the Function of the Expression Pedal" (p. 213).

If you wish to erase all the recorded data and record new performance data, use the editing function "Erase" (erase performance data) to erase the data (p. 180).

Displaying the Track Buttons

The track buttons will be displayed in the screen when you record or play back a performance.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

4 4 Transpose C C 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Biggest Band Quick Registration Music Assistant Rhythm System Quick Guide Main

The Rec/Play screen appears. The following buttons are referred to as the track buttons.

Rec/Play NEW SONG Track R A B L U S C Growth Accomp Bass Lower Upper Solo Control Reset Stop Play Rec Bwd Fwd Exit Track/DiglScore 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD VIMA TUNES Registration Main

All accompaniment data is grouped to the "Accomp" track button in the Rec/Play screen. In the same manner, the Rhythm performance data is grouped to "Rhythm." If you want to mute only a portion of the Rhythms or accompaniment, open up the Track Mute screen, and switch off the Track Mute buttons there (p. 172).

Playing Back Performance Songs Stored on USB Memory and SMF Music Files

In addition to playing back the music you recorded on the instrument and saved to a USB memory, ATELIER also lets you enjoy a wide variety of commercially available song files, such as defined below.

SMF Music Files

SMF (Standard MIDI File) is a data format that was created in order to standardize music data formats between manufacturers. Collections of songs in SMF music files are commercially available in a wide range of styles for enjoyment, as accompaniment for practicing musical instruments, and for karaoke.

If you want to purchase SMF music files, you can contact the dealer where you purchased the ATELIER.

To Play Back Only One Song

1. Prepare the song that you want to play back.

If you want to play a song from USB memory, connect it to the External Memory connector.

If you want to play a song from floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert a floppy disk into the drive.

When the performance song loaded from a USB memory is a Standard MIDI File, "Swill be displayed on the Main screen.

3/4 Transpose C ATELIER-SONG SME Rhythm Regist Quick Registration Music Assistant Rhythm System Quick Guide 160 M: PU Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. Press the [Song] button.

graph TD
    A["Composer"] --> B["Song"]
    A --> C["Registration"]
    A --> D["Demo"]
    B --> E["Play/Stop"]
    C --> F["Play/Stop"]
    D --> G["Play/Stop"]
    E --> H["Reset"]
    F --> I["Reset"]
    G --> J["Reset"]

The Song Select screen appears.

Song Select 01:Alfie 02:April in Par 03:Beyond the S 04:Cabaret 05:Caravan Media Ext Memory - + Load File Edit Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. Touch <▶◀> to select the desired media.

If you want to play a song from USB memory, choose "Ext Memory." If you want to play a song from floppy disk, choose "Disk."

4. In the screen, touch < >> > to select the song that you wish to play back.

5. Touch <> ( ) to play back the song.

6. Touch <> () to stop the song.

You can also play back or stop the music files by touching or in the Rec/Play screen. By touching or you can rewind or fast-forward the performance.

Playing Back All Performance Data

1. Prepare the song that you want to play back.

If you want to play a song from USB memory, connect it to the External Memory connector.

If you want to play a song from floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert a floppy disk into the drive.

2. While holding down the [Song] button, press the [Play/Stop] button.

Composer Song Registration Demo Reset/Play/Stop Rec / ■ / ■ ●

All performance data saved on the USB memory or floppy disk will be played consecutively.

3. To stop playback, press the [Play/Stop] button.

Composer Song Registration Demo Rese Play/Stop Rec ▶ / ■ ●

If Internal Memory Contains Performance Data that has not been Saved

If internal memory contains performance data that has not been saved to USB memory or the Favorites (User memory), the message "The song will be erased. OK?" will appear.

If you wish to erase the performance song

1. Touch .

If you don't wish to erase the performance song

1. Touch .

Save the song to USB memory or a floppy disk (p. 182).

Silencing a Specific Track (Track Mute)

When the Rec/Play screen is displayed, the track button will light to indicate a track in which a performance has been recorded. By turning off these track buttons, you can temporarily silence the sound. This is referred to as "Track Mute."

If you want to play back a song from USB memory, connect your USB memory to the External Memory connector before you continue.

If you want to play back a song from floppy disk, connect your floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the floppy disk.

1. Press the [Song] button.

The Song Select screen appears.

Song Select 01:ATELIER-01 02:ATELIER-02 03:ATELIER-03 04:ATELIER-04 05:ATELIER-05 Media Ext Memory - + Load File Edit Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. Touch <> < > to select the desired media.

Choose "Favorites" if you want to play back a song from User memory, choose "Ext Memory" if you want to play back a song from USB memory, or choose "Disk" if you want to play back a song from floppy disk.

3. Touch <><> to select the song that you wish to play back.

4. Touch to load the song.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

Rec/Play ATELIER-01 Track R A B L U S C Rhythm Accomp Bass Lower Upper Solo Control Reset Stop Play Rec Bwd Fwd Exit Track/ DigiScore 130 M: PU Sound/KBD VMA Tunes Registration Main

All accompaniment data is grouped to the "Accomp" track button in the Rec/Play screen. In the same manner, the Rhythm performance data is grouped to "Rhythm."

If you want to mute only a portion of the Rhythms or accompaniment, open up the Track Mute screen, and switch off the Track Mute buttons there (p. 172).

5. Press a track button that is lit, extinguishing the button.

When you play back the performance, track buttons that are not lighted will be muted (silenced).

Rec/Play ATELIER-01 Track R A B L U S C Rhythm Accomp Bass Lowe Upper Solo Control Reset Stop Play Rec Bwd Fwd Exit Track/DigScore 130 M: PU Sound/KBD VMA Tunes Registration Main

6. Press the track button once again (button lights).

The part that had been muted will return to normal and will be heard.

Correspondence Between Track Buttons and Track Mute Buttons When Playing Back Commercial SMF Music Files

Track button	Channel
Rhythm	10
Accomp 5, 6, 7,	8, 9, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16
Bass 2
Lower 3
Upper 4
Solo 1

Correspondence Between Track Buttons and Track Mute Buttons When Playing Back Performance Data Created with an ATELIER

Track button	Track Mute button
Rhythm	10, 11 (Drums/SFX), 13 (Manual Percussion)
Accomp 5, 6, 7	8, 9, 12, 14, 15
Bass 2 (Bass)
Lower 3 (Lower)
Upper 4 (Upper)
Solo 1 (Solo)

Muting Individual Tracks of Performance Data

All accompaniment data is grouped to the "Accomp" track button in the Rec/Play screen. In the same manner, the Rhythm performance data is grouped to "Rhythm."

You can mute only a portion of the Rhythms or accompaniment on the Track Mute screen.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

Rec/Play ATELIER-01 Track R A B L U S C Rhythm Accomp Bass Lower Upper Solo Control Reset Stop Play Rec Bwd Fwd Exit Track/ DigiScore 130 M: PU Sound/KBD VIMA TUNES Registration Main

2. Touch < > a number of times.

The Track Mute screen appears.

Sixteen Track Mute buttons appear in the display. From the left, these are "Track 1, Track 2 ... Track 15, and Track 16."

Rec/Play ATELIER-01 Track Mute Solo Bass Lower Upper Accmp 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Accmp Rhythm Accmp Rhythm Exit Track/ DigitScore Main 130 M: PU Sound/KBD VIMA TUNES Registration Main

3. Touch the screen to select the track that you wish to mute.

Rec/Play ATELIER-01 Track Mute Solo Bass Low upper Accmp 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Accmp Rhythm Accmp Rhythm Exit Track/ DigiScore 130 M: PU Sound/KBD VMA Tunes Registration Main

The button you've touched goes out, indicating the sound is muted.

1. When you touch an unlit track button, the track button lights up, indicating muting of the track is cancelled.

5. Touch .

Track mute will be cancelled if you choose other performance data.

The seven Track buttons in the Rec/Play screen (p. 167) correspond to the sixteen Track Mute buttons of the Track Mute screen as shown below.

Commercial SMF Music Files

Track Mute Button	Track Button
1 (Solo)	Solo
2 (Pedal) Pedal
3 (Lower) Lower
4 (Upper) Upper
5-9, 11-16 (Accmp) Accomp
10 (Rhythm) Rhythm

Performance Data Created on the ATELIER

Track Mute Button	Track Button
1 (Solo)	Solo
2 (Pedal) Pedal
3 (Lower) Lower
4 (Upper) Upper
5-9, 12, 14, 15 (Accmp) Accomp
10 (Rhythm)	Rhythm11 (Drums/SFX)
13 (Manual Percussion)

* The Track Mute button 16 cannot be used with performance data created on an ATELIER.

Viewing a Notation

You can display the notations of performances from SMF music files and recordings made on the ATELIER. This is very convenient when you want to read the music as you play and to confirm recorded songs.

Selecting Songs

There is no need to select the song when displaying notations for performances recorded with the Composer. Start from Step 6.

1. Prepare the USB memory or floppy disk that contains the song for which you want to view the notation.

If you want to view the notation for a song in USB memory, connect your USB memory to the External Memory connector before you continue.

If you want to view the notation for a song in floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert a floppy disk into the drive.

2. Press the [Song] button.

The Song Select screen appears.

Song Select 01:ATELIER-01 02:ATELIER-02 03:ATELIER-03 04:ATELIER-04 05:ATELIER-05 Media Ext Memory - + Load File Edit Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. Touch <▶◀> to-select the desired media.

If you want to view the notation for a song in User memory, select "Favorites."

If you want to view the notation for a song in USB memory, select "Ext Memory."

If you want to view the notation for a song in floppy disk, select "Disk."

4. Touch <> < > to select the song whose notation is to be displayed.

5. Touch .

After the song is loaded, the Rec/Play screen appears.

Displaying Notations

6. Touch on the Rec/Play screen.

The Notation screen appears.

Fur Elise 3/8 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main Exit Lyrics Bass Lower Upper U&L Option

Display	Description
	Enlarge the notation display.
	Display lyrics in the notation.
	Display the Bass part notation.
	Display the Lower part notation.
	Display the Upper part notation.
	Display the Upper part and Lower part notations.
	You can change the part that is displayed, and change the way in which the notation is displayed (p. 174).

Changing the Notation Settings

1. Touch on the Main Screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

Rec/Play Fur Elise Track R A B L U S C Rhythm Accomp Bass Lower Upper Solo Control Reset Stop Play Rec Bwd Fwd Exit Track/ DigiScore 130 M: PU Sound/KBD VMA TUNES Registration Main

2. Touch .

The Notation screen appears.

Fur Elise 3/8 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main Exit Lyrics Bass Lower Upper U&L Option

3. Touch .

The Notation Options screen appears.

Notation Options Pitches C,D,E Clef Upper AUTO Clef Lower AUTO Key AUTO Exit J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

Notation Options P.2/2 Upper Part 4 (Upper) Lower Part 3 (Lower) Bass Part 2 (Bass) Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

4. Touch the value setting for the item whose setting you want to change.

Menu	Setting Description
Pitches	OFF	Not displayed
	C,D,E	Letter names (fixed do) are display in the detailed notation.
	Do,Re,Mi	Solmization syllables (movable do) are displayed in the detailed notation.
Clef Upper	AUTO	Display is switched automatically.
	G Clef	Displayed the G-clef staff of the upper part.
	F Clef	Displayed the F-clef staff of the upper part.
Clef Lower	AUTO	Display is switched automatically.
	G Clef	Displayed the G-clef staff of the lower part.
	F Clef	Displayed the F-clef staff of the lower part.
Key	AUTO	Key is switched automatically.
	Db, Ab, Eb, Bb, F, C, G, D, A, E, B, F#, Bbm, Fm, Cm, Gm, Dm, Am, Em, Bm, F#m, C#m, G#m, D#m	Display the notation in the selected key.
Upper Part	1-16	Select the part to be displayed as the upper part.
Lower Part	1-16	Select the part to be displayed as the lower part.
Bass Part	1-16	Select the part to be displayed as the bass part.

5. Touch <> < > to change the setting.

Notation Options P.2/2 Upper Part 4 (Upper) Lower Part 4 (Upper) Bass Part - Factory + Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main Exit

When you touch the key setting button, the following screen appears.

Notation Options P.1/2 Pitc Db F A # Clef Ab C E # Clef Eb G # B # Key Bb D # F# Exit AUTO Maj/Min Exit Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

Notation Options P.1/2 Pitch Bbm Dm F#m # Cleft Fm Am C#m # Cleft Cm Em # G#m # Key Gm Bm D#m # Exit AUTO Maj/Min Exit Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

The Key screen is composed of two screens. Touch

< >to switch between the two screens.

6. Touch .

Some Notes on a Notation Screen

- When you start playback of music files, the marks appears. While this appears on the notation, the ATELIER is reading data. Please wait until reading of the data is complete.

- In the Notation screen, some lyrics or notes could extend beyond the edges of the screen, and not be displayed.

- The notations that are presented by the display are produced based on the music files. Viewing ease is given priority over precise expression when dealing with complex, high-level music. Because of this, you may find that the notation shown in the display does not match what is provided on commercially available sheet music. The notation display feature is particularly unsuitable for the display of difficult, complex musical works that demand accurate notation. In addition, the display cannot show notes that are briefer than a sixteenth note.

- If you select a part that does not contain performance data, notes will not be displayed in the notation. Use to change the part that is displayed.

- If you use the buttons located below the display to change the displayed part while the song is playing, the song may be played back from the beginning.

Recording a Performance

You can record the performance that you play. You can also record your performance while playing Rhythms or Automatic Accompaniment.

23, 4

1. Select the panel settings needed for recording the performance.
2. Enter the recording standby mode by pressing the [Rec] button.

The [Rec] button indicator will light, and the [Play/Stop] button will blink.

1. Press the [Play/Stop] button to start recording.

When you press the [Play/Stop] button, the metronome will play two measures (bars) of count-in before recording begins.

If you wish to use Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment as you record, press the [Start/Stop] button instead of the

[Play/Stop] button to begin recording. Also, if the [Sync Start] button is lit (i.e., if Sync Start is ON), recording will begin the instant you play the Lower keyboard.

1. Press the [Play/Stop] button when you have completed your recording.

The Track indicator where a performance song is recorded will change from a flashing to a constant light. When you press the [Ending] button (or [Start/Stop] button) while recording a Rhythm performance or Automatic Accompaniment, the Rhythm performance and Automatic Accompaniment will stop. However, the recording itself will continue. Press the [Play/Stop] button to stop recording.

The Play and Stop functions can both be assigned to one of the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal (p. 136).

You can also choose to cancel the metronome count-in before recording starts (p. 221).

Caution

If you press the [Rec] button when a song has been selected from the USB memory or floppy disk, the selected song will be completely loaded into the ATELIER and the Composer will enter into the recording standby mode. To record a new song, use the following procedure.

1. Press the [Rec] button to cancel recording standby.
2. Disconnect the external media.

If you've connected USB memory, disconnect the USB memory from the External Memory connector. If you're using a floppy disk, remove the floppy disk from the disk drive.

1. Delete the performance data (p. 180).

Re-record your performance.

Reset Play/Stop Rec

If the following screen appears

Memory Full Close

When recording was automatically canceled because the memory limit was reached.

Playing Back a Performance Song

Here's how to play back a performance you've recorded.

Composer Song Registration Demo Rese Play/Stop Rec

1. Touch on the Main screen.

4/4 Transpose C C 130 M: 1 Biggest Band Quick Registration Music Assistant Rhythm System Quick Guide Sound/KBD Rec/Play Main

The Rec/Play screen appears.

Rec/Play ATELIER-01 Track R A B L U S C Rhythm Accomp Bass Lower Upper Solo Control Reset Stop Play Rec Bwd Fwd Exit Track/ DigiScore 130 M: PU Sound/KBD VMA Tunes Registration Main

1. Touch .

The location at which playback will start will return to the beginning of measure 1.

If you wish to begin playback from the middle of the song, touch to move to the measure from which you wish to begin playback.

1. Touch to begin playback.

After playback reaches the end of the performance, it will stop automatically.

You can also begin playback by pressing the Composer [Play/Stop] button.

1. To stop playback at any point, touch .

You can also stop playback by pressing the Composer [Play/Stop] button.

The Play and Stop functions can both be assigned to one of the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal (p. 136).

You can specify whether or not the Expression Pedal will affect the playback and what you play while ATELIER music file is being played back (p. 214).

If you load performance data (such as SMF music files) that was not designed for an ATELIER Series instrument and play it back, you may find, when playing Rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment, that the music doesn't sound quite like it should. (For example, the wrong sounds could be played). If you want the data to be played back accurately, first press the [Reset] button prior to playback.

Add a Count Sound to Match the Timing (Count In)

In cases such as when you want to perform in time with a song, you can have a count sound played before playback of the song begins, allowing you to synchronize your own performance with the song.

Playing back a song after playing the count sound is called "Count In."

1. Hold down the [Reset] button and press the [Play/Stop] button.

The metronome will play two measures (bars) of count-in before recording begins.

Recording Each Part Separately

In this method, each part (track button) is recorded one after another: first the Rhythm part, then the bass part, etc. If there are any previously recorded performances, you can listen to them as you record additional parts.

1. Select the panel settings needed for recording the performance.

2. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

Rec/Play NEW SONG Track R A B L U S C Rhythm Accomp Bass Lower Upper Solo Control Reset Stop Play Rec Bwd Fwd Exit Track/DiglScore 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD VMA Tunes Registration Main

1. Touch and to select the desired measure (bar) when you start recording.

If you wish to start recording from the beginning of the song, touch .

1. In the Rec/Play screen, touch to enter recording-standby mode.

and the unrecorded track buttons in the screen will blink. The track buttons that are already recorded will light.

blink Rec/Play NEW SONG Track R A B L U S C Rhythm Accomp Bass Lower Solo Control Reset Stop Play Rec Bwd Fwd Exit Track/ DigiScore Main 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD VMA TUNES Registration Main

Also, the [Rec] button indicator will light, and the [Play/Stop] button will blink.

You can also enter recording-standby mode by pressing the [Rec] button.

1. In the Rec/Play screen, touch to begin recording.

When you touch in the Rec/Play screen, the metronome will sound a two-measure count, and then recording will begin.

As you listen to the performance song previously recorded, record the Part into a new Track.

You can also start recording by pressing the Composer [Play/Stop] button.

1. In the Rec/Play screen, touch to stop recording.

The track button for which performance data has been recorded will be lit.

You can also stop recording by pressing the Composer [Play/Stop] button.

1. Repeat steps 3–6 to record each part.

Re-Recording

If you made a mistake in your performance during recording etc., you can re-record just a portion of the musical data in the track.

If you wish to re-record with different settings for voices, tempo, part balance, erase the recorded song (p. 180) and re-record again. If the Control track still contains data from before you re-recorded, the volume or sounds may change during playback.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

Rec/Play ATELIER-01 Track R A B L U S C Rhythm Accomp Bass Lower Upper Solo Control Reset Stop Play Rec Bwd Fwd Exit Track/ DigiScore 130 M: PU Sound/KBD VMA TUNES Registration Main

2. Touch and to select the desired measure (bar) when you start recording.

If you wish to start recording from the beginning of the song, touch .

3. In the Rec/Play screen, touch to enter recording-standby mode.

and the unrecorded track buttons in the screen will blink. The button indicators of tracks that are already recorded will light.

blinklit Rec/Play ATELIER-01 Track R A B L U S C Rhythm Accomp Bass Loa Solo Control Reset Stop Play Rec Bwd Fwd Exit Track/DigScore 130 M: PU Sound/KBD VIMA TUNES Registration Main

Also, the [Rec] button indicator will light, and the [Play/Stop] button will blink.

You can also enter recording-standby mode by pressing the [Rec] button.

4. Touch the Track button which you wish to re-recording (button flashes).

The song data of the specified Track (with the exception of the Control Track) will be erased as new song data is recorded.

When the Track button is lit constantly, no song data has been recorded on that Track.

5. In the Rec/Play screen, touch to begin recording.

The metronome will sound a two-measure count, and then recording will begin.

You can also start recording by pressing the [Play/Stop] button.

6. In the Rec/Play screen, touch to stop recording.

The track buttons which were re-recorded will change from flashing to being constantly lit.

You can also stop recording by pressing the [Play/Stop] button.

If you wish to keep the existing Expression Pedal data, and record only the panel operations, you can make settings to prevent the operation of the Expression Pedal from being recorded (p. 213).

You can use punch-in recording (p. 187) to re-record only the area that you specify.

Erasing a Performance Song (Song Clear)

If you wish to discard your recording and re-record from the beginning, or if you wish to record a new performance, you must erase the previously-recorded data.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

Rec/Play ATELIER-01 Track R A B L U S C Rhythm Accomp Bass Lower Upper Solo Control Reset Stop Play Rec Bwd Fwd Exit Track/ DigiScore 130 M: PU Sound/KBD VMA TUNES Registration Main

2. Touch < (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

Song Select Punch In/Out Song Clear Loop Rec Save/Delete Options Edit Exit Track/ DigiScore 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. Touch .

The following message, asking you to confirm your choice, will be displayed.

Clear Song OK? Cancel OK

If you touch , the performance data will not be erased, and you will return to the Rec/Play screen.

4. If you touch , the performance data will be erased.

You can also use the following method to open the Song Clear screen.

1. Touch on the Main screen to display the Quick Guide screen.
2. Press the [Song] button. The Song Clear screen appears.

Changing the Name of a Performance Song (Rename)

A name is automatically assigned to a performance song that you record. However, at some point you may wish to change the name to something more meaningful.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

Rec/Play ATELIER-01 Track R A B L U S C Rhythm Accomp Bass Lower Upper Solo Control Reset Stop Play Rec Bwd Fwd Exit Track/DiglScore 130 M: PU Sound/KBD VIMA TINES Registration Main

2. Touch < > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

Song Select Punch In/Out Song Clear Loop Rec Save/Delete Options Edit Exit Track/ DigiScore=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. Touch .

The Song Save/Song Delete screen appears.

Song Save / Song Delete Internal ATELIER-05 Media Favorites 02:ATELIER-02 03:ATELIER-03 04:ATELIER-04 05:---- Exit Save Delete File J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

4. Touch < (Utility) to open the Utility screen.

The Utility screen appears.

Song Save / Song Delete Internal ATELIER-05 Media Favorites Rename Format Exit Exit File 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

5. Touch .

The Rename screen appears.

ATEL IER-05 ABC/abc/1#% A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Del Space Cancel ← → OK Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

6. Touch the character select button (ABC/abc/1#% to switch among uppercase/lowercase/symbols.

Touch the character select button repeatedly to cycle through the available choices, like this: uppercase → lowercase → symbols → uppercase...

7. Touch the screen to specify the desired character.

The following characters can be selected.

Uppercase	A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Lowercase	a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z
Symbols	! " # % & ' () * + , - . / : = ? ^ _ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
	Delete a character.
	Insert a space.
	Move the cursor (the symbol that indicates the location at which characters will be input) to left or right.

To cancel operation, touch .

8. When you're done making the settings, touch .

The new name is now inserted.

Song Save / Song Delete Internal MY SONG Media Favorites 02:ATELIER-02 03:ATELIER-03 04:ATELIER-04 05:---- Exit Save Delete File 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

You cannot directly change or edit the name of a performance song stored on a USB memory or floppy disk. The song must first be loaded (p. 183) into the instrument, edited, and then saved to USB memory or floppy disk again.

You can also access the Rename screen as follows.

1. Touch < Utility) on the Rec/Play screen.

The Utility screen appears.

1. In the Utility screen, touch .

The Edit Menu screen appears.

1. Touch on the Edit Menu screen.

The Rename screen appears.

Saving Performance Songs

The performance data that you recorded will disappear when the power of the ATELIER is turned off. If you wish to keep the performance data, you can save it on a USB memory, floppy disk, or "Favorites" (User memory).

If the recorded performance data has not been saved, the display will show the " symbol. This symbol will disappear when you save the performance data.

1. Prepare to save the performance song.

If you want to save performance song to a USB memory, connect the USB memory to the External Memory connector.

If you want to save performance song to a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector. Into the floppy disk drive, insert a floppy disk that was formatted by the ATELIER.

2. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

Rec/Play ATELIER-05 Track R A B L U S C Rhythm Accomp Bass Lower Upper Solo Control Reset Stop Play Rec Bwd Fwd Exit Track/ DigiScore Main 130 M: PU Sound/KBD VMA TINES Registration Main

3. Touch < > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

Song Select Punch In/Out Song Clear Loop Rec Save/Delete Options Edit Exit Track/ DigitalScore=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

4. Touch .

The Song Save/Song Delete screen appears.

Song Save / Song Delete Internal ATELIER-05 Media Favorites 02:ATELIER-02 03:ATELIER-03 04:ATELIER-04 05:---- Save Delete Exit File 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

5. Touch < >> < > to select the save-destination media.

Select "Ext Memory" to save the data in USB memory, select "Disk" to save it on a floppy disk, or "Favorites" to save it in User memory.

6. Touch < >> > to select the number of the save destination.

If the save destination contains no data, the screen will indicate “—”.

Song Save / Song Delete Internal ATELIER-05 Media Favorites 02:ATELIER-02 03:ATELIER-03 04:ATELIER-04 05:---- Save Delete File Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

To cancel the Save operation, touch to close the Song Save/Song Delete screen.

7. Touch .

The Save Format screen appears.

Save Format Original SMF Cancel OK 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

8. Touch the screen to select the format in which the data will be saved.

You can select either "Original" or "SMF" format.

Display	Description
Original	Save data in ATELIER format
SMF	Saving in SMF Format for ATELIER Sound Modules

9. Touch to finalize the save format.

Saving of the performance data will begin.

Performance data saved by the ATELIER cannot be played back properly by the sound generator of an instrument that is not a member of the ATELIER series.

Saving performance data in SMF format (SMF) requires a longer time than saving it in ATELIER format (Original).

If the Following Screen Appears

If you select a number at which a performance data has already been saved and touch , the following screen appears.

Overwrite Song OK? Cancel OK

If you wish to update the contents of the performance data

1. Touch .

If you want to save your performance as new data without overwriting the existing data

1. Touch to stop the Save operation.
2. In the Song Save/Song Delete screen, select the number that is displayed as “----” (a number that currently does not contain performance data).
3. Touch .

When saving is complete, the saved performance name will be displayed.

Loading Performance Songs Into the ATELIER

To edit (p. 192) or re-record a performance song that is stored on a USB memory or floppy disk, you must first load that song into the instrument.

1. Prepare the performance song.

If you want to load performance song to a USB memory, connect the USB memory to the External Memory connector.

If you want to load performance song to a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector. Into the floppy disk drive, insert a floppy disk that was formatted by the ATELIER.

2. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

3. Touch < > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

4. Touch .

The Song Select screen appears.

Song Select 01:ATELIER-01 02:ATELIER-02 03:ATELIER-03 04:ATELIER-04 05:ATELIER-05 Media Favorites - + Load File Edit Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

5. Touch <> < > to select the desired media.

If you want to load a song from USB memory, choose "Ext Memory." If you want to load a song from floppy disk, choose "Disk."

6. Touch < > to select the performance song that you wish to load into internal memory.

7. Touch .

Song Select 01:ATELIER-01 02:ATELIER-02 03:ATELIER-03 04:ATELIER-04 05:ATELIER-05 Media Favorites Load File Edit Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

The selected performance data will be loaded into internal memory.

If the Following Screen Appears

The message below is shown when the performance song in the unit has not been saved to USB memory or Favorites (User memory).

Clear Song OK? Cancel OK

If you wish to erase the performance song

1. Touch .

If you don't wish to erase the performance song

1. Touch .

Save the song to USB memory or a floppy disk (p. 182). If loading is canceled because the memory limit has been reached, the following message will be displayed:

Memory Full Close

Deleting Performance Songs Stored on "Favorites" or the USB Memory

You can delete a performance song that was saved onto a "Favorites," USB memory, or floppy disk.

If you want to delete a song in USB memory, connect your USB memory to the External Memory connector before you continue.

If you want to delete a song in floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert a floppy disk into the drive.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

1. Touch < > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Song Save/Song Delete screen appears.

Song Save / Song Delete Internal ATELIER-05 Media Favorites 01:ATELIER-01 02:ATELIER-02 03:ATELIER-03 04:ATELIER-04 Save Delete File Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch <><> to select the desired media.

If you want to delete a song from the User memory, choose "Favorites."

If you want to delete a song from USB memory, choose "Ext Memory." If you want to delete a song from floppy disk, choose "Disk."

1. Touch <> < > to select the performance data that you wish to delete.

6. Touch .

The confirmation message appears.

Delete Song OK? Cancel OK

If you touch the performance data will not be deleted, and you will return to the Rec/Play screen.

7. When you touch the performance data will be deleted.

Layering a New Recording onto SMF Music Files

You can load commercially available SMF music files into the ATELIER, and record your own performance on top of it. During recording, the data you've loaded will be played back, while you record your performance.

1. Prepare the SMF music files.

If you're using SMF music files from USB memory, connect it to the External Memory connector.

If you're using SMF music files from a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the floppy disk.

2. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

3. Touch < > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

4. Touch .

The Song Select screen appears.

Song Select 01:ATELIER-01 02:ATELIER-02 03:ATELIER-03 04:ATELIER-04 05:ATELIER-05 Media Favorites - + Load - File Edit Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

5. Touch < >> < > to-select the desired media.

If you want to play SMF music files from the User memory, choose "Favorites." If you want to play SMF music files from USB memory, choose "Ext Memory." If you want to play SMF music files from floppy disk, choose "Disk."

6. Touch <><> to select the SMF music files that you wish to load into internal memory.

7. Touch .

Song Select 01:ATELIER-01 02:ATELIER-02 03:ATELIER-03 04:ATELIER-04 05:ATELIER-05 Media Favorites Load File Edit Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

The selected performance data will be loaded into internal memory.

For track assignments of SMF format performance data loaded to the ATELIER, refer to p. 171.

1. Select the panel settings needed for recording the performance.
2. Touch and to move to the desired measure (bar) at which you wish to begin recording.
3. In the Rec/Play screen, touch to enter recording-standby mode.

and unrecorded track buttons in the screen will blink. The button indicators of tracks that are already recorded will light.

Also, the panel [Rec] button indicator will light, and the [Play/Stop] button will blink.

You can also enter recording-standby mode by pressing the [Rec] button.

1. Touch the Track button which you wish to recording (button flashes).
2. In the Rec/Play screen, touch to begin recording.

As you record, the music file that was loaded into the ATELIER will play back.

1. In the Rec/Play screen, touch to stop recording.

The track button for which performance data has been recorded will be lit.

You can also start and stop recording by pressing the [Play/Stop] button.

The performance data you recorded can be saved on a USB memory, "Favorites," or floppy disk (p. 182).

Commercially sold music files can also be loaded into the ATELIER, but for reasons of copyright protection, cannot be saved in SMF format.

Using Song with a Different Tempo Than That of the Performance Song

1. Prepare the performance data whose tempo you want to change.

If you're using performance data from USB memory, connect it to the External Memory connector.

If you're using performance data from a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the floppy disk.

1. Load the performance data into the unit (p. 183).
2. Determine the tempo with the Tempo [ ] buttons.
3. Hold down the panel [Reset] button and press the [Rec] button.

The tempo of the performance data will change.

You cannot carry out this operation with and in the Rec/Play screen.

Re-Recording Part of Your Performance (Punch-in Recording)

After you have recorded a performance, you can re-record a specified portion of the performance.

With this method, you listen to the recorded performance, and re-record just the desired area. This recording method is called "Punch-in Recording."

To Specify the Segment to be Recorded Over Again

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

2. Touch < (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

3. Touch . The Punch In/Out screen appears.

graph TD
    A["From"] --> B["1"]
    C["For"] --> D["1"]
    B --> E["Red Block"]
    D --> E
    E --> F["Exit"]
    E --> G["Rec"]

1. Touch the "From" value (the measure at which recording will begin).

Punch In Fr 1 Factory + Exit Exit Rec -130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch <▶◀> td-specify "From" (the measure at which recording will begin).

2. Touch .

3. Touch the "For" value (the number of measures that will be re-recorded).

4. Touch < >> <> to set "For" (the number of measures that will be re-recorded).

5. Touch .

6. Touch .

The Rec/Play screen appears, and the unit is placed in recording standby.

To Record While Listening to the Song

1. Press the Track button which you wish to re-record (indicator flashes).

2. Touch to begin recording.

When you touch , the metronome will play two measures (bars) of count-in before recording begins. When you reach the first measure of the specified area, recording will begin. When the specified area ends, recording will end, and playback will resume.

While the song is playing back or recording, the [Rec] button's indicator will be lit as follows.

[Rec] button's indicator	Description
Flash	While the performance is playing back
Light constantly	While you are re-recording

When recording has ended for the specified area and the data is once again playing back, the [Rec] button's indicator will resume flashing.

1. Touch to stop the recording.

The indicator of the track button which recorded the performance will light.

Recording and Layering Drum Parts (Loop Recording)

You can repeatedly record over a specified region of the Rhythm part, adding additional notes at each pass. This type of recording is called "Loop Recording."

This recording method is convenient when you wish to layer drum sounds individually for the Rhythm part.

"Loop Recording" can be used only when recording the Rhythm part.

1. Press the [Drums/SFX] button or the [Manual Perc] button to select a Drum Set or Sound Effect Set (p. 78–p. 81).

2. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

3. Touch and on the Rec/Play screen, move to the measure where you wish to start Loop Recording.

4. Touch < (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

Song Select Punch In/Out Song Clear Loop Rec Save/Delete Options Edit Exit Track/ DigiScore Main Rhythm Acc Reset S J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Exit

1. Touch . The Loop Rec screen appears.

Loop Rec For 1 Exit Rec 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch the "For" value (the number of measures that will be recorded repeatedly).

Loop Rec 1 Factory + Exit Exit Rec 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

To cancel operation, touch .

1. Touch < >> to specify the "For" value (the number of measures that will be recorded repeatedly).

2. Touch .

3. Touch .

The Rec/Play screen appears, and the unit is placed in recording standby.

1. Touch to begin recording.

When you touch , the metronome will play two measures (bars) of count-in before recording begins. You can record repeatedly over the specified range of measures, adding additional notes at each pass.

1. Touch to stop playback.

The indicator of the Rhythm track button which recorded the performance will light.

Starting Recording at the Right Moment (Count-In Recording)

This setting (ON/OFF) determines whether or not a metronome count-in (2 measures) will be heard after pressing the [Play/Stop] button on recording.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

Rec/Play NEW SONG Track R A B L U S C Rhythm Accomp Bass Lower Upper Solo Control Reset Stop Play Rec Bwd Fwd Exit Track/ DigiScore 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD VMA TUNES Registration Main

2. Touch < (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

Song Select Punch In/Out Song Clear Loop Rec Save/Delete Options Edit Exit Track/ DigiScore=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. Touch .

Rec/Play Options P.1/3 Lyrics ON Playback Transpose 0 Count-in Rec ON Metronome OFF Exit

4. Touch <> <> to display the Count-In Rec.

5. Touch the Count-In Rec setting (ON/OFF) to switch it between "ON/OFF."

Each time you touch the Count-In Rec setting, it will alternate between ON/OFF.

Setting	Description
ON	A two-measure count will sound before recording
OFF	No count will sound before recording

6. Touch .

Copying Performance Song

Performance songs and SMF music files from USB memory or floppy disk can be copied to "Favorites" (User memory).

If a performance song saved in USB memory or on a floppy disk is stored in "Favorites," the stored performance song will not disappear even when you turn off the power. It is convenient to load frequently-used performance song into "Favorites."

Performance songs saved in "Favorites" can also be copied to USB memory or floppy disk.

Copying Performance Songs from USB Memory to "Favorites"

1. Connecting the USB memory to the External Memory connector.

2. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

1. Touch < (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Song Select screen appears.

Song Select 01:ATELIER-01 02:ATELIER-02 03:ATELIER-03 04:ATELIER-04 05:ATELIER-05 Media Favorites - + Load File Edit Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch .

The Song File Edit screen appears.

Song File Edit 01:ATELIER-01 02:ATELIER-02 03:ATELIER-03 04:ATELIER-04 05:ATELIER-05 Exit Favorites Delete Create Copy 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch (Song Copy).

The following screen appears.

Song File Copy 01:MY SONG 1 Media Ext Memory Favorites: 02:---- Exit Execute 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch <▶◀> to select the media (the location of the performance song you want to copy).

If you want to copy a performance song from USB memory, select "Ext Memory."

If you want to copy a performance song from floppy disk, select "Disk."

1. Touch <> to select the performance song you want to copy.

If you choose , all performance data stored in the currently selected folder of the USB memory or floppy disk will be copied in a single operation.

1. Touch Favorites < > < > to select the copy-destination number.

Numbers for which a song name is shown already have a song saved to them.

1. Touch .

The copying of the song to "Favorites" begins. When copying ends, the "----" in the screen will change to the song name that you copied.

If you select a number in which a song is already saved, a screen like the following will appear.

Clear Song OK? Cancel OK

If you want to delete the previously saved song and overwrite it with the song you're newly saving, touch .

If you don't want to delete the previously saved song, touch , then select a number at which no song has been saved, and copy the song to that number.

Copying Performance Songs from "Favorites" to USB Memory

You can copy performance song from "Favorites" to USB memory.

In this case, touch the arrow icon located in the center of the "Song File Copy screen" in step 6 of the above procedure, so the arrow points upwards. In this state, you'll be copying performance song from "Favorites" to USB memory.

Song File Copy 05:---- Media Ext Memory Favorites: 01:ATELIER-01 Exit Execute 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

The rest of the procedure is the same as when copying performance song from USB memory to "Favorites."

Editing Your Musical Performance Data

Song files that you record can be edited using five different functions.

The following editing functions are provided.

Menu	Description Page
Delete Measure	Deleting a Specific Measure.	p. 192
Delete Track	Delete the Recording from a Track.	p. 193
Erase Event	Erase a specified portion of the performance in a specified area.	p. 195
Copy	Copying Measures.	p. 197
Quantize	Correct Timing Inaccuracies.	p. 198
Rename	Change the name of the performance data.	p. 180

NOTE

Once you edit data, it cannot be restored to its original condition. As a precaution against accidents, we recommend that you save your song to a USB memory before you edit it (p. 182).

Deleting a Specific Measure (Delete Measure)

You can delete a portion of the performance data. This function lets you delete specified measures (bars) of the song from all tracks. When any part of the song file is deleted, subsequent recording will be moved forward to fill the gap. Example: To delete measures (bars) 5–8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ↓ 1 2 3 4 5 6

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

Rec/Play ATELIER-01 Track R A B L U S C Rhythm Accomp Bass Lower Upper Solo Control Reset Stop Play Rec Bwd Fwd Exit Track/ DigiScore 130 M: PU Sound/KBD VIMA TUNES Registration Main

1. In the Rec/Play screen, touch < Utility) to open the Utility screen.

Song Select Punch In/Out Song Clear Loop Rec Save/Delete Options Edit Exit Track/ DigiScore 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. In the Utility screen, touch .

The Edit Menu screen appears.

Edit Menu Delete Measure Delete Track Erase Event Copy Quantize Rename Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

4. Touch .

Edit Menu Delete Measure Delete Track Erase Event Copy Quantize Rename Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

The Delete Measure screen appears.

graph TD
    A["From 1"] --> B{ }
    C["For 1"] --> B
    B --> D["Red Box"]
    D --> E["Exit"]
    F["Execute"] --> G["Main"]

1. Touch the "From" value (the first measure that you wish to delete).

2. Touch < >> to set "From" (the first measure that you wish to delete).

Delete Measure 1 - + Exit Exit Execute 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. When you're done making the settings, touch .

2. Touch the "For" value (the number of measures that you wish to delete).

3. Touch < >> > to set "For" (the number of measures that you wish to delete).

To delete to the last measure, select "ALL."

1. When you're done making the settings, touch .

2. Touch .

The following display appears.

Delete Measure OK? Cancel OK

To cancel operation, touch .

1. Touch to delete the measures.

When deletion has been completed, you are returned to the Delete Measure screen.

Delete the Recording from a Track (Delete Track)

The ATELIER has seven tracks. This function lets you delete the recording from a track that you specify.

For more on the content stored on each track, refer to p.167.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

Rec/Play ATELIER-01 Track R A B L U S C Rhythm Accomp Bass Lower Upper Solo Control Reset Stop Play Rec Bwd Fwd Exit Track/ DigiScore 130 M: PU Sound/KBD VIMA TINES Registration Main

1. In the Rec/Play screen, touch < Utility) to open the Utility screen.

Song Select Punch In/Out Song Clear Loop Rec Save/Delete Options Edit Exit Track/ DigiScore 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. In the Utility screen, touch .

The Edit Menu screen appears.

Edit Menu Delete Measure Delete Track Erase Event Copy Quantize Rename Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

4. Touch .

Edit Menu Delete Measure Delete Track Erase Event Copy Quantize Rename Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

The Delete Track (delete the performance data of a track) screen appears.

Delete Track Track RHYTHM Exit Execute 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch the "Track" value (the track whose performance data you wish to delete).
2. Touch <▶◀> to select the "Track" (the track whose performance data you wish to delete).

Delete Track Trac RHYTHM - + Exit Exit Execute J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

Setting

RHYTHM, ACCOMP, BASS, LOWER, UPPER, SOLO, CONTROL

1. When you're done making the settings, touch .

8. Touch .

The following display appears.

Delete Track OK? Cancel OK

To cancel operation, touch .

9. Touch to delete the performance data.

When the recording has been deleted, the Delete Track screen will reappear.

Erase Recording (Erase Event)

You can erase a specified portion of the performance in a specified area without making the song shorter. This is called the "Erase" function.

As an alternative to the method of erasing all performance data in a specified area, you can erase the following contents of the performance.

Setting	Description
ALL	All recording
NOTE	Notes played on the keyboard
PANEL	Panel operations,Content Saved to the Control Track(Information Other than Expression,Voice, and Tempo Data)→ Refer to p. 167.
EXPRESSION	Expression pedal recording
VOICE	Voice settings
TEMPO	Tempo setting

Example: Erasing measures (bars) 5–8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ↓ 1 2 3 4 : 9 blank measures

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

Rec/Play ATELIER-01 Track R A B L U S C Rhythm Accomp Bass Lower Upper Solo Control Reset Stop Play Rec Bwd Fwd Exit Track/ DigiScore Main 130 M: PU Sound/KBD VMA Tines Registration Main

1. In the Rec/Play screen, touch < Utility) to open the Utility screen.

Song Select Punch In/Out Song Clear Loop Rec Save/Delete Options Edit Exit Track/ DigiScore=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. In the Utility screen, touch .

The Edit Menu screen appears.

Edit Menu Delete Measure Delete Track Erase Event Copy Quantize Rename Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch .

Edit Menu Delete Measure Delete Track Erase Event Copy Quantize Rename Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

The Erase Event screen appears.

graph TD
    A["Track"] --> B["ALL"]
    C["Event"] --> D["ALL"]
    B --> E["Processing Step"]
    D --> E
    E --> F["Exit"]
    G["For"] --> H["1"]
    I["From"] --> J["1"]
    K["For"] --> L["1"]
    M["Start"] --> N["130"]
    O["Main"] --> P["1"]
    Q["Execute"] --> R["130"]

1. Touch the "Event" value (the type of performance data that you wish to erase).
2. Touch < >> <> to specify the "Event" (the type of performance data that you wish to erase).

Erase Event |From 1 |For 1 Track ALL Event Exit Exit Execute 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

Setting

ALL, NOTE, PANEL, EXPRESSION, VOICE, TEMPO

1. When you're done making the settings, touch .
2. Touch the "Track" value (the track from which data will be erased).
3. Touch < >> < > to specify the "Track" (the track from which data will be erased).

If you have selected EXPRESSION, VOICE and TEMPO as the type of recording to be erased, you need not specify the track.

Track

ALL, RHYTHM, ACCOMP, BASS, LOWER, UPPER, SOLO, CONTROL

If you select "ALL," the recording will be erased from all parts.

1. When you're done making the settings, touch .
2. Touch the "From" value (the measure at which erasure will begin).
3. Touch < >> < > to set "From" (the measure at which erasure will begin).

4. When you're done making the settings, touch .

5. Touch the "For" value (the number of measures from which the data will be erased).

6. Touch <><> to set "For" (the number of measures from which the data will be erased).

If you wish to erase to the last measure (bar), set "for: ALL."

1. When you're done making the settings, touch .
2. Touch .

The following display appears.

Erase Event OK? Cancel OK

To cancel operation, touch .

1. Touch to erase the performance data.

Once the performance data has been erased, you are returned to the Erase Event screen.

Copying Measures (Copy)

This function lets you copy a portion of recorded song to a different measure (bar) location in the same track. If a recording already exists at the copy destination, it will be erased.

Example: To copy measures (bars) 5–7 to measure (bar) 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ↓ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

Rec/Play ATELIER-01 Track R A B L U S C Rhythm Accomp Bass Lower Upper Solo Control Reset Stop Play Rec Bwd Fwd Exit Track/ DigitScore 130 M: PU Sound/KBD VMA TUNES Registration Main

2. In the Rec/Play screen, touch < Utility) to open the Utility screen.

Song Select Punch In/Out Song Clear Loop Rec Save/Delete Options Edit Exit Track/ DigiScore 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. In the Utility screen, touch .

The Edit Menu screen appears.

Edit Menu Delete Measure Delete Track Erase Event Copy Quantize Rename Exit J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

4. Touch .

Edit Menu Delete Measure Delete Track Erase Event Copy Quantize Rename Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

The Copy screen appears.

graph TD
    A["Track"] --> B["ALL"]
    B --> C["To"]
    C --> D["Times"]
    D --> E["1"]
    E --> F["For"]
    F --> G["1"]
    G --> H["1"]
    H --> I["130"]

5. Touch the "Track" value (the track to be copied).

6. Touch < >> <> to-set "Track" (the track to be copied).

Copy From 1 For 1 Track ALL - + Exit 1 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main Exit Execute

Track

ALL, RHYTHM, ACCOMP, BASS, LOWER, UPPER, SOLO, CONTROL

If you select "ALL," the recording in all the tracks will be copied.

7. When you're done making the settings, touch .

8. Touch the "From" value (the measure at which copying will begin).

1. Touch <><> to set "From" (the measure at which copying will begin).
2. When you're done making the settings, touch .
3. Touch the "For" value (the number of measures to be copied).
4. Touch < >> to set "For" (the number of measures to be copied).

If you want to specify all of the data up to the final measure, select "ALL."

1. When you're done making the settings, touch .
2. Touch the "To" value (the copy-destination measure number).
3. Touch < >> to set "To" (the copy-destination measure number).

If you select "END," the data will be copied following the end of the last measure.

1. When you're done making the settings, touch .
2. Touch the "Time" value (the number of times that the data will be copied).
3. Touch <> < > to set "Time" (the number of times that the data will be copied).
4. When you're done making the settings, touch .
5. Touch .

The following display appears.

Copy OK? Cancel OK

To cancel operation, touch .

1. Touch to copy the measures.

Once the measures have been copied, you are returned to the Copy screen.

Correct Timing Inaccuracies (Quantize)

You can correct for timing discrepancies in a recorded performance by having the music be aligned with a timing you specify. This is called "Quantizing."

For example even if you intend to play at quarter-note timing, the notes may be slightly earlier or later than precise quarter-note intervals. In this case, if you quantize at quarter-note timing, you can correctly match the Rhythms.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

Rec/Play ATELIER-01 Track R A B L U S C Rhythm Accomp Bass Lower Upper Solo Control Reset Stop Play Rec Bwd Fwd Exit Track/ DigiScore Main 130 M: PU Sound/KBD VIMA TINES Registration Main

1. In the Rec/Play screen, touch < (Utility) to open the Utility screen.

Song Select Punch In/Out Song Clear Loop Rec Save/Delete Options Edit Exit Track/ DigiScore 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. In the Utility screen, touch .

The Edit Menu screen appears.

Edit Menu Delete Measure Delete Track Erase Event Copy Quantize Rename Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

4. Touch .

Edit Menu Delete Measure Delete Track Erase Event Copy Quantize Rename Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

The Quantize screen appears.

graph TD
    A["Track"] --> B["ALL"]
    B --> C["Resolution"]
    C --> D["Exit"]
    E["For"] --> F["1"]
    G["From"] --> H["1"]
    I["For"] --> J["1"]
    K["Execution"] --> L["Main"]

1. Touch the "Track" value (the track that will be quantized).
2. Touch <><> to specify the "Track" (the track that will be quantized).

Quantize |From 1 |For 1 Track ALL - + Exit Execute M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

Track

ALL, RHYTHM, ACCOMP, BASS, LOWER, UPPER, SOLO

If you select "ALL," the recording in all the tracks will be quantized.

1. When you're done making the settings, touch .
2. Touch the "From" value (the measure at which quantization will begin).

3. Touch <▶◀> to set "From" (the measure at which quantization will begin).

4. When you're done making the settings, touch .

5. Touch the "For" value (the number of measures that will be quantized).
6. Touch < >> > to set "For" (the number of measures that will be quantized).

To specify everything through to the last measure, set "for: ALL."

1. When you're done making the settings, touch .
2. Touch the "Resolution" value (the resolution at which notes will be aligned).
3. Touch the screen to set "Resolution" (the resolution at which notes will be aligned).

The "Resolution" (the timing to which notes are aligned) can be set to one of the following settings.

Quarter note Quarter note tripletHalf note 8th note 8th note triplet 16th note 16 note triplet 32th note

1. When you're done making the settings, touch .
2. Touch .

The following display appears.

Quantize OK? Cancel OK

To cancel operation, touch .

1. Touch to have the quantization carried out.

When the quantizing is finished, you are returned to the Quantize screen.

Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms

You can create a Rhythm for use when Rhythm Mode is set to "S-SERIES" (p. 217).

An original Rhythm of your own is created by starting with one of the internal Rhythms, then modifying it. You can edit some of the internal Rhythms to create your own original Rhythms. These original Rhythms are called "User Rhythms." This function is called "Rhythm Customize."

Process for Creating User Rhythms

Preparations for Creating User Rhythms

graph TD
    A["Open the Rhythm Customize screen"] --> B["Select the division"]
    B --> C["Load the source Rhythm"]
    C --> D["Make the division settings"]
    D --> E["Creating the User Rhythm"]
    E --> F["Edit the Rhythm"]
    F --> G["Change the percussion"]
    G --> H["Saving the User Rhythm"]
    H --> I["Changing the name of a User Rhythm"]
    I --> J["Save the User Rhythm to the User memory or USB memory"]
    J --> K["Change the Rhythm tempo"]
    K --> L["Copying the User Rhythm"]
    L --> M["• Copy User Rhythm on USB memory to the User Memory\n• Copy User Rhythm on User Memory to the USB memory"]

Preparations for Creating User Rhythms

Displaying the Rhythm Customize Screen

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rhythm screen appears.

Rhythm P.1/5 Biggest Band Breezy Swing BigAppleBand MidniteSISwg BennysBigBnd Orch.Swing JimmysGroove Cool Swing Exit J 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. In the Rhythm screen, touch < > Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

File Edit Options Customize Exit Biggest BigAppl Bennys Jimmys P.1/5 M: 1 Svcs/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. Touch .

The Rhythm Customize screen appears.

When opening a new Rhythm Customize screen

Rhythm Customize UserRhythm 1 4/4 Original 1: 1: 0 6 7 8 9 Del Copy Exit J = 120 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

When calling up a source

Rhythm Customize Biggest Band 4/4 Original 1:1:0 Ride Cym 2 Std Pedal HH Std BD 2 9 Exit Del Copy 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1	Rhythm Name
2 Beat
3 Division Name (p. 202)
4	buttonSwitches the page when the Rhythm pattern is displayed over multiple pages.
5	(Zoom Out/Zoom In) buttonExpands (zooms in) and reduces (zooms out) the Rhythm pattern display.
6 Curl cation (Measure: Beat: Tick)
7	Instrument NameIndicates the name of the instrument used in the Rhythm.
8	n Pattern DisplayDisplays the notes in the selected Rhythm pattern.
9	(Utility) buttonDisplays the menu with settings for the Rhythm Customize function.
10	(Preview) buttonAllows you to listen to the created Rhythm.
11	(Delete) buttonDeletes the Rhythm in the displayed measure.
12	(Copy) buttonCopies the Rhythm in the displayed measure and adds it to the end of that measure.
13	buttonWhen more than eight different instruments are used in a Rhythm, press these buttons to switch through the bent names.
14	Scroll BarThis indicates the position of the current measure in erall Rhythm.

Selecting the Division

What is the Division?

A song progresses in predictable a sequence, such as intro, melody A, melody B, bridge and ending.

With the ATELIER, such changes in songs are allocated to the following six performance states. We call these six parts of a song "Divisions."

Division	Performance division
Intro	The intro is played at the start of a song.
Original This	is a basic accompaniment pattern.
Fill In To Variation	This is a phrase inserted at a juncture where the mood changes.It is used to make a song more lively.After the phrase is played, the variation's accompaniment pattern is played.
Variation	This is a developmental accompaniment pattern. It is a variation on an Original.
Fill In To Original	This is a phrase inserted at a juncture where the mood changes.It is used to make a song more sedate.After the phrase is played, the original's accompaniment pattern is played.
Ending This is	played at the end of a song.

You can make a song more lively or more restrained by increasing or reducing played parts by Divisions. You can also modify a song by changing the voice of the parts in the Divisions.

1. Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 201).

Rhythm Customize UserRhythm 1 4/4 Original 1:1:0 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main Exit Del Copy

2. Touch < (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

Phytm Customize UserRhythm 1.4 Div Select Load Div Options Save Inst Edit Clear Note Edit Exit J=120 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main Exit Del Copy

3. Touch

(Division Select).

Phythm Customize UserRhythm 1.4/4 Div Select Load Div Options Save Inst Edit Clear Note Edit Exit J:120 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main Exit Del Copy

You can open the Division Select screen by touching the Division name indication (p. 201) in the Rhythm Customize screen.

4. Touch a Division name to select the Division.

Division Select Intro Variation Original Fill To Org Fill To Vari Ending Exit 120 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

This returns you to the Rhythm Customize screen. The name of the selected division now appears in the Rhythm Customize screen.

You can touch < > to hear how the Rhythm sounds.

Loading the Rhythm

Use the Rhythm Customize function to select the Rhythm you want to use as the base for the Rhythm you are creating.

1. Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 201).

Rhythm Customize UserRhythm 1 4/4 Original 1:1:0 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main Exit Del Copy

1. Touch < (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

Phytom Customize UserRhythm 1 Div Select Load Div Options Save Inst Edit Clear Note Edit Exit 120 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main Exit Del Copy

1. Touch .

The Rhythm Load screen appears.

Rhythm Load Dest All Group/Media Big Band/Swing + Division All 1:Biggest Band 2:BigAppleBand 3:BennysBigBnd 4:JimmysGroove Load Preview Exit 120 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch Group/Media <>><> to select Rhythm group.

Rhythm Load Dest All Group/Media Latin + Division All 1:That's Mambo 2:Hot Beguine 3:Go! Salsa 4:Cuba Salsa Load Preview Exit 120 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch <><>to switch the screen, then touch a Rhythm name to select the Rhythm.

Rhythm Load Dest:All Group/Media Division All 2:Hot Beguine 3:Go! Salsa 4:Cuba Salsa 5:ModernChaCha Load Preview Exit 120 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

You can touch to hear how the Rhythm sounds.

1. Touch Division <> < > to-select the Division you want to call up.

Selecting "ALL" calls up all of the Divisions.

1. Use the Variation buttons of the panel to change the arrangement of the accompaniment.

2. Touch .

The Rhythm is called up, and the Rhythm Customize screen returns to the display.

Making the Division Settings

Independent "Drum Set," "Beat," and "Volume" settings can be made for each Division.

1. Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 201).

Rhythm Customize Mambo 3 4/4 Original 1:1:0 Std Close HH Std BD 1 Short Guiro Long Guiro Hi WoodBlock Exit Del Copy 92 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch < (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

Rhythm Customize Div Select Load Div Options Save Inst Edit Clear Note Edit Exit 92 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch
   (Division Options).

The Division Options screen appears.

Division Options P.1/1 Drum Set STANDARD Beat 4/4 Volume 120 Exit

Changing the Drum Set

1. Touch the value set for Drum Set.

Division Options P.1/1 Drum Set Beat Volume STANDARD Factory Exit Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch < >> < > to change the setting.
2. Touch .

The Division Options screen reappears.

Changing the Beat

1. Touch the Beat setting.

Division Options P.1/1 Drum Se BEAT Volume - 4 + - 4 4/4 120 Exit Exit 92 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch <> < > to change the setting.
2. Touch .

The Division Options screen reappears.

Changing the Volume

1. Touch the Volume setting.

Division Options P.1/1 Drum Se ARD Beat Factory Volume Exit 92 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch <> < > to change the setting.
2. Touch .

The Division Options screen reappears.

Creating the User Rhythm

Editing the Rhythm

Edit the internal Rhythm.

What you can do	Page
Copying the Rhythm in a Selected Measure	p. 205
Deleting the Rhythm in a Selected Measure p. 205
Erasing Sounds p. 206
Adding Sounds p. 206
Altering Voices p. 207
Changing the Velocity p. 207
Moving Sounds p. 207

Copying the Rhythm in a Selected Measure

1. Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 201).
2. Touch (to copy the selected measure).

Rhythm Customize Membo 3 4/4 Original 1: 1: 0 Std Close HH Std BD 1 Short Guiro Long Guiro Hi WoodBlock Exit Del Copy 92 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

The following screen appears.

Rhythm Customize Mambo 3 4/4 Original Copy OK? measure 1 to 2 Cancel OK Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Exit Del Copy Main

To cancel operation, touch .

3. Touch .

Copies the Rhythm in the displayed measure and adds it to the end of that measure.

Deleting the Rhythm in a Selected Measure

1. Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 201).
2. Touch (to copy the selected measure).

Rhythm Customize Mambo 3 4/4 Original 1:1:0 Std Close HH Std BD 1 Short Guiro Long Guiro Hi WoodBlock Exit Del Copy 92 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

The following screen appears.

Rhythm Customize Membo 3 4/4 Original Std St Shc Lo Hi W Erase OK? measure 1 Cancel OK Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main Exit +/m Del Copy

To cancel operation, touch .

3. Touch .

The selected measure is deleted.

Editing the Sounds

You can add and erase sounds, alter voices, and change the velocity.

1. Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 201).

Rhythm Customize Mambo 3 4/4 Original 1: 1: 0 Std Close HH Std BD 1 Short Guiro Long Guiro Hi WoodBlock 92 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main Exit Del Copy

1. Touch the point on the screen where the sound you want to edit is located.

When you touch the screen, a line appears at the point you touch. By holding your finger to the screen and moving it to the left or right, you can have the line move along with your finger.

Rhythm Customize Mambo 3 4/4 Original 1:2:60 Std Close HH Std BD 1 Short Guiro Long Guiro Hi WoodBlock Exit Del Copy 92 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

The information on the location (Measure: Beat: Tick) of the line on the screen is displayed.

When you remove your finger from the screen, the Note Edit screen opens, and the note positioned at the line in the Rhythm Customize screen is displayed.

Note Edit Mambo 3 4/4 Meas Beat Tick Instrument Velocity 1: 2: 29 Std Close HH 47 1: 2: 59 Std BD 1 94 1: 2: 59 Std Close HH 101 1: 2: 60 Short Guiro 68 1: 2: 90 Std Close HH 29 1: 2: 92 Short Guiro 63 1: 3: 0 Std Close HH 27 Exit -30 -1 +1 +30 Create Erase Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

You can touch < > to open the Utility screen, and then touch in the Utility screen to open the Note

Edit screen.

Erasing Sounds

1. Touch < > < > to select the point where you want to erase the sound.

Note Edit Mambo 3 4/4 Meas Beat Tick Instrument Velocity 1: 2: 29 Std Close HH 47 1: 2: 59 Std BD 1 94 1: 2: 59 Std Close HH 101 1: 2: 60 Short Guiro 69 1: 2: 90 Std Close HH 29 1: 2: 92 Short Guiro 63 1: 3: 0 Std Close HH 27 Erase Main -30 -1 +1 +30 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration

1. When you touch , the selected sound is erased.

Adding Sounds

1. Touch < > <> to select the point where you want to add the sound.

Note Edit Mambo 3 4/4 Meas Beat Tick Instrument Velocity 1: 2: 29 Std Close HH 47 1: 2: 59 Std BD 1 94 1: 2: 59 Std Close HH 101 1: 2: 60 Short Guiro 69 1: 2: 90 Std Close HH 29 1: 2: 92 Short Guiro 63 1: 3: 0 Std Close HH 27 Create Erase ▲ ▼ -30 -1 +1 +30 Exit >/= Main Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration

1. When you touch , the new sound is added after the selected sound.

Altering Voices

1. Touch <>◀> to select the sound whose voice you want to change.

2. Touch the Instrument name.

Note Edit Mambo 3 4/4 Meas Beat Tick Instrument Velocity 1: 2: 29 Std Close HH 47 1: 2: 59 Std BD 1 94 1: 2: 59 Std Close HH 101 1: 2: 60 Short Guiro 69 1: 2: 90 Std Close HH 29 1: 2: 92 Short Guiro 63 1: 3: 0 Std Close HH 27 Exit -8 -1 +1 +8 Create Erase Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch <-8> <-1> <+1> <+8> to switch the voice.

Changing the Velocity

1. Touch < > <> to select the sound whose velocity you want to change.

2. Touch the Velocity setting.

Note Edit Mambo 3 4/4 Meas Beat Tick Instrument Velocity 1: 2: 29 Std Close HH 47 1: 2: 59 Std BD 1 94 1: 2: 59 Std Close HH 101 1: 2: 60 Short Guiro 69 1: 2: 90 Std Close HH 29 1: 2: 92 Short Guiro 63 1: 3: 0 Std Close HH 27 Exit -10 -1 +1 +10 Create Erase Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch <-10> <-1> <+1> <+10> to change the velocity.

Moving Sounds

1. Touch < > < > to select the sound you want to move.

2. Touch the "Meas Beat Tick" setting.

The note-location display uses "Measure: Beat: Tick" as the format. A tick is a unit of time that's shorter than a beat.

Note Edit Mambo 3 4/4 Meas Beat Tick Instrument Velocity 1: 2: 29 Std Close HH 47 1: 2: 59 Std BD 1 94 1: 2: 59 Std Close HH 101 1: 2: 60 Short Guiro 69 1: 2: 90 Std Close HH 29 1: 2: 92 Short Guiro 63 1: 3: 0 Std Close HH 27 Exit >/- -30 -1 +1 +30 Create Erase Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch <-30> <-1> <+1> <+30> to move the sound.

With the Rhythm Customize function, note locations are expressed in terms of "Measure: Beat: Tick." One tick is the smallest unit used in indicating the location of the note, and there are 120 ticks in a quarter note. Typical notes might be indicated as shown below.

Quarter Note 8th Note

1:1:0 1:2:0 1:3:0 1:4:0 2:1:0 2:1:60 2:2:0 2:2:60 (1 measure: 1 beat: 0 tick)

8th Note Triplet 16th Note

The ticks for each note have the following characteristics.

NOTE TICKS
Quarter Note	0 (Every 120 ticks)
8th Note 0, 60 (Every 60 ticks)
8th Note Triplet 0,	40, 80 (Every 40 ticks)
16the Note 0, 30,	60, 90 (Every 30 ticks)

Changing and Deleting the Instruments Used

You can change an instrument used in a Rhythm and replace it with another instrument.

1. Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 201).
2. Touch the section in the Rhythm Customize screen where the instrument names are displayed.

Rhythm Customize Mambo 3 4/4 Original Std Close HH Std BD 1 Short Guiro Long Guiro Hi WoodBlock Exit Del Copy 92 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

The Instrument Edit screen appears.

Instrument Edit Instrument Std Close HH Std BD 1 Short Guiro Long Guiro Hi WoodBlock Change Delete Exit 92 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

You can open Instrument Edit screen using the following procedure.

1. Touch < > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

Rhythm Customize Membo 3 1/4 Div Select Load Div Options Save Inst Edit Clear Note Edit Exit 92 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main Exit Del Copy

1. Touch (Instrument Edit).

The Instrument Edit screen appears.

Changing the Instrument Used

1. Touch < > < > in the screen to select the name of the instrument you want to change.

2. Touch .

The following screen appears.

Instrument Change Std Close HH > P.1/8 Crash Cym 1 Ride Cym 1 Crash Cym 2 Ride Cym 2 Splash Cym Ride Bell China Cym Std Close HH Cancel

1. Touch <> < > to switch the screen, then touch the instrument name.

The following screen appears.

Instrument Change Std Close HH > P.1/8 Change Instrument OK? Std Close HH Crash Cym 1 Cancel OK Cancel

To cancel operation, touch .

1. If you want to change the instrument, touch .

The instrument is changed.

Deleting an Instrument

You can delete an instrument used in a Rhythm. When an instrument is deleted, all of the sounds using that instrument are deleted from the Rhythm.

1. Touch <><> in the screen to select the name of the instrument you want to delete.
2. Touch on the Instrument Edit screen.

Delete Instrument OK? Cancel OK

To cancel operation, touch .

1. If you are sure that you wish to delete the instrument, touch .

The selected instrument is deleted.

Deleting Rhythms You Have Created

This deletes User Rhythms created by partially editing the internal Rhythms.

1. Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 201).

2. Touch < (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

Phythm Customize Mambo 3 Div Select Load Div Options Save Inst Edit Clear Note Edit Exit 92 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch .

The following screen appears.

Clear Rhythm OK? Cancel OK

To cancel operation, touch .

1. If you are sure that you wish to delete the Rhythm, touch .

Saving the User Rhythm

Changing the Name of a User Rhythm (Rename)

1. Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 201).

2. Touch < (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Rhythm Save screen appears.

Rhythm Save Internal Mambo 3 Media Ext Memory 1:---- 2:---- 3:---- 4:---- Save Rename Exit 92 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch .

The Rename screen appears.

Mambo 3 ABC/abc/1#% A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Del Space Cancel ← → OK 92 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch the character select button ( ) to switch among uppercase/lowercase/symbols.

Touch the character select button repeatedly to cycle through the available choices, like this: uppercase → lowercase → symbols → uppercase...

1. Touch the screen to specify the desired character.

The following characters can be selected.

Uppercase	A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Lowercase	a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z
Symbols	! " # % & ' () * + , - . / : = ? ^ _ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Del	Delete a character.
Space	Insert a space.
	Move the cursor (the symbol that indicates the location at which characters will be input) to left or right.

To cancel operation, touch .

1. When you're done making the settings, touch .

Saving User Rhythms to the User Memory or USB Memory

You can take User Rhythms created with the Rhythm Customize function and save them in the ATELIER's User memory and USB memory.

To call up Rhythms saved in User memory, press the [User] button.

1. Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 201).

2. Touch < (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

Div Select Load Div Options Save Inst Edit Clear Note Edit Exit 92 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch .

The Rhythm Save screen appears.

Rhythm Save Internal Mambo 3 1:---- 2:---- 3:---- 4:---- Exit Media Ext Memory + Save Rename 92 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch <▶◀> to determine the save destination.

Select "Ext Memory" to save the data in USB memory, or "Favorites" to save it in User memory.

Select "Disk" to save the data in floppy disk.

1. Touch < > < > to select the number of the save destination.

Numbers which have not been used in the saving operation will be displayed as "----."

Rhythm Save Internal Mambo 3 6:---- 7:---- 8:---- 9:---- Media User + Save Rename Exit 92 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

To cancel the save, touch to close the Rhythm Save screen.

You can change the name of a Rhythm by touching .

1. Touch .

The User Rhythms are saved to the User memory or to USB memory.

You can save Rhythms after changing the tempo by touching the Tempo []◀ button.

If the following screen appears

The following screen appears if you select a number to which a Rhythm has already been saved and then touch .

Overwrite Rhythm OK? Cancel OK

If you wish to overwrite the Rhythm

1. Touch .

The Rhythm will be rewritten.

If you wish to save new data instead of updating the Rhythm

1. Touch .

Rewriting of the Rhythm will be canceled.

1. In the Rhythm Save screen, select the number that is displayed as "----" (a number that currently does not contain Rhythm data).

2. Touch .

Adjusting How the Instrument Responds

Turning Aftertouch On/Off

This switches the aftertouch setting for the Upper keyboard. Aftertouch applies vibrato when additional pressure is placed on the keys that are being played.

NOTE

Aftertouch can only be enabled for the Upper keyboard.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

Sound/Keyboard Upper Org Full Organ1 Sym Orch Full Strings Grand Piano Solo Flute3 Lower Org Lower Organ1 Sym Orch.Str.Ens Orch Pedal Org Organ Bass1 Orch Str.Bass Pdl Exit Controller Effect SplitPoint J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch .

2. Touch <> < > to display the After Touch.

Upper Keyboard P.4/6 Org Full Organ1 Sym Full Strings Orch Grand Piano Solo Flute3 After Touch AfterTouch Sensitivity OFF 5 Exit Pedal Lower Upper J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch the After Touch setting to switch between "ON" and "OFF."

Each time you touch the After Touch setting, it will alternate between "ON" and "OFF."

Setting
ON, OFF

1. Touch .

NOTE

Please note that not all the voices on the Upper keyboard are responsive to Aftertouch, even if the feature is set to ON. For details, refer to the Voice List (Appendix: separate booklet).

Adjusting the Depth of Aftertouch

This adjusts the depth of the Aftertouch effect.

NOTE

Aftertouch can only be enabled for the Upper keyboard.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

2. Touch . The Upper Keyboard screen appears.

3. Touch <▶◀> to display the After Touch Sensitivity.

Upper Keyboard P.4/6 Org Full Organ1 Sym Full Strings Orch Grand Piano Solo Flute3 After Touch OFF 5 AfterTouch Sensitivity Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main Exit Pedal Lower Upper

1. Touch the After Touch Sensitivity value (1–10).

Upper Keyboard P.4/6 Org Full Sym Full Orch Gra Solo Flur After Touch 5 Factory + Exit Pedal Lower Upper AfterTouch Sensitivity 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch <> < > to edit the value.

Setting
1-10

Higher settings of this value will allow deeper vibrato to be applied when you apply pressure to the keyboard.

1. Touch .

Adjusting the Initial Touch Sensitivity

This adjusts the amount of the Initial Touch effect applied. Initial Touch is a function that translates the force used in playing the keys into a directly proportional amount of volume.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

1. Touch either , or .

Setting	Description
Upper	To change the initial touch setting of the Upper part
Lower	To change the initial touch setting of the Lower part

1. Touch <> < > to display the Initial Touch.

Upper Keyboard P.2/6 Org Full Organ1 8 Sym Full Strings 8 10 Orch Grand Piano 8 Solo Flute3 10 10 Exit Pedal Lower Upper Part Balance Initial Touch 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch the Initial Touch value (OFF, 1–10).

2. Touch < >> < > to-edit the value.

Setting	Description
1-10	Initial Touch is on. Striking the keys more forcefully will produce correspondingly louder sounds. The change in volume when the keys are played forcefully increases as the value is increased.
OFF	Initial Touch is off. Volume remains constant regardless of how hard you play.

1. Touch .

Changing the Pedalboard Polyphony

You can set the Bass Pedalboard to play simultaneous multiple notes or single notes only.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Pedalboard screen appears.

1. Touch <> < > to display the PedalBass Mode.

Pedalboard P.3/3 Org Organ Bass1 Orch PedalBass Mode MONOPHONIC Exit Pedal Lower Upper -130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch the PedalBass Mode setting to switch between "MONOPHONIC" and "POLYPHONIC."

Each time you touch the PedalBass Mode setting, it will alternate between "MONOPHONIC" and "POLYPHONIC."

Setting	Description
MONOPHONIC	Only single notes can be played.
POLYPHONIC	Multiple notes can be played.

1. Touch .

Performance Function Settings

Selecting the Keyboard Affected by the Damper Pedal

You can specify which keyboard will be affected when you press the Damper (Sustain) pedal.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Controller screen appears.

1. Touch <> < > to display the Damper Pedal.

Controller P.1/3 L Foot Switch GLIDE R Foot Switch ROTARY FAST/SLOW Registration Shift OFF Damper Pedal to LOWER Exit

1. Touch the Damper Pedal setting to switch between "to UPPER" and "to LOWER."

Each time you touch the Damper Pedal setting, it will alternate between "to UPPER" and "to LOWER."

Setting Description
to UPPER	The effect is applied to the voices played on the Upper keyboard.
to LOWER	The effect is applied to the voices played on the Lower keyboard.

1. Touch .

Changing the Function of the Expression Pedal

Specify how the Expression Pedal will function when your performance is being recorded and when ATELIER song files are being played back.

Function During Recording

Specify whether Expression Pedal operations will be recorded or not while your performance is being recorded.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

2. Touch . The Controller screen appears.

3. Touch <> < > to display the Exp. Src (Rec).

Controller P.2/3 Exp. Src (Rec) PEDAL Exp. Src (Play) PEDAL+COMPOSER Exp. Curve 1 Bender/Vibrato to UPPER Exit

1. Touch the Exp. Src (Rec) setting to switch between "PEDAL" and "COMPOSER."

Each time you touch the Exp. Src (Rec) setting, it will alternate between "PEDAL" and "COMPOSER."

Setting	Description
PEDAL	Expression Pedal movements will be recorded. The previous recording will be erased as new songs are recorded.
COMPOSER	Expression Pedal movements will not be recorded. The previous data will remain without being erased.

1. Touch .

Function During Playback

You can specify whether or not the Expression Pedal will function while ATELIER song files are being played back.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

2. Touch . The Controller screen appears.

3. Touch <> < > to display the Exp. Src (Play).

Controller P.2/3 Exp. Src (Rec) PEDAL Exp. Src (Play) PEDAL+COMPOSER Exp. Curve 1 Bender/Vibrato to UPPER Exit

1. Touch the Exp. Src (Play) setting.

Controller P.2/3 Exp. Src (Rec) PEDAL Exp. Sr COMPOSER Factory + Bender Exit Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch < >> < > to change the setting.

Setting	Description
PEDAL +COMPOSER	The Expression Pedal will function. Expression Pedal recording within the song file will also be effective.
COMPOSER	The Expression Pedal will not function. The Expression Pedal recording within the song file will be effective.
PEDAL	The Expression Pedal will function. The Expression Pedal recording within the song file will be ignored.

1. Touch .

Choosing the Keyboard for which Pitch Bend and Vibrato will Apply

This setting determines which keyboard will be controlled by the Pitch Bend/Vibrato lever.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

2. Touch . The Controller screen appears.

3. Touch <> < > to display the Bender/Vibrato.

Controller P.2/3 Exp. Src (Rec) PEDAL Exp. Src (Play) PEDAL+COMPOSER Exp. Curve 1 Bender/Vibrato to UPPER Exit

1. Touch the Bender/Vibrato setting.

Controller P.2/3 Exp. Src (Rec) PEDAL Exp. Sr to UPPER MPOSER — Factory + Bender Exit PER Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch <▶◀> to change the setting.

Setting	Description
to UPPER	The effect is applied to the voices played on the Upper keyboard.
to LOWER	The effect is applied to the voices played on the Lower keyboard.
to PEDAL	The effect is applied to the voices played on the Pedalboard.

1. Touch .

Changing the Pitch Bend Range

This setting allows you to choose the maximum amount of Pitch change (range) permissible when using Pitch Bend. The range can be set anywhere between 1–12 (in semitone units; with a maximum of one octave).

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

2. Touch . The Controller screen appears.

3. Touch <▶◀> ▶ display the Pitch Bend Range.

Controller P.3/3 Pitch Bend Range 1 D Beam Sensitivity 10 Exit

1. Touch the Pitch Bend Range setting.

Controller P.3/3 Pitch Bend Range 1 D Beam Factory Exit Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch <▶◀> to change the setting.

Setting

1–12 (semitone steps)

1. Touch .

Drums/SFX is fixed at one octave range, regardless of this setting.

Adjusting the Sensitivity of the D Beam Controller

You can adjust the sensitivity of the D Beam controller. Increasing this setting will make the D Beam controller more responsive.

The sensitivity of the D Beam controller can vary depending on the brightness of the surroundings. If it does not operate as you expect, please readjust the sensitivity.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

2. Touch . The Controller screen appears.

3. Touch < >> <> to display the D Beam Sensitivity.

Controller P.3/3 Pitch Bend Range 1 D Beam Sensitivity 10 Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch the D Beam Sensitivity setting.

Controller P.3/3 Pitch Bend Range 1 D Beam 10 Factory Exit Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch <>><> to change the setting.

Setting
1-10

1. Touch .

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Rhythm Settings

Turning Chord Hold On/Off

The Chord Hold function can be switched ON/OFF. When Chord Hold is ON, the Automatic Accompaniment will continue playing even when you lift your hand from the key to play a new chord.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rhythm screen appears.

1. Touch < > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Rhythm Options screen appears.

1. Touch <>><>to display the Chord Hold.

Rhythm Options P.1/2 Chord Intelligence OFF Chord Hold ON Leading Bass OFF Count Down Sound VOICE Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch the Chord Hold setting to switch between "ON" and "OFF."

Each time you touch the Chord Hold setting, it will alternate between "ON" and "OFF."

Setting	Description
ON	The Automatic Accompaniment determined by the chord played on the Lower keyboard is held (even if you release the keys).
OFF	When you release the keys that you played in the Lower keyboard, the Automatic Accompaniment will stop (be muted). Only the Rhythm (drum) performance will continue.

1. Touch .

Changing the Intro Countdown Sound (Count Down Sound)

You can change the sound that is used for the count played at the end of the intro with the Intro Countdown function (p. 90).

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rhythm screen appears.

1. Touch < (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Rhythm Options screen appears.

1. Touch <▶◀> ▶ display the Count Down Sound.

Rhythm Options P.1/2 Chord Intelligence OFF Chord Hold ON Leading Bass OFF Count Down Sound VOICE Exit =130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch the Count Down Sound setting to switch between "VOICE" and "STICK."

Each time you touch the Count Down Sound setting, it will alternate between "VOICE" and "STICK."

Setting	Description
VOICE	Human voice count (One, two, three...)
STICK	Stick sound count

1. Touch .

Preventing Rhythm Tempos from Switching Automatically

You can prevent Rhythm tempos from switching automatically when you switch Rhythms.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rhythm screen appears.

1. Touch < (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Rhythm Options screen appears.

1. Touch <> < > to display the Auto Std Tempo (Auto Standard Tempo).

Rhythm Options P.2/2 Auto Std Tempo ON Rhythm Mode ORIGINAL Exit

1. Touch the Auto Std Tempo setting to switch between "ON" and "OFF."

Each time you touch the Auto Std Tempo setting, it will alternate between "ON" and "OFF."

Setting	Description
ON	Switching the Rhythm while the Rhythm is stopped automatically changes the tempo settings to those in the new Rhythm.
OFF	The tempo settings are not changed automatically when the Rhythms are changed.

1. Touch .

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Changing the Operation of [Intro], [Ending] Button and the Fill In Button

You can change the operation of the Fill In [Auto] button, Fill In Fill In [Break] button, [Intro] button, and [Ending] button so that they work in the same way as on the S-series.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rhythm screen appears.

2. Touch < > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Rhythm Options screen appears.

1. Touch <▲<> to display the Rhythm Mode.

Rhythm Options P.2/2 Auto Std Tempo ON Rhythm Mode ORIGINAL Exit

1. Touch the Rhythm Mode setting to switch between "ORIGINAL" and "S-SERIES."

Each time you touch the Rhythm Mode setting, it will alternate between "ORIGINAL" and "S-SERIES."

Setting Description
ORIGINAL	The function of the Fill In [Auto] button, Fill In [Break] button, [Intro] button, and [Ending] button will not change.
S-SERIES	The function of the Fill In [Auto] button, Fill In [Break] button, [Intro] button, and [Ending] button will change.Fill In [Auto] button →Fill In [To Variation] buttonFill In [Break] button →Fill In [To Original] button[Intro] button →Fill In [Break] button[Ending] button → [Intro/Ending] button

1. Touch .

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Placing the Panel Overlay Sheet

If you've set Rhythm Mode to "S-SERIES," you can place the panel overlay sheet included with the ATELIER on the panel so that the button functions will be easy to see.

1. Place the panel overlay sheet as shown in the illustration below.

graph TD
    A["Auto"] --> B["To Variation"]
    C["Break"] --> D["To Original"]
    E["Intro"] --> F["Break"]
    G["Count Down"] --> H["Intro/Ending"]
    I["Ending"] --> H
    J["Sync Start"] --> K["Start/Stop"]

On the panel overlay sheet are printed the names of the buttons for when Rhythm Mode is set to "S-SERIES."

Button	Description
Fill In [To Variation] button	A fill-in (p. 91) will be played, and then an elaborate Rhythm pattern will play.
Fill In [To Original] button	A fill-in (p. 91) will be played, and then a basic Rhythm pattern will play.
Fill In [Break] button	Stop the Rhythm at the end of that measure (Break).
[Intro/Ending] button	This lets you start the Rhythm with an intro or stop the Rhythm with an ending.

Starting the Rhythm (if Rhythm Mode is "S-SERIES")

Starting with an Added Intro

1. Press the [Intro/Ending] button.

The Intro is played and the Rhythm starts.

While the Intro is playing, the [Intro/Ending] button indicator will light, until the Intro ends then the button indicator will go dark.

Making the Intro Short

1. Press the Fill In [To Variation] or Fill In [To Original] button.

[Start/Stop] button indicator will blink.

The indicator for the Fill In [To Variation] or [To Original] button will blink.

2. Press the [Start/Stop] button.

A short Intro is played and the Rhythm starts.

Starting Without an Intro

1. Press the [Start/Stop] button.

The Rhythm starts without an Intro being played.

Stopping the Rhythm (if Rhythm Mode is "S-SERIES")

Stopping with an Ending

1. Press the [Intro/Ending] button.

An Ending is played, then the Rhythm stops.

While the Ending is playing, the [Intro/Ending] button indicator will light, until the Ending finishes the button indicator will be turned off.

Making the Ending Short

1. Press the [To Variation] or [To Original] button, and then press the [Start/Stop] button.

A short Ending is played, then the Rhythm stops.

Stopping without an Ending

1. Press the [Start/Stop] button.

The Rhythm stops without an Ending being played.

Registration Settings

Changing the Timing at Which Arranger Settings are Recalled

You can specify how the settings related to Rhythm performances and Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled when you press a Registration button.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Registration Load screen appears.

1. Touch < > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Registration Options screen appears.

Registration Options P.1/1 Arranger Update INSTANT Trans. Update INSTANT Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch the Arranger Update setting to switch between "DELAYED" and "INSTANT."

Each time you touch the Arranger Update setting, it will alternate between "DELAYED" and "INSTANT."

Setting	Description
DELAYED	Settings related to Rhythm performances and Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled when you hold a Registration button for several seconds. If you quickly press the Registration button, only the panel settings (voice, etc.) that are not related to Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will be updated.
INSTANT	Settings related to Rhythm performances and Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled the instant you press a button along with all other panel settings.

1. Touch .

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Changing the Timing at Which Transposition Settings are Recalled

You can specify how the transpose setting will be recalled when you press a Registration button.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Registration Load screen appears.

2. Touch < > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Registration Options screen appears.

Registration Options P.1/1 Arranger Update INSTANT Trans. Update INSTANT Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch the Trans. Update (Transpose Update) setting to switch between "DELAYED" and "INSTANT."

Each time you touch the Trans. Update setting, it will alternate between "DELAYED" and "INSTANT."

Setting	Description
DELAYED	Transpose settings will be recalled when you hold a Registration button for several seconds.
INSTANT	Transpose setting will be recalled the instant you press a button along with all other panel settings.

1. Touch .

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Composer Settings

Switching the Display of Lyrics On or Off

Some music files have Lyrics included and these Lyrics can be displayed on the screen. You can turn on or off the lyrics display of such music files.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

1. Touch < (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Rec/Play Options screen appears.

1. Touch <> < > to display the Lyrics.

Rec/Play Options P.1/3 Lyrics ON Playback Transpose 0 Count-in Rec ON Metronome OFF Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch the Lyrics setting to switch between "ON" and "OFF."

Touch the setting to toggle the display of lyrics "ON" (visible) or "OFF" (hidden).

1. Touch .

If you press a voice select button while playing back music files that contains lyrics, the display screen will switch, and the lyrics will no longer be displayed. To re-display the lyrics, touch on Rec/Play screen once again.

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Changing the Key When Playing Back Songs (Playback Transpose)

SMF music files or a performance that you yourself recorded can be transposed for playback.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

2. Touch < (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Rec/Play Options screen appears.

1. Touch <> < > to display the Playback Transpose.

Rec/Play Options P.1/3 Lyrics ON Playback Transpose 0 Count-in Rec ON Metronome OFF Exit

1. Touch the Playback Transpose setting.

Rec/Play Options P.1/3 Lyrics ON 0 Playback - Factory + Metron Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch <>><> to change the setting.

The key is transposed by one semitone each time

< > or < > key is touched.

Setting

-6-0-5 (semitone steps)

1. Touch .

Changing the Metronome Setting

You can change the way in which the metronome will sound.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

1. Touch < (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Rec/Play Options screen appears.

1. Touch <>><> to display the Metronome.

Rec/Play Options P.1/3 Lyrics ON Playback Transpose 0 Count-in Rec ON Metronome OFF Exit

1. Touch the Metronome setting.

Rec/Play Options P.1/3 Lyrics ON Playback Count- Metronc OFF Factory Exit Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch <▶◀> to change the setting.

Setting	Description
OFF	Not heard at all
REC	Heard only while recording
ON	Heard constantly

1. Touch .

Adjusting the Metronome Volume

You can adjust the volume of the metronome.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

2. Touch < (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

3. Touch . The Rec/Play Options screen appears.

4. Touch <> < > to display the Metronome Vol. (Metronome Volume).

Rec/Play Options P.2/3 Metronome Vol. 4 Metronome Sound CLICK&BELL Beat 4/4 CD/Audio Type AUTO Exit

1. Touch Metronome Vol. setting.

Rec/Play Options P.2/3 Metronome Vol 4 BELL — Factory + 4 Beat CD/Aud Exit Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch < >> < > to change the setting.

Setting
1-10

Increasing the value will raise the volume of the metronome.

1. Touch .

Changing the Sound of the Metronome

You can choose one of 4 different sounds for the metronome.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

1. Touch < (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Rec/Play Options screen appears.

1. Touch <> < > to display the Metronome Sound.

Rec/Play Options P.2/3 Metronome Vol. 4 Metronome Sound CLICK&BELL Beat 4/4 CD/Audio Type AUTO Exit

1. Touch the Metronome Sound setting.

Rec/Play Options P.2/3 Metronome Vol Metronome Beat CD/Aud EXIT CLICK&BELL Factory + Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch < >> < > to change the setting.

Setting	Description
CLICK&BELL	Conventional metronome sound
ELECTRONIC	Electronic metronome sound
VOICE ENG.	Human voice (English)
VOICE JPN.	Human voice (Japanese)

1. Touch .

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Setting the Beat

This setting determines the beat to be used when recording performance songs.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

1. Touch < > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Rec/Play Options screen appears.

1. Touch <> < > to display the Beat.

Rec/Play Options P.2/3 Metronome Vol. 4 Metronome Sound CLICK&BELL Beat 4/4 CD/Audio Type AUTO Exit

1. Touch the Beat setting.

The time signature setting screen appears.

Rec/Play Options P.2/3 Met 2/2 0/4 2/4 3/4 Met 4/4 5/4 6/4 7/4 Bea 3/8 6/8 9/8 12/8 CD/ Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch the time signature that you wish to set.

2. Touch .

If you're using Rhythm performance or Automatic Accompaniment, the time signature will be specified automatically.

You cannot change the beat of previously recorded songs.

Setting the Type of CD to Be Played Back

The ATELIER may be unable to correctly recognize the type of CD being used. In such instances, you can specify the type of CD manually.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

2. Touch < (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

3. Touch . The Rec/Play Options screen appears.

4. Touch <><> to display the CD/Audio Type.

Rec/Play Options P.2/3 Metronome Vol. 4 Metronome Sound CLICK&BELL Beat 4/4 CD/Audio Type AUTO Exit

1. Touch the CD/Audio Type setting.

Rec/Play Options P.2/3 Metronome Vol METRONOM AUTO BELL Factory + Beat CD/Aud Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch < >> < > to change the setting.

Setting	Description
Auto	The CD type is detected automatically.
Type A	General CDs for Player Piano contain audio and MIDI data, and the data format may vary from one CD to the next. If the CD's data format does not match the ATELIER's settings, a "beep" will sound.
Type B
STEREO	Commercial Audio CD (CDs other than those designed for use with the piano player piano)

NOTE Note that certain commercially available CDs cannot be played back on the ATELIER.

1. Touch .

Adjusting the Timing of a Player Piano CD's Piano Sound and Accompaniment

With some player piano CDs, the piano and accompaniment sounds may not be synchronized properly. In such instances, you can adjust the timing of the piano sounds so that they are in time with the accompaniment.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

1. Touch < > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Rec/Play Options screen appears.

1. Touch < >> <> to display the CD/Audio Sync.

Rec/Play Options P.3/3 CD/Audio Sync 0 Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch the CD/Audio Sync setting.

Rec/Play Options P.3/3 CD/Audio Sync 0 Factory + Exit Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch <▶◀> td-change the setting.

Setting
0-100

1. Touch .

Other Settings

Adjust the Standard Pitch (Master Tune)

The basic pitch of an instrument is generally considered as the pitch of the middle A note. The "Master Tune" parameter lets you adjust this basic pitch to match the pitch of any other instruments that are playing together with the ATELIER.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The System screen appears.

1. Touch <> < > to display the Master Tune.

System P.2/7 Master Tune 440.0 Mic Echo 4 MIDI IN Mode MODE 1 Tx MIDI Ch. Upper 4 Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch the Master Tune setting.

System P.2/7 Master Type 440.0 Mic Echo 440.0 MIDI IN Factory 1 Tx MIDI Exit Exit Utility J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch < >> < > to change the setting.

Setting

415.3Hz–466.2Hz (0.1 Hz units)

1. Touch .

By touching < >,you can restore the default setting (440.0 Hz).

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Adjusting the Mic Echo

You can adjust the mic echo that will apply to a connected microphone.

Connecting the Microphone (p. 25)

1. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

2. Touch <> < > to display the Mic Echo.

System P.2/7 Master Tune 440.0 Mic Echo 4 MIDI IN Mode MODE 1 Tx MIDI Ch. Upper 4 Exit Utility J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch the Mic Echo setting.

System P.2/7 Master Type 440.0 Mic Echo 4 MIDI IN Factory 1 Tx MIDI Exit Exit Utility J 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch <▶◀> td-change the setting.

Setting
0-12

1. Touch .

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Enabling Transmission of PC Numbers

Transmission of PC (Program Change) numbers can be switched ON/OFF when a Registration is selected.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

2. Touch <> < > to display the Send PC Switch.

System P.1/7 Send PC Switch OFF Bank MSB 0 Bank LSB 0 PC Number 1 Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch the Send PC Switch setting to switch between "ON" and "OFF."

Each time you touch the Send PC Switch setting, it will alternate between "ON" and "OFF."

Setting	Description
ON	PC numbers are transmitted
OFF	PC numbers are not transmitted

1. Touch .

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Setting the PC Number

You can specify the Program Change number that will be transmitted from MIDI Out connector when a Registration is selected.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The System screen appears.

1. Touch <▶◀> □ display the Bank MSB (Bank Select MSB), Bank LSB (Bank Select LSB), or PC Number (Program Change Number).

System P.1/7 Send PC Switch OFF Bank MSB 0 Bank LSB 0 PC Number 1 Exit Utility J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch either , , or setting.

System P.1/7 Send PC Switch OFF Bank MS Bank LS PC Num Factory + Exit Exit Utility Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch < >> <> to change the setting.

Menu	Setting
Bank MSB	0–127
Bank LSB	0–127
PC Number	1–128

1. Touch .

MIDI IN Mode

This instrument contains two sound generators: one for GM2/GS data playback and one for keyboard performance. Normally, data received at the MIDI In connector will control only the sound generator for GM2/GS data playback. However by changing the MIDI IN Mode setting, you can also control the keyboard sound generator from MIDI In.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The System screen appears.

1. Touch <> < > to display the MIDI IN Mode.

System P.2/7 Master Tune 440.0 Mic Echo 4 MIDI IN Mode MODE 1 Tx MIDI Ch. Upper 4 Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch the MIDI IN Mode setting to switch between "MODE 1" and "MODE 2."

Each time you touch the MIDI IN Mode setting, it will alternate between "Mode 1" and "Mode 2."

Setting	Description
MODE 1	Control the instrument as a GS sound generator
MODE 2	Channels 5 through 10 and Channels 12, 14, 15 are transmitted to the GS sound generator, and all other channels are transmitted to the keyboard sound generator.

Channel	MODE 1 MODE 2
1 GS Solo
2 GS Pedal/GS *
3 GS Lower
4 GS Upper
5-10 GS GS
11 GS Drums/SFX
12 GS GS
13 GS Manual Percussion
14-15 GS GS
16 GS Control

* When the pedal part button is ON, data received at the MIDI In connector will control the pedal part of keyboard sound generator. When the pedal part button is OFF, data received at the MIDI In connector will control the GS sound generator.

4. Touch .

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Selecting the MIDI Transmit Channel

When you use the MIDI connectors or the USB connector of the ATELIER to transmit musical data to external devices, for each keyboard (Upper, Lower, and Pedal) you can specify the channel on which your playing will be transmitted as MIDI messages.

For details refer to "Connecting MIDI Devices" (p. 248).

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The System screen appears.

System P 2/7 Master Tune 440.0 Mic Echo 4 MIDI IN Mode MODE 1 Tx MIDI Ch. Upper 4 Exit Utility J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

System P.3/7 Tx MIDI Ch. Lower 3 Tx MIDI Ch. Pedal 2 Tx MIDI Ch. Solo 1 Tx MIDI Ch. Drums 11 Exit Utility J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

System P.4/7 Tx MIDI Ch. M.Perc 13 Tx MIDI Ch. Ctrl 16 Aux Out ON Aux Out Mode AMBIENCE Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. Touch the part to change the MIDI Transmit Channel.

Menu	Part
Tx MIDI Ch. Upper	Upper
Tx MIDI Ch. Lower	Lower
Tx MIDI Ch. Pedal	Pedal
Tx MIDI Ch. Solo	Solo
Tx MIDI Ch. Drums	Drums/SFX
Tx MIDI Ch. M.Perc	Manual Percussion
Tx MIDI Ch. Ctrl	Control

The Control part transmits Expression pedal data and PC numbers.

3. Touch <><> to change the setting.

System P.3/7 Tx MIDI Ch Lower 3 Tx MIDI 3 - Factory + Tx MIDI - Tx MIDI Exit Exit Utility J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

Setting

1-16

4. Touch .

NOTE MIDI messages for the Solo part will be transmitted only when the Solo [To Lower] button is ON.

Adjusting the Brightness of the Display

You can adjust the brightness of the display.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

2. Touch < >> < > to display the Display Brightness.

System P.5/7 Display Brightness 2 Main Bouncing Ball ON Main Background ATELIER Ext Drive Mode MODE 2 Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch the Display Brightness setting.

System P.5/7 Display Brightness 2 Main Bo 2 Main Ba Factory + WER Exit Exit 2 Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch <> < > to change the setting. Higher values will make the screen brighter.

Setting
1-3

1. Touch .

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Eliminating the Bouncing Ball from the Main Screen

You can set the main screen so that the bouncing ball does not appear.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

2. Touch <> < > to display the Main Bouncing Ball.

System P.5/7 Display Brightness 2 Main Bouncing Ball ON Main Background ATELIER Ext Drive Mode MODE 2 Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch the Main Bouncing Ball setting to switch between "ON" and "OFF."

Each time you touch the Main Bouncing Ball setting, it will alternate between "ON" and "OFF."

Setting	Description
ON	The bouncing ball appears in the main screen.
OFF	The bouncing ball does not appear in the main screen.

1. Touch .

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Switching the Background of the Main Screen

You can change the color and pattern for the main screen's background.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The System screen appears.

1. Touch <> < > to display the Main Background.

System P.5/7 Display Brightness 2 Main Bouncing Ball ON Main Background ATELIER Ext Drive Mode MODE 2 Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch the Main Background setting.

2. Touch <> < > to change the setting.

System P.5/7 Display Brightness 2 Main Bo Main Ba Exit ATELIER Factory + Exit 2 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch .

The System screen appears.

1. Touch on the System Screen.

The main screen appears with the selected background.

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Changing the Ext Drive Connector Setting

In some cases, when CD Drive is connected to the Ext Drive connector, it may take longer for data to be loaded, or data may fail to be loaded successfully. If this occurs, you may be able to solve the problem by changing the Ext Drive connector.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

2. Touch <> < > to display the Ext Drive Mode.

System P.5/7 Display Brightness 2 Main Bouncing Ball ON Main Background ATELIER Ext Drive Mode MODE 2 Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch the Ext Drive Mode setting to switch between "MODE 1" and "MODE 2."

Each time you touch the Ext Drive Mode setting, it will alternate between "MODE 1" and "MODE 2."

Setting

MODE 1, MODE 2

1. Touch .

2. Turn on the power once again.

Turning the Remote Function On/Off

You can turn the Remote function on (enabled) or off (disabled).

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The System screen appears.

1. Touch <> < > to display the Remote Control.

System P.6/7 USB Driver GENERIC Remote Control ON Remote Ctrl: FUNC1 LYRICS Remote Ctrl: FUNC2 MELODY MUTE Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch the Remote Control setting to switch between "ON" and "OFF."

Each time you touch the Remote Control setting, it will alternate between "ON" and "OFF."

Setting	Description
ON	The remote control unit will operate the ATELIER.
OFF	The remote control unit will be disabled.You will not be able to operate the ATELIER using the remote control.

1. Touch .

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Changing the Functions of the Remote Control's Buttons

These let you change the functions that are assigned to the remote control's [FUNC 1] button and [FUNC2] button.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The System screen appears.

1. Touch <> < > to display the "Remote Ctrl: FUNC1" or "Remote Ctrl: FUNC2."

System USB Driver GENERIC Remote Control ON Remote Ctrl: FUNC1 LYRICS Remote Ctrl: FUNC2 MELODY MUTE Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch either setting.

2. Touch <><> to change the setting.

System P.6/7 USB Driver GENERIC Remote LYRICS Factory MUTE Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

Setting	Description
MELODYMUTE	Mutes the sound of the melody, or minimizes the vocal sounds of a music CD (p. 268, p. 273).
MELODYGUIDE	Lowers the volume of the melody (p. 268).
LYRICS	Switches display of lyrics on (displayed) or off (hidden) (p. 220).

1. Touch .

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Using the V-LINK Function

Connecting the ATELIER to a V-LINK compatible image device allows you to control the images with the ATELIER.

V-LINK

V-LINK ( ) is a link to that allows music and images to be performed together. By using MIDI to connect two or more V-LINK compatible devices, you can easily enjoy a wide range of visual effects that are linked to the expressive elements of a music performance.

How to Use the V-LINK

1. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

2. Touch <><> to display the V-LINK.

System P.7/7 V-LINK OFF Screen Out OFF Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch the V-LINK setting (OFF/MODE1/MODE2).

2. Touch <> < > to change the setting.

Setting	Description
OFF	The V-LINK function is switched off.
MODE 1	The V-LINK function is switched on.You can now control the video images using the Registration buttons.
MODE 2	The V-LINK function is switched on.You can now control the video images using the twelve rightmost keys of the lower keyboard and Registration buttons.No sound is produced when you press any of the twelve keys at the right end of the keyboard.

1. Touch .

The V-LINK function is turned on, and the V-LINK icon appears in the main screen.

4/4 Transpose C C V-LINK Biggest Band Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main Rhythm System Quick Guide

The Send PC Switch settings is automatically switched to ON when V-LINK is on (MODE 1, MODE 2). When the V-LINK function is switched off, the Send PC Switch setting reverts to the setting in effect before V-LINK was switched on.

When V-LINK is set to "MODE 1"

When a Registration button is pressed, "Bank Select" and "Program Change Number" messages are transmitted from the MIDI Out connector as video control messages. At this time, the Control MIDI transmit channel setting is disregarded, and the messages are transmitted via Channel 16.

When V-LINK is set to "MODE 2"

In addition to the functions of "MODE 1," MODE 2 also sets the device to transmit "Note messages" as video control messages from the MIDI Out connector when one of the twelve rightmost keys in the Lower keyboard is pressed.

In this case, the Lower and Solo MIDI transmit channel settings are disregarded, and the messages are transmitted via Channel 16.

The MIDI transmit channel used for video control messages is fixed at channel 16.

For more on switching video images, refer to the owner's manual for the connected device.

You can also use the following procedure to turn the V-LINK function on.

1. Hold down the Composer [Reset] button and press either the Upper Organ [Full 1] button or the Upper Organ [Full 2] button.

Holding down the Composer [Reset] button and pressing the Upper Organ [Full 1] button switches the instrument to "MODE 1" (p. 231). Holding down the Composer [Reset] button and pressing the Upper Organ [Full 2] button switches the instrument to "MODE 2" (p. 231).

The display changes as shown below, and the ATELIER switches to Image Control mode.

Video Link System is ON.

The V-LINK function is turned on, and the V-LINK icon appears in the main screen.

4 4 Transpose C C V-LINK Biggest Band Rhythm System Quick Guide Music Assistant Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. To cancel the V-LINK function, once again hold down the Composer [Reset] button and press either the Upper Organ [Full 1] button or the Upper Organ [Full 2] button.

If set to "MODE 1" (p. 231), holding down the Composer [Reset] button and pressing the Upper Organ [Full 1] button switches the V-LINK function off. If set to "MODE 2" (p. 231), holding down the Composer [Reset] button and pressing the Upper Organ [Full 2] button switches the V-LINK function off.

Repositioning the Touch Screen

If you've been using the Touch Screen for some time, the pointer may be shifted, making the ATELIER react incorrectly. You should correct this displacement when necessary by performing calibration (repositioning).

1. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

2. In the System screen, touch . The Utility screen appears.

System Send PC Bank MS Bank LS PC Numb FactoryReset BMP Installer Panel Reset DiskToExtMem User Reset VIMA TUNES Touch Screen Video Exit Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch .

System Send PC Bank MS Bank LS PC Numb FactoryReset BMP Installer Panel Reset DiskToExtMem User Reset VIMA TUNES Touch Screen Video Exit Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

A display will ask for confirmation. To cancel the operation, touch .

1. Touch on the screen.
2. Touch the points indicated on the touch screen.

NOTE

Do this carefully, because touching a location that's different from the one indicated for the pointer may make the displacement even worse. Be sure to touch the pointer accurately. If the following display appears, perform the touch panel position adjustment once again.

Designated positions are incorrect. Close

Restoring the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings

You can restore the User memory to their original factory settings.

This function is called "User Memory Reset."

What is User Memory?

"User Memory" refers to an area inside the instrument where you can store the user Rhythms you create and the performances you record. Rhythms and SMF music files saved on USB memory can also be copied to User memory (p. 99).

User memory is quite useful, since anything you place there will be retained even while the power is turned off. The following things are stored in User memory:

• Songs you've registered in "Favorites"
• Rhythms
• Registration sets

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The System screen appears.

System P.1/7 Send PC Switch OFF Bank MSB 0 Bank LSB 0 PC Number 1 Exit Utility J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. In the System screen, touch to open the Utility screen.

System Send PC Bank MS Bank LS PC Numb FactoryReset BMP Installer Panel Reset DiskToExtMem User Reset VIMA TUNES Touch Screen Video Exit Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. In the Utility screen, touch .

Systet Send PC Bank MS Bank LS PC Numb FactoryReset BMP Installer Panel Reset DiskToExtMem User Reset VIMA TUNES Touch Screen Video Exit Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

The confirmation message appears on screen.

Reset User Memory OK? Cancel OK

Touch to return to the System screen without resetting the User memory.

4. Touch .

The User memory will be reset to the factory-set state.

NOTE

Never switch off the power while this operation is in progress!

Executing...

MEMO

To reset all settings other than User memory to their original factory settings, refer to p. 234. If you want to reset all settings to their factory-set state, refer to p. 27.

Restoring All Settings Other Than the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings

You can restore all of the settings other than the User memory (p. 84) to their original factory settings.

This function is called "Panel Reset."

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The System screen appears.

System P.1/7 Send PC Switch OFF Bank MSB 0 Bank LSB 0 PC Number 1 Exit Utility J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. In the System screen, touch to open the Utility screen.

System Send PC Bank MS Bank LS PC Numb FactoryReset BMP Installer Panel Reset DiskToExtMem User Reset VIMA TUNES Touch Screen Video Exit Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. In the Utility screen, touch .

System Send PC Bank MS Bank LS PC Numb FactoryReset BMP Installer Panel Reset DiskToExtMem User Reset VIMA TUNES Touch Screen Video Exit Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

The confirmation message appears on screen.

Panel Reset OK? Cancel OK

If you touch , the Panel Reset will not be performed, and you will return to the System screen.

4. Touch .

The Panel Reset operation will begin, and the settings will return to the factory-set condition.

NOTE

Never switch off the power while this operation is in progress!

Executing...

MEMO

To reset only the User memory to its original factory settings, refer to p. 233. If you want to reset all settings to their factory-set state, refer to p. 27.

MEMO

You can also use the following method to open the Panel Reset confirmation screen.

1. Touch on the Main screen, to display the Quick Guide screen.

2. Press the [Harmony Intelligence] button.

The Panel Reset confirmation screen appears.

Formatting a USB Memory (Format)

The process of preparing USB memory or floppy disks so that they can be used with the ATELIER is called "initialization" (formatting).

In certain cases, particularly with floppy disks, the media is formatted for a specific type of device. If the media format does not match the ATELIER's, you will not be able to use that media with the ATELIER.

1. Connect the USB memory to the External Memory connector

If you want to initialize a floppy disk, connect your floppy disk drive (sold separately) to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the floppy disk.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

2. Touch .

The Registration Save screen appears.

1. Touch < >> > to select the media.

Choose "Ext Memory" if you want to initialize USB memory, or choose "Disk" if you want to initialize a floppy disk.

1. Touch < > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Format screen appears.

Format OK? Cancel OK

If you touch , you will return to the Registration Save screen without formatting.

1. Touch to start formatting.

When the format is finished, the Registration Save screen returns.

NOTE

Never attempt to remove the USB memory until formatting is complete.

Displaying a Graphic at Power-up

The ATELIER allows you to load a favorite graphic into internal memory, and have it be displayed when the power is turned on.

1. Use your computer to create a graphic image file that meets the following criteria:

Size	800 x 480 pixels
Color	24 bit colors
Format	Image saved in BMP format
Name	1–8 characters in length (lowercase is ok).A filename extension of “.BMP” must be added after the name.The following characters can be used to name an image.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 # $ % & ' ( ) - @ ~ { } ^ _![IMAGE] If you use a character that cannot be used in a name, it will be replaced by another character when displayed.

2. Using your computer, save the image that you want to load into the ATELIER on external media.

3. Connect the external media containing the image to the ATELIER.

If you're using USB memory, connect it to the External Memory connector. If you're using a floppy disk, connect the separately purchased floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector.

4. Touch on the Main screen.

The System screen appears.

5. In the System screen, touch .

System Send PC Bank MS Bank LS PC Numb FactoryReset BMP Installer Panel Reset DiskToExtMem User Reset VIMA TUNES Touch Screen Video Exit Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

6. Touch .

The BMP Installer screen appears.

BMP Installer Internal 01:Birthday.BMP 02:(Blank) 03:(Blank) View Load... Clear... Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

Display	Description
01-03	Images stored in internal memoryFor numbers at which no image is saved, "(Blank)" is shown.
View	The image stored in the ATELIER will be shown for a few seconds, allowing you to check the image.
Load...	Load an image from external media into internal memory.
Clear...	Delete an image from internal memory.

The ATELIER can store up to three images. If two or more images are stored in internal memory, those images will be displayed consecutively after the power is turned on.

7. In the screen, touch <01>-<03> to select the destination at which the image is to be saved.

BMP Installer Internal 01:Birthday.BMP 02:(Blank) 03:(Blank) View Load... Clear... Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

8. Touch .

The following screen appears.

BMP Installer 01:My-Dogs.BMP 02:SEASHORE.BMP 03:FAMILY.BMP 04:Friends.BMP 05:Birthday.BMP Media Ext Memory View Exit OK 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

9. Touch < >> < > to select the media.

Choose "Ext Memory" to load an image from USB memory, or choose "Disk" to load an image from floppy disk.

The destination will show the names of the images saved on the external media.

10. Touch <><> to select the image that you want to load into internal memory.

You can touch to verify the image.

11. Touch .

The image will be loaded.

If an image is already stored at the load destination, the following screen will appear.

Overwrite OK? Cancel OK

To erase the currently loaded image, and load the new image

1. Touch .

To cancel image loading

1. Touch .

If the image cannot be loaded, the following screen will appear.

Can't Read Close

Deleting an Image Stored in Internal Memory

1. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

2. In the System screen, touch .

Syste Send PC Bank MS Bank LS PC Numb FactoryReset BMP Installer Panel Reset DiskToExtMem User Reset VIMA TUNES Touch Screen Video Exit Exit Utility J=130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. Touch .

System Send PC Bank MS Bank LS PC Numb FactoryReset BMP Installer Panel Reset DiskToExtMem User Reset VIMA TUNES Touch Screen Video Exit Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

The BMP Installer screen appears.

BMP Installer Internal 01:Birthday.BMP 02:(Blank) 03:(Blank) View Load... Clear... Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

4. In the screen, touch <01>-<03> to select the image that you wish to delete.

You can touch to verify the image.

Numbers for which "(Blank)" is shown have no image.

5. Touch .

The following screen appears.

Clear BMP File OK? Cancel OK

To cancel without deleting the image, touch .

6. Touch .

The image will be deleted.

Once the image has been deleted, the screen will indicate "(Blank)."

Copying Data from a Floppy Disk to USB Memory

All songs and Registration data saved on a floppy disk can be copied to USB memory.

Rhythms and image data cannot be copied.

Songs and Registrations inside folders will not be copied. If you want to copy this data, move the song or Registration data out of the folder.

1. Make preparations for the copy.

Connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Memory connector. Into the floppy disk drive, insert the floppy disk containing the data you want to copy.

Connect your USB memory to the External Memory connector.

2. Touch on the Main screen.

The System screen appears.

3. In the System screen, touch .

System Send PC Bank MS Bank LS PC Numb FactoryReset BMP Installer Panel Reset DiskToExtMem User Reset VIMA TUNES Touch Screen Video Exit Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

4. Touch .

The following screen appears.

All songs and registrations on the disk will be copied to a newly created folder in external memory. Please enter a name for the folder.

If you decide to stop the data copy operation, touch .

5. Touch .

A screen like the one below appears, allowing you to specify a name for the folder.

FOLDER01 ABC/123 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Del Cancel ← → OK 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

If you're copying all songs and Registrations to USB memory, a folder will be created in the USB memory, and the data will be saved in this folder.

6. Touch the character select button (ABC/abc/1#% to switch among uppercase/numbers.

Touch the character select button repeatedly to cycle through the available choices, like this: uppercase → numbers → uppercase...

7. Touch the screen to specify the desired character.

The following characters can be selected.

Uppercase	A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Symbols	_0123456789
	Deletes a character.
	Move the cursor (the symbol that indicates the location at which characters will be input) to left or right.

To cancel the operation, touch .

8. When you're done making the settings, touch .

The folder name has been assigned. The following screen appears.

Duplication of music data for any purpose other than personal enjoyment without permission from the copyright owner is forbidden by law. OK

9. Touch .

The data from floppy disk will be copied to USB memory. When the copy is completed, a message will indicate "Completed," and you will return to the System screen.

If the floppy disk drive or USB memory is not connected correctly, a screen like the following will appear.

fig.+++++

The floppy disk or external memory is not connected correctly.

Video-related Settings

Specifying the Television Format

Set the ATELIER's television format to match the television format of the television, video camera, or DVD player that is connected.

Change this setting if the image is not correctly shown on the television, or if the image from your video camera or DVD player is not displayed correctly.

Set this to the broadcast format used in your area.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The System screen appears.

2. Touch .

FactoryReset BMP Installer Panel Reset DiskToExtMem User Reset VIMA TUNES Touch Screen Video PC Numb Exit Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. Touch

The Video screen appears.

Video Video Camera DVD Ext In SlideShow Lyrics Exit Option J=190 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

4. Touch .

The Video Option screen appears.

Video Options P.1/1 NTSC/PAL NTSC Aspect Ratio 16:9 Slide Show Type MIX Slide Show Interval 8 SECONDS Exit

5. Touch the NTSC/PAL setting to switch between "NTSC" and "PAL."

Setting

NTSC, PAL

NTSC and PAL

Both of these are the names of color television broadcast standards.

NTSC is used in North America and a number of other countries including Japan. PAL is used in many regions, including Europe and Asia.

6. Touch .

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Selecting the Aspect Ratio of the Video Output

This setting changes the proportional relationship between the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the image that is output from the ATELIER to the television or display connected to the Video Output [Video] jack.

The ATELIER's display screen has a horizontal/vertical ratio of 16:9. Televisions and displays have screen sizes with a horizontal/vertical ratio of 4:3 or 16:9 (wide screen).

You can't change the aspect ratio of the image that is output from the Video Output [RGB] connector to an external display or a television.

If you're viewing images on a television or display connected to the Video Output [Video] jack, change this setting as appropriate for the aspect ratio of the television or display you've connected.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The System screen appears.

2. Touch .

System Send PC Bank MS Bank LS PC Numt FactoryReset BMP Installer Panel Reset DiskToExtMem User Reset VIMA TUNES Touch Screen Video Exit Exit Utility -130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

3. Touch

The Video screen appears.

Video Video Camera DVD Ext In SlideShow Lyrics Exit Option 190 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

4. Touch .

The Video Option screen appears.

Video Options P.1/1 NTSC/PAL NTSC Aspect Ratio 16:9 Slide Show Type MIX Slide Show Interval 8 SECONDS Exit

5. Touch the Aspect Ratio setting to switch between "16:9" and "4:3."

Setting	Description
16:9	Use this setting if the connected television or display has a screen aspect ratio of 16:9.
4:3	Use this setting if the connected television or display has a screen aspect ratio of 4:3.

6. Touch .

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

◎ Image is displayed correctly

graph TD
    A["Original image"] -->|4:3| B["4:3 Television"]
    A -->|16:9| C["16:9 Television"]

✗ Image is distorted ImageXs not completely visible

Two computer monitors side by side, one with a circular design and the other with a circle (no text or symbols)

If the image is still not shown correctly even though you have adjusted the ATELIER's aspect ratio to match the television or display you've connected, please change the settings of the connected television or display.

Selecting the Type of Slide Show

You can specify how transitions between images are to occur when you play back a slide show (p. 269).

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The System screen appears.

1. Touch .

System Send PC Bank MS Bank LS PC Numb FactoryReset BMP Installer Panel Reset DiskToExtMem User Reset VIMA TUNES Touch Screen Video Exit Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch

The Video screen appears.

Video Video Camera DVD Ext In SlideShowLyrics Exit Option J=190 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch .

The Video Option screen appears.

Video Options P.1/1 NTSC/PAL NTSC Aspect Ratio 16:9 Slide Show Type MIX Slide Show Interval 8 SECONDS Exit

5. Touch the Slide Show Type setting.

Video Options P.1/1 NTSC/PAI NTSC Aspect MIX Factory + Slide Sh Slide Sh Exit Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main Exit

6. Touch < >> < > to change the setting.

Setting	Description
SIMPLE	One photo will simply fade-out while the next photo fades-in.
BLOCK	The photo will be divided into blocks that change separately.
POP	The photo will switch using rapid movement and color combination.
MIX	Simple, block, and pop types will be combined.

7. Touch .

Selecting the Interval at which Images will Change

You can specify the interval at which images will change when you play back a slide show (p. 269).

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The System screen appears.

1. Touch .

System Send PC Bank MS Bank LS PC Numb FactoryReset BMP Installer Panel Reset DiskToExtMem User Reset VIMA TUNES Touch Screen Video Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch

The Video screen appears.

Video Video Camera DVD Ext In SlideShow Lyrics Exit Option 190 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch .

The Video Option screen appears.

Video Options P.1/1 NTSC/PAL NTSC Aspect Ratio 16:9 Slide Show Type MIX Slide Show Interval 8 SECONDS Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch the Slide Show Interval setting.

Video Options P.1/1 NTSC/PAI NTSC Aspect 8 SECONDS Slide Sh - Factory + Slide Sh Exit S ONDS Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch < >> < > to change the setting.

Setting

5 SECONDS, 8 SECONDS, 12 SECONDS,4 MEASURES, 6 MEASURES, 8 MEASURES

1. Touch .

Viewing the Contents of the ATELIER's Screen on a Television or a External Display

You can use your television or external display to view the contents of the ATELIER's built-in screen.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The System screen appears.

1. Touch <▶◀> to display the Screen Out.

System P.7/7 V-LINK OFF Screen Out OFF Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch the Screen Out setting to switch between "ON" and "OFF."

Setting Description
ON	The contents of the ATELIER's screen will be shown on your television or external display.
OFF	The contents of the ATELIER's screen will not be shown on your television or external display. The ATELIER logo will be shown.

NOTE

The image specified in the Video screen (p. 259) will be given priority when the image is displayed. If you want the ATELIER's own screen to be shown on your television or external display, turn off all settings in the Video screen.

1. Touch .

Name and Functions of Jack and Connectors

Phones Mic Volume Mic MIDI USB 1 2 3 Out In 5 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 L/Mono R L/Mono R L/Mono R Aux/Drums Bass L/Mono R Camera RGB Video On Main Output Input Video In Video Out Illumination

The functions of the jacks on the bottom of the keyboard are described below.

1. Phones Jacks > p. 25

Connect headphones here.

1. Mic Volume Knob > p. 25

This adjusts the volume when a microphone is connected.

1. Mic Jack → p. 25

Connect microphone here.

1. MIDI Out/In Connectors → p. 248

You can connect external MIDI devices to the ATELIER and exchange performance data between them.

1. USB Connector → p. 246

Used for connecting a computer to the ATELIER using a USB cable.

Output

1. Main L/Mono, R Jacks

These jacks can be connected to your audio system to enjoy more powerful sound.

If the Aux Out mode is set to "SEPARATE," sounds other than drums and bass will be output from these jacks (p. 251).

1. Aux/Drums L/Mono, R Jacks

You can connect an external speaker or a reverb unit to obtain a more spacious reverb.

If you set Aux Out mode to "SEPARATE," the drum sound will be output from these jacks (p. 251).

1. Bass Jack

If you set Aux Out mode to "SEPARATE," the bass sound will be output from this jack (p. 251).

Input

1. Input L/Mono, R Jacks

Using these jacks, you can connect other sound generating devices or audio equipment and play sounds from other devices through the ATELIER's speaker.

Video In

1. Camera Jack > p. 260

A video camera or other device can be connected here.

Video Out

11.RGB Connector → p. 249

You can connect an external display here to view images from a video camera or DVD.

1. Video Jack → p. 250

You can connect a television here to view images from a video camera or DVD.

13.Illumination Switch

Press this switch to turn on the illumination.

Connecting to Audio Equipment

You can connect audio devices to play the sound of the ATELIER through the speakers of your audio system, or to record your performance on a tape recorder or other recording device.

When connecting, please use an audio cable with a standard phone plug, such as the PCS-100PW (sold separately).

Connecting Speakers to the ATELIER and Outputting Sounds

L/Mono Main R Output L/Mono Aux/Drums R Bass Input (Line In) jack

1. Turn the volume all the way down on the ATELIER and on the speaker you're about to connect.
2. Turn off the power to the ATELIER and the speaker.
3. Use audio cables (sold separately) to make the connection.
4. Switch on the ATELIER.
5. Switch on the connected speaker.
6. Adjust the volume level on the ATELIER and the connected speaker.

When you play the ATELIER's keyboard, the sound is played from the connected speakers.

* When connection cables with resistors are used, the volume level of equipment connected to the input jacks may be low. If this happens, use connection cables that do not contain resistors.
* To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections.

Turning Off the Power

1. Turn the volume all the way down on the ATELIER and on the speaker you're about to connect.
2. Turn off the connected speaker.
3. Turn off the ATELIER.

Playing Sounds from Audio Equipment Through the ATELIER

L/Mono R Camera RGB Input Video In Video C Stereo Set etc. Output (Line Out) jack

1. Turn the volume all the way down on the ATELIER and on the audio device you're about to connect.

2. Turn off the power to the ATELIER and the audio device.

3. Use audio cables (sold separately) to make the connection.
4. Switch on the audio device.
5. Switch on the ATELIER.
6. Adjust the volume level on the ATELIER and the audio device.

The sounds from the connected audio device are played by the ATELIER.

Turning Off the Power

1. Turn the volume all the way down on the ATELIER and on the audio device you're about to connect.
2. Turn off the ATELIER.
3. Turn off the audio device.

Connecting an amp to produce sound (AT-900C)

The rear panel of the AT-900C provides balanced (XLR) output jacks.

You can connect these jacks to your amp or mixer to produce sound.

- This instrument is equipped with balanced (XLR) type jacks. Wiring diagrams for these jacks are shown below. Make connections after first checking the wiring diagrams of other equipment you intend to connect.

Roland 1:GND 2:HOT 3:COLD Balanced Out

Connecting a Computer

The following become possible once you connect a USB cable (available separately) between the USB connector located to the lower left of the ATELIER and the USB connector of your computer.

• You can use the ATELIER to play sounds from SMF music files played back with MIDI software.
• By exchanging MIDI data with sequencer software, you can save songs recorded with the ATELIER to your computer, and enjoy a variety of musical control and editing features.

Connect the ATELIER to your computer as shown below.

MIDI Out In USB USB Cable USB Connector Computer

* Refer to the Roland website for system requirements. Roland website: http://www.roland.com/

If connection to your computer is unsuccessful...

Normally, you don't need to install a driver in order to connect the ATELIER to your computer. However, if some problem occurs, or if the performance is poor, using the Roland original driver may solve the problem. For details on downloading and installing the Roland original driver, refer to the Roland website.

Specify the USB driver you want to use, and then install the driver.

Roland website: http://www.roland.com/

Specify the USB driver you want to use for ATELIER, and then install the driver.

Caution

• To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections.
• Only MIDI data can be transmitted using USB.
• USB cables are not included. Consult your Roland dealer if you need to purchase.
• Turn on the power to the ATELIER before starting up MIDI applications on the computer. Do not turn the ATELIER on or off while any MIDI application is running.

Making the Settings for the USB Driver

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The System screen appears.

1. Touch <><> to display the USB Driver.

System USB Driver GENERIC Remote Control ON Remote Ctrl: FUNC1 LYRICS Remote Ctrl: FUNC2 MELODY MUTE Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch the USB Driver setting to switch between "GENERIC" and "ORIGINAL."

Each time you touch the USB Driver setting, it will alternate between "GENERIC" and "ORIGINAL."

Setting	Description
GENERIC	Choose this if you want to use the standard USB driver that was included with your computer. Normally, you should use this mode.
ORIGINAL	Choose this if you want to use a USB driver downloaded from the Roland website.

1. Turn the ATELIER's volume to the minimum level, switch off the power, then turn it back on again.

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Connecting MIDI Devices

By connecting an external MIDI device and exchanging performance data, you can control the performances on one device from the other. For instance, you can output sound from the other instrument or switch Tones on the other instrument.

What's MIDI?

MIDI, short for "Musical Instrument Digital Interface," was developed as a standard for the exchange of performance data between electronic instruments and computers. The ATELIER is equipped with MIDI connectors to let it exchange performance data with external devices. These connectors can be used to connect the ATELIER to an external device for even greater versatility.

About MIDI Connectors

The ATELIER has two kinds of MIDI connectors.

Connecting these to the MIDI connectors on a MIDI instrument makes it possible for the two instruments to control each other. For instance, you can output sound from the other instrument or switch tones on the other instrument.

You should also set the MIDI send channel as needed.

MIDI Out In

MIDI Out Connector

Connect the external MIDI device to the MIDI IN connector with an optional MIDI cable. The notes played on the keyboard, movements of the Damper pedal, Expression data, data indicating that a Registration button, etc., was pressed will be transmitted to the external MIDI connector. The Solo voice will be transmitted only if the Solo [To Lower] button is ON.

MIDI In Connector

Connect the external MIDI device to the MIDI out connector with an optional MIDI cable. Performance messages from an external MIDI device are received here.

These incoming messages may instruct the receiving MIDI instrument to play sounds or switch voices.

The ATELIER contains two sound generators: one sound generator for its own keyboards and one GM2/GS sound generator (p. 285). Normally, musical data transmitted from an external device to the MIDI In connector is sent to the GM2/GS sound generator, but you can also set the "MIDI IN Mode" parameter (p. 226) so that the keyboard sound generator is controlled.

Making the Connections

NOTE

When connecting, turn on power to your various devices in the order specified. Failure to follow these steps in the order given could cause a malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other equipment.

1. Turn the volume all the way down on the ATELIER and on the device you're about to connect.
2. Switch off the power to the ATELIER and the device you're about to connect.
3. Use a MIDI cable (sold separately) to connect the MIDI connectors to each other.
4. Switch on the power to the ATELIER and the connected device.
5. Adjust the volume level on the ATELIER and the connected device.
6. You should also set the MIDI send channel as needed (p. 227).

Connecting an External Display or Television

Connecting an External Display

In Video Out RGB Video On Illumination Display Cable (commercial available) External Display

Displays That Can Be Connected to This Instrument

In general, a great many of the VGA monitors and multiscan monitors that are available on the market are compatible with this instrument. However, before you connect any monitor, make sure it meets the following specifications:

Resolution	800 x 480 pixels
Horizontal scan frequency	31.5 kHz
Vertical scan frequency	60 Hz
Connector	3-row, 15-pin D-Sub type
Signal	Analog

Confirm that the display to be used is compatible with the frequencies mentioned above. Using a display that is not compatible with the above frequencies may result in incorrect image output when images move, and in certain cases may even damage the display.

Making the Connections

To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections.

1. Turn off the power to the ATELIER and the display to be connected (p. 24).
2. Connect your display to the ATELIER.

Use display cable (sold separately) to connect the display to the Video Out RGB connector on the ATELIER.

1. Switch on the ATELIER (p. 24).
2. Switch on the connected display.

For more on handling the external display, refer to your display's owner's manual.

Connecting a Television

Making the Connections

ra RGB Video On In —— Video Out —— Illumination Video Cable (commercial available) Television

NOTE

To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections.

1. Turn off the power to the ATELIER and the television to be connected (p. 24).
2. Connect your television to the ATELIER. Use a video cable (sold separately) to connect the ATELIER Video Out Video jack with the television's video input jack.
3. Switch on the ATELIER (p. 24).
4. Switch on the connected display.
5. (As necessary) Specify the television output format (p. 239).
6. Specify the aspect ratio (ratio between width and height) for your television (p. 240).

Switching Off Your Television or External Display

You must turn off the power of the television or external display in the following order.

1. Minimize the volume of the ATELIER (p. 24).
2. Switch off the connected television or display.
3. Switch off the ATELIER (p. 24).

Changing the settings when external speakers are connected

The ATELIER has an Aux/Drums Output jack and Bass Output jack on the bottom of the instrument.

By using this Aux/Drums Output jack to connect external speakers or audio set, you can sound the reverb (reverberation) from the speakers. An external reverb unit can also be connected and used to apply reverb.

By making connections to the Aux/Drums Output jacks or Bass Output jack, you can output the drums or bass sounds separately. This is convenient when you've connected the ATELIER to a mixer so that the overall volume balance can be adjusted on the mixer.

Switching the Aux Out On/OFF

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The System screen appears.

System P.4/7 Tx MIDI Ch. M.Perc 13 Tx MIDI Ch. Ctrl 16 Aux Out ON Aux Out Mode AMBIENCE Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

2. Touch <>><>to display the Aux Out.

3. Touch the Aux Out setting to switch between "ON" and "OFF."

Each time you touch the Aux Out setting, it will alternate between "ON" and "OFF."

4. Touch .

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Switching the Aux Out Mode

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The System screen appears.

1. Touch <> < > to display the Aux Out Mode.

2. Touch the Aux Out Mode setting.

System P.4/7 Tx MIDI Ob M Perc 13 Tx MIDI Aux Ou Aux Ou TO EFFECTOR Factory + Exit ECTOR Exit Utility Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch <> < > to change the setting.

Setting	Effects
AMBIENCE	Play the RSS reverb sound from the external speakersThe reverb sound applied by the ATELIER will be output.
TO EFFECTOR	Connect an external reverb processor and use it to apply the desired reverb.The direct sound is output for applying reverb.
SEPARATE	Use a connected mixer to adjust the volume balanceBass, drums, and other sounds will be output separately.If the vintage organ type is “Flute,” the bass sound will not be output from the Bass output jack. The bass sound will be output from the Main Output jacks.
ENSEMBLE	The accompaniment and Rhythm will be heard from external speakers, creating the sensation that you’re playing with an orchestraThe sounds you play on the keyboard will be heard from the ATELIER’s own speakers, and the accompaniment will be heard from the speakers that are connected to the Aux/Drums Output connector.

5. Touch .

You can change the depth of Reverb for each part (p. 154).

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

A Setup for a Small Hall or Home

Speakers are placed at the back to produce the RSS reverb sound. This setup lets you enjoy the sensation of being enveloped by sound, even while in your own living room.

Aux Out : ON Aux Out Mode: AMBIENCE

AT-900/AT-900C Aux/Drums Output Rear Speaker L Rear Speaker R

Powered Speaker Powered Speaker

A Setup for a Mid-sized Hall

Speakers are placed in front and in the back to produce the RSS reverb sound.

Aux Out : ON Aux Out Mode: AMBIENCE

graph TD
    A["Front Speaker L"] --> B["Main Output"]
    C["Front Speaker R"] --> D["Aux/Drums Output"]
    E["Rear Speaker L"] --> F["Amplifier"]
    G["Rear Speaker R"] --> H["Amplifier"]
    B --> I["AT-900/AT-900C"]
    D --> I
    H --> I
    I --> J["RAM"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#dfd,stroke:#333

Settings for Using an External Reverb Processor

You can use an external reverb processor to apply reverb to the ATELIER's sound.

Aux Out : ON

Aux Out Mode: TO EFFECTOR

graph TD
    A["Front Speaker L"] --> B["Main Output"]
    C["Front Speaker R"] --> D["Aux/Drums Output"]
    B --> E["Amplifier"]
    D --> E
    E --> F["External Reverb Device"]
    F --> G["Line Input"]
    F --> H["Line Output"]
    F --> I["Amplifier"]
    I --> J["Rear Speaker RR"]
    K["AT-900/AT-900C"] --> B
    K --> D
    K --> F
    K --> H
    K --> I

A Setup for a Recital

Bass, drums, and other sounds are output separately, and a mixer is used to adjust the volume balance.

Aux Out : ON Aux Out Mode: SEPARATE

graph TD
    A["AT-900/AT-900C"] --> B["Main Output"]
    B --> C["Mixer"]
    C --> D["Speaker RSpeaker L"]
    A --> E["Roland"]
    C --> F["RAD"]
    A --> G["Aux/Drums Output"]
    G --> H["Bass Output"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#ffc,stroke:#333

A Setup for Enjoying Ensemble Performance

By producing the accompaniment and rhythm from external speakers, you can enjoy the sensation of performing together with an orchestra.

Aux Out : ON Aux Out Mode: ENSEMBLE

AT-900/AT-900C Aux/Drums Output Accompaniment and rhythm L Accompaniment and rhythm R

Powered Speaker Powered Speaker

Using the Remote

You can use the included remote control to conveniently play/stop a song or to select songs.

You can also use the remote to switch the image of the external display or television, or assign frequently used functions to the remote buttons.

Installing Batteries in the Remote

Install the included batteries (two) into the remote control unit.

1. 2.3 (Rear) Remote Cover + - + + + + + ↑

1. Slide the cover located on the rear of the remote to open it.
2. Insert the two AA batteries in the orientation shown on the remote.
3. Slide the cover closed.

For details on how the remote control's buttons function, refer to "Remote Control Buttons" (p. 257)

Be sure to observe the correct polarity (+, -) for each battery.

Using the Remote

When using the remote, point it toward the remote sensor on the ATELIER, and stay within the allowable operating range described below.

Front View Remote Sensor Over View Operating range for the remote Distance: 4 meters or less Angle: 40 degrees or less (to left or right) Remote

Cautions when using the remote

• You can't operate two or more of the remote's buttons simultaneously.
• Even if the remote is within the operating range, it may not work if there are obstacles between it and the remote sensor, or if the angle is poor.
• Malfunctions may occur if you use the remote near a device that produces infrared light, or if you use another infrared remote control nearby.
• The battery life will depend on the conditions of use. The operating range will decrease as the batteries run down. Replace the batteries if this occurs.
• If you won't be using the remote for an extended period, remove the batteries.
• If a strong light such as a spotlight strikes the remote sensor, the remote control may respond sluggishly.

Remote Control Buttons

You can use the buttons of the remote control to perform the following functions.

EJECT VOCAL CANCEL VIDEO TONE SONG INTERNAL FAVORITES EXTERNAL VOLUME MUTE III III - + - - - FUNC 1 - TEMPO + - FUNC 2 - KEY CTRL + Roland

	Button name	Explanation
1	[EJECT] button	If a CD drive is connected, this ejects the CD or opens/closes the tray.
2	[VOCAL] button	Adjusts the depth of mic echo.Each time you press the button, the mic echo depth will change. 4 8 12 0 4 ...
3	[VIDEO] button	Switches the image shown in the connected external display or television. Images from a video camera, digital camera, DVD player, or video-enabled audio player connected to the ATELIER can be shown on an external display or television. You can also connect a CD drive and play back VIMA TUNES to view an appropriate slide show (p. 269) while listening to the song.The Video screen is shown in the ATELIER's display.Camera → DVD → Ext In (External Input) → Slide Show → Off (Video function is turned off) → Camera ...
4	[CANCEL] button	If you have used the [VOCAL] button, [VIDEO] button, or [TONE] button to change the settings, this will return the settings to their factory-set state.
5	[TONE] button The reverb	depth will change each time you press the button.
6	SONG [INTERNAL] button	The demo screen will be displayed.
	SONG [FAVORITES] button	Selects songs from "Favorites."
	SONG [EXTERNAL] button	Selects songs from an external media (USB memory or floppy disk). If external media is connected both to the External Memory connector and to the Ext Drive connector, pressing this button toggles you between these two sources of media. In this case, "Ext Memory1" is indicated for the external media connected to the external media connector, and "Ext Memory2" is indicated for the external media connected to the Ext Drive connector.* This button won't work if no external media is connected.
7	[ ] button	Pressing the [ ] button selects the preceding song.
	[ ] button	Plays/stops the song.Press the remote [ ] button to toggle the song between playing and stopped.When you press the remote [ ] button, songs will play back consecutively from the selected song. All songs in the selected location (favorites or external media) will play back in succession. Playback will stop when you press the remote [ ] button once again.
	[ ] button Press the [ ] button to select the next song.
8	VOLUME [MUTE] button Temporarily mutes all sounds.
	VOLUME [-] [+] buttons	Adjust the overall volume of the Atelier.Pressing the VOLUME [-] button decreases the volume, and pressing the VOLUME [+] button increases the volume.
9	[FUNC 1] button	Executes the function you've assigned to this button.You can change the function that's assigned to the button (p. 230).With the factory settings, "LYRICS" is assigned to this button.
	[FUNC 2] button	Executes the function you've assigned to this button.You can change the function that's assigned to this button (p. 230).With the factory settings, "Melody Mute" is assigned to this button.
10	TEMPO [-] [+] buttons	Adjust the tempo of the song.Pressing the TEMPO [-] button slows down the tempo, and pressing the TEMPO [+] button speeds up the tempo.* You can't change the tempo of a music CD.
11	KEY CTRL (key control)[-] [+] buttons	Change the key of the song that's playing.Pressing the KEY CTRL [-] button will lower the key, and pressing the KEY CTRL [+] button will raise the key.→Playback Transpose (p. 220)

Enjoying Music and Video

You can connect an external display or television to the ATELIER, and use it to view images from a device connected to the ATELIER.

You can also connect a CD drive (commercially available) and play back VIMA TUNES (sold separately). While playing a VIMA TUNES song, you can use the external display or television to view a slide show suitable for the character of the song, or play along using recommended tones.

Video Screen

In the System Utility screen, touch

Switches the image shown in the external display or television. Video Video Camera DVD Ext In SlideShow Lyrics Exit Option J = 190 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

Opens a screen with video-related settings.Switches the display of lyrics on/off.

VIMA TUNES Screen

In the Video screen, touch to access the "VIMA TUNES screen" shown below.

VIMA TUNES In the Mood Video Camera DVD Ext In SlideShow Lyrics Playback Transpose Melody - 0 + Mute Guide Recommended In SMF Vibraphone Oboe Tenor Sax2 Exit Options Change the key of the song that's playing Sounds appropriate for the currently playing VIMA TUNES song will be selected automatically.

VIMA TUNES is a Roland specification for music files that contains image and lyric data, allowing you to enjoy songs with lyrics and images simultaneously. When data bearing the "VIMA TUNES" logo is played back on a device that bears the same logo, lyrics can be shown on the screen of a connected external display or television, letting you enjoy karaoke or watch a slide show.

You can also access the "VIMA TUNES screen" from the "Rec/Play screen"(p. 166).

Performing with a Background Image from a Video Camera

The image from your video camera can be shown on an external display or a television connected to the ATELIER. In the large external screen, you show yourself performing in real time, or show a video you've taken of your family for everyone to enjoy.

1. Connect your video camera.

If you want to connect a video camera, connect it to the Camera In connector located in the jack panel on the left of the ATELIER's bottom surface.

Mono R Camera RGB Video On Input Video In Video Out Illumination Visual

For details, refer to the owner's manual of your video camera.

NOTE

Video camera cables can differ depending on the model. Check the shape of the connector on the ATELIER and on your video camera, and make sure you have the correct type of cable when making connections.

NOTE

Make sure that the video camera you're connecting matches the television format selected on the ATELIER. For details on setting the television format of your video camera, refer to the owner's manual for your video camera. For details on setting the ATELIER's television format, refer to "Specifying the Television Format" (p. 239).

MEMO

The right side of the AT-900C's back panel has a screw hole for fastening the camera stand (BST-RK500).

2. Turn on the video function.

Press the [Camera] button so it's lit.

Video Input Camera DVD Ext In

3. Prepare your video camera.

Turn on the power of your video camera. The image that's being captured or played back by your video camera will appear on the external display or television connected to the ATELIER.

Perform or sing along with the background image from your video camera.

Turning Off the Video Function

4. Press the lit [Camera] button, turning off its illumination.

If none of the video function select buttons (p. 266) are lit, the external display or television will show the ATELIER logo or the screen that the ATELIER itself is showing (p. 243).

If you press the [Video Monitor] button located below the display, the ATELIER's display will show the same image as the external display or television. This is a convenient way for you to monitor the image that's shown in the external display or television.

For details, refer to the owner's manual of your video camera.

If SMF music files with lyrics is playing back, you can touch on the Video screen to display the song lyrics over the background image from the video camera.

Performing with a Background Image from a DVD Player

You can connect your DVD player and use an external display or a television connected to the ATELIER to show the image from the DVD player while listening to the music or narration through the ATELIER's speakers. You can also temporarily mute the DVD's sound on the ATELIER and perform to the DVD's background video, or decrease the melody portion and sing the melody yourself.

1. Turn the DVD Player In [Volume] knob all the way to the left so that the volume is minimized.
2. Connect your DVD player.

If you want to connect your DVD player and display its video image, connect it to the DVD Player In connector of the ATELIER's.

If you want to hear the audio from the DVD player, connect your DVD player's audio output jacks of the ATELIER.

graph TD
    A["Video jack"] -->|Visual| B["WhiteRed"]
    B --> C["AUDIO L/R jacks"]
    C --> D["Audio"]
    D --> E["WhiteRed"]
    E --> F["Volume"]
    F --> G["DVD Player In"]
    G --> H["Video"]
    H --> I["Max Min R L Video"]
    I --> J["Volume"]

1. Turn on the video function.

Press the video function select [DVD] button so it's lit.

Video Input Camera DVD Ext In

For details, refer to the owner's manual of your DVD player.

For the AT-900C, detach the cover from the rear panel (p.27).

DVD player cables can differ depending on the model. Check the shape of the connector on the ATELIER, and make sure you have the correct type of cable when making connections.

You can also connect your DVD player to the ATELIER's Camera connector or Ext In connector and view the video from your DVD player on the external display or television.

Make sure that the DVD player you're connecting matches the television format selected on the ATELIER.

For details on setting the television format of your DVD player, refer to the owner's manual for your DVD player. For details on setting the ATELIER's television format, refer to "Specifying the Television Format"(p. 239).

4. Play back your DVD player.

The external display or television connected to the ATELIER will show the video being played by the DVD player. The audio from the DVD player will be played back through the ATELIER's speakers.

5. Adjust the DVD volume.

To adjust the volume of the DVD, turn the DVD Player In [Volume] knob of the ATELIER. If you turn the DVD Player In [Volume] all the way toward the left, there will be no sound from the DVD.

MAX MIN R L Video Volume DVD Player In

6. To minimize the sound of the vocal on the DVD, proceed as follows.

1. Touch on the Main screen.
2. Touch on the System screen.
3. Touch .
4. Touch Melody .

This will decrease the vocal (melody) portion of the music from the DVD, allowing you to sing or play it yourself.

Turning Off the Video Function

7. Press the lit [DVD] button to turn off its illumination.

If none of the video function select buttons (p. 266) are lit, the external display or television will show the ATELIER logo or the screen that the ATELIER itself is showing (p. 243).

* If you connect a device (such as a video camera) that contains a microphone to the ATELIER's DVD Player In (Video, L/R) connector, acoustic feedback (a whine or shriek) may occur depending on the position of your video camera relative to the speakers. If this occurs, take the following actions.

• Change the orientation of the video camera
• Move the video camera away from the speakers
• Lower the volume

For details, refer to the owner's manual of your DVD player.

If you press the [Video Monitor] button located below the display, the ATELIER's display will show the same image as the external display or television. This is a convenient way for you to monitor the image that's shown in the external display or television.

You can change the pitch of the DVD player's sound. For details, refer to "Transposing the Song to a Comfortable Key for Singing" (p. 273).

Enjoying Powerful Sound and Big-screen Playback from Your Portable Audio/Video Player

If your portable audio player has video capability, you can connect it so the video is shown on the external display or television and the music is heard from the ATELIER's speakers.

1. Set the [Master Volume] slider to Min so that the volume is minimized.
2. Connect your portable audio/video player.

When connecting your portable audio/video player, connect it to the ATELIER's Ext In (Video, L, R) jacks. Use the type of jacks that are appropriate for the cables you're using.

Portable audio player with video functionality Video L R Video Yellow L White Red

1. Turn on the video function.

Press the video function select [Ext In] button so it's lit.

Video Input Camera DVD Ext In

MEMO

For details, refer to the owner's manual of your portable audio player.

NOTE

Make sure that the portable audio player you're connecting matches the television format selected on the ATELIER. For details on setting the television format of your portable audio player, refer to the owner's manual for portable audio player. For details on setting the ATELIER's television format, refer to "Specifying the Television Format"(p. 239).

4. Play back your portable audio/video player.

The external display or television connected to the ATELIER will show the image from your portable audio/video player. The sound from your player will be heard from the ATELIER's speakers.

5. Turn the [Master Volume] slider to adjust the volume.

6. To minimize the sound of the vocal on the portable audio/video player, proceed as follows.

1. Touch on the Main screen.
2. Touch on the System screen.
3. Touch .
4. Touch Melody .
   This will decrease the vocal (melody) portion of the music from the portable audio player, allowing you to sing or play it yourself.

Turning Off the Video Function

7. Press the lit [Ext In] button to turn off its illumination.

If none of the video function select buttons (p. 266) are lit, the external display or television will show the ATELIER logo or the screen that the ATELIER itself is showing (p. 243).

For details, refer to the owner's manual of your portable audio player.

If you press the [Video Monitor] button located below the display, the ATELIER's display will show the same image as the external display or television. This is a convenient way for you to monitor the image that's shown in the external display or television.

You can change the pitch of the portable audio/video player's sound. For details, refer to "Transposing the Song to a Comfortable Key for Singing"(p. 273).

Freely Switching Between Images

You can connect various video devices to the ATELIER, and then use the video function select buttons on the ATELIER's panel to freely control the image that's shown on the external display or television.

Video Function Select Buttons

Video Input Camera DVD Ext In

This refers to the following buttons.

[Camera] button

[DVD] button

[Ext In] button

1. Connect a variety of video devices to the ATELIER.

Connecting a video camera → p. 260

Connecting a DVD player→p. 262

Connecting a portable audio/video player → p. 264

2. Press the video function select buttons to switch the image shown in the external display or television.

Button Function Page
Camera	Switches to the image from the device connected to the Camera In connector.	p. 260
DVD	Switches to the image from the device connected to the DVD Player In connector.	p. 262
Ext In	Switches to the image from the device connected to the Ext In connector.	p. 264

Turning off the Video function

1. Press video function select buttons to extinguish the indicators for all of the buttons.

If none of the video function select buttons are lit, the external display or television will show the ATELIER logo or the screen that the ATELIER itself is showing (p. 243).

You can also switch the image by touching the video function select buttons in the Video screen or the VIMA TUNES screen (p. 259).

Enjoying VIMA TUNES Songs

Listening to a VIMA TUNES Song

You can connect a CD drive (commercially available) and play back VIMA TUNES (sold separately). While playing a VIMA TUNES song, you can use the external display or television to view a slide show suitable for the character of the song, or play along using recommended tones.

1. Connect a commercially available CD drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the VIMA TUNES disc into the CD drive.
2. Touch on the Main screen.
   The System screen appears.
3. Touch .

FactoryReset BMP Installer Panel Reset DiskToExtMem User Reset VIMA TUNES Touch Screen Video Exit Send PC Bank MS Bank LS PC Numb Exit Utility 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch .

The VIMA TUNES screen appears.

VIMA TUNES In the Mood Video Camera DVD Ext In SlideShow Lyrics Playback Transpose Melody - 0 + Center Cancel Recommended in SMF Vibraphone Oboe Tenor Sax2 Exit Options 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch <><> to select the song you want to play.

If you want to use a CD or the CD drive, refer to "Using a CD"(p. 30).

You can also press the panel's [Song] button and choose a VIMA TUNES song from Song Select screen.

It will take a certain amount of time until VIMA TUNES song can be selected.

6. Touch < > to start playing back the song.

VIMA TUNES In the Mood Video Camera DVD Ext In SlideShow Lyrics Playback Transpose Melody - 0 + Center Cancel Recommended in SMF Vibraphone Oboe Tenor Sax2 Exit Options 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

You can touch Playback Transpose < >> to change the key of the song.

When you touch Melody in the screen, the melody will be muted.

You can mute the melody, and play the melody yourself.

When you touch Melody in the screen, the volume of the melody will be lowered. You can leave the melody playing at a lowered volume and play along until you've learned the melody. Since you will still be able to hear the melody, you can use it as a guide during practice.

7. Touch < > to stop playing back the song.

Displaying a Slide Show while the Song Plays

While playing back a VIMA CD-ROM (VIMA TUNES), you can view a slide show of images that match the mood of the song.

Songs on a CD-ROM created for VIMA (VIMA TUNES) contain slide show images suitable for those songs, making it easy for you to enjoy a slide show without having to prepare your own images (photos).

1. Connect a commercially available CD drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the VIMA TUNES disc into the CD drive.

2. Touch on the Main screen.

The System screen appears.

1. Touch .

FactoryReset BMP Installer Panel Reset DiskToExtMem User Reset VIMA TUNES Touch Screen Video Exit Send PC Bank MS Bank LS PC Numb 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main Exit Utility

1. Touch .

The VIMA TUNES screen appears.

VIMA TUNES In the Mood Video Camera DVD Ext In SlideShow Lyrics Playback Transpose Melody - 0 + Mute Guide Recommended in SMF Vibraphone Oboe Tenor Sax2 Exit Options J = 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch so it's lit.

2. Touch < >> to select the song you want to play.

You can also press the panel's [Song] button and choose a VIMA TUNES song from Song Select screen.

It will take a certain amount of time until VIMA TUNES song can be selected.

7. Touch < > to start playing back the song.

A slide show suitable for the character of the song will be shown on the external display or television connected to the ATELIER.

8. Touch <>to stop playing back the song.

Viewing the ATELIER's screen to check the image that's shown on your external display or television

You can view the ATELIER's screen to check the image that's shown on your external display or television.

1. Press the [Video Monitor] button, getting its indicator to light up.

The [Video Monitor] button indicator will alternate between on (lit) and off (dark) each time it is pressed.

Video Monitor

The ATELIER's display will show the same image as shown on your external display or television.

Performing with Sounds that Match the Song (Recommended Tones)

When playing along on the keyboard while listening to a CD-ROM made for the VIMA (VIMA TUNES), this function lets you play using instrumental sounds that are appropriate for the atmosphere of the selected song.

If you select a song from a CD-ROM created for VIMA (VIMA TUNES), three recommended tones will automatically be selected in the VIMA TUNES screen. You can use these three sounds to perform sounds that will match the character of that song.

When you want to select a song from a CD-ROM made for the VIMA (VIMA TUNES), insert the CD-ROM into the CD drive.

1. Select the song of VIMA CD-ROM (p. 272).
2. Touch on the Main screen.
   The System screen appears.
3. Touch .
4. Touch .

The VIMA TUNES screen appears.

VIMA TUNES In the Mood Video Camera DVD Ext In SlideShow Lyrics Playback Transpose Melody - 0 + Mute Guide Recommended in SMF Vibraphone Oboe Tenor Sax2 Exit >/> Options 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

The three recommended tones are shown in the lower part of the screen.

1. Touch one of the recommended tones in the screen to select a tone.

2. Touch <>to start playing back the song.

3. Play along with the song.

The tones you play will be suitable for the character of the song.

1. Touch < > to stop playing back the song.

Listening to Songs from Music CD

You can connect a CD drive to the ATELIER and use it to play music CDs. This lets you perform or sing along with the backing of a music CD.

1. Connect a commercially available CD drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the music CD into the CD drive.

2. Press the [Song] button.

The Song Select screen appears.

Song Select 01:Track 1 02:Track 2 03:Track 3 04:Track 4 05:Track 5 Media CD - + Load File Edit Exit 130 M: 1 Sound/KBD Rec/Play Registration Main

1. Touch <▶◀> to select the "CD."
2. Touch <> < > to select the song you want to play.
3. Touch <>() to start playing back the song.
4. Touch <> () to stop playing back the song.

If you want to use a CD or the CD drive, refer to "Using a CD"(p. 30).

You can't copy music CD songs to "Favorites."

It will take a certain amount of time until a music CD can be selected.

You can also play or stop the music data by touching or in the Rec/Play screen, and you can touch or to rewind or fast-forward the playback.

Enjoying Karaoke with a Music CD (Center Cancel)

You can minimize the vocal sounds of a commercially available music CD, and sing the vocal part yourself. This is a convenient way to enjoy karaoke or practice soloing with a favorite music CD.

You can also minimize the vocal sounds of a song from a DVD or a portable audio player.

1. Connect a commercially available CD drive to the Ext Drive connector.

2. Insert the music CD you want to use into the CD drive, and select the song you want to sing (p. 272).

3. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

4. Touch .

5. Touch . The VIMA TUNES screen appears.

6. Touch the Melody on the screen. The Center Cancel function is active.

7. Touch </to start playing back the song. When you play back the song, the sound of the melody or vocal will be minimized. This lets you perform the melody portion yourself.

Transposing the Song to a Comfortable Key for Singing

You can transpose the song to a key that is more comfortable for you to sing. If you or someone else will be singing along with a song, you can change the key of the song so it's appropriate for the singer's range.

You can transpose the key not only of a music CD, but also of the sound from a portable audio player or DVD player.

1. Touch Playback Transpose <×> on the VIMA Tunes screen.

Each time you touch Playback Transpose < >> >, the key is changed by one semitone.

Touch <> to lower the key, or touch <> to raise the key.

This can be set in a range of -6-0-+5 (semitone steps).

The VIMA TUNES screen shows the value you've specified.

1. If you touch Playback Transpose <×> to select "0," Key Control will be turned off.

NOTE

For some songs, the vocal sound may not be eliminated completely.

MEMO

If you want to sing along with a song on DVD or a portable audio player, connect your DVD player (p. 262) or portable audio player (p. 264). If you touch Melody in the VIMA TUNES screen while playing a DVD or a song on your portable audio player, the sounds such as the melody or vocal will be diminished.

MEMO

If you select a different song, the playback transpose settings will return to their factory-set state.

If the ATELIER does not function in the way you except, first check the following chart. If this does not resolve the problem, consult your dealer or a nearby Roland Service Station.

Power does not Turn On

Problem	Check Solution Page
When you press the [Power On] switch, the power doesn't come on	Power cord is not connected correctly.	Connect the power cord correctly.	p. 23

Problems with the Screen Display

Problem Check Solution	Page
Nothing appears on screen	The ATELIER uses a liquid-crystal screen, so text may not be displayed when the ambient temperature is below freezing.	This is not a malfunction.	---
It appears as though there are vertical stripes in the screen	This is due to the nature of a liquid crystal display, and is not a malfunction.	This is not a malfunction.	---
Can't view the main screen	The [Video Monitor] button is lit.	If the [Video Monitor] button is lit, the ATELIER's display will show the same image as the device connected to the ATELIER. Press the [Video Monitor] button so it's turned off.	p. 270
Bouncing Ball is not shown	The Bouncing Ball display is turned off.	Turn the Main Bouncing Ball setting ON.	p. 228
Lyrics are not indicated properly in the display	With some music files, the lyrics cannot be displayed correctly.	This is not a malfunction.	---
	In the Notation screen, some lyrics or notes could extend beyond the edges of the screen, and not be displayed.	This is not a malfunction.	---
	A button was pressed while the lyrics were being shown in the display. During the display of lyrics, you could be taken to a different screen if you press a button.	If you want to have the lyrics be displayed again, touchon the Rec/Play screen.	p. 220
Notation is not indicated properly in the display	In the Notation screen, some lyrics or notes could extend beyond the edges of the screen, and not be displayed.	This is not a malfunction.	---
	The Notation display feature is particularly unsuitable for the display of difficult, complex musical works that demand accurate notation.	This is not a malfunction.	p. 175
	If you select a part that does not contain performance data, notes will not be displayed in the notation.	Change the part that is displayed.	p. 174

No Sound is Heard

Problem	Check Solution Page
No sound is heard(by the Lower keyboard)	Drums/SFX are selected for the Lower keyboard, but you are playing a key to which no drum sound is assigned.	Turn the Drums/SFX off or play keys to which drums sounds are assigned.	p. 78
No sound is heard(by the Upper keyboard)	"Percussion Set 3" has been selected for the Upper keyboard.When "Percussion Set 3" is selected, some keys may have no sound assigned to them.	For the upper keyboard, select a voice other than "Percussion Set 3."	p. 51
No sound is heard(by the pedalboard)	Pedal cord is not connected correctly.	Use the pedal cable to connect the pedal correctly.	p. 20
No sound is heard (when external devices are connected)	The power of the connected external devices is not turned on.	Use the correct procedure to turn on the power of the connected external devices.	p. 245-p. 251
Lower keyboard cannot be heard	The Lower keyboard will not produce sound while an Intro or Ending is being played.	This is not a malfunction.	---
There is no sound from the twelve keys at the right of the lower keyboard	The V-LINK function is set Mode 2.When V-LINK setting is Mode 2, the group of twelve keys starting at the very right of the lower keyboard are used for controlling video images.Therefore, no sounds are played even when you press these keys.	Turn the V-LINK function off, or select Mode 1 for the V-LINK function.	p. 231
No sound is heard	The [Master Volume] slider is set too low.	Turn the [Master Volume] knob toward "Max."	p. 24
	Headphones are connected.When you connect the headphones, the sound is heard only through the headphones.	If you want sound to be output from the speakers, disconnect the headphones.	p. 25
	The plug is still plugged into the headphone jack.	Disconnect the plug from the headphone jack.	p. 25
	The volume is set too low on the Level [▲] [▼] buttons.	Press the Level [▲][▼] buttons to raise the volume.	p. 74
	The volume is set too low on the Expression Pedal.	Advance the expression pedal.	p. 138
	You do not have a Voice selected.	Press a voice button to select a voice. Voices that have their button indicator lit can be played.	p. 49

Problems with the Sound

Problem	Check Solution Page
The volume level of the instrument connected to ATELIER is too low.	Could you be using a connection cable that contains a resistor?	Use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor.	p. 245
Noise is heard in the sound	If there is a cell phone nearby, you may hear noise from the ATELIER when an incoming call or outgoing call occurs, or during a conversation.	Keep the phone as far away as possible, or turn off its power.	---
When the human voice “Jazz Scat” is selected, playing dynamics do not change the sound	The setting of “Initial Touch” is turned OFF.	Turn “Initial Touch” on.	p. 212
Rotary effect is not be applied	Some sounds do not allow the rotary effect to be applied.	This is not a malfunction.	---
Chorus effect does not apply	Some sounds do not allow the chorus effect to be applied.	This is not a malfunction.	---
When you release your fingers from keys in the Lower keyboard, the notes continue sounding	The Lower Voice [Hold] button is at ON.	Press the Lower Voice [Hold] button to turn it off (dark).	p. 82
Sound is produced when you take your finger off a key	You have selected a “Marimba Treml” or “Banjo Treml” sound.If you select a “Marimba Treml” or “Banjo Treml” sound, a sound will also be produced when you take your finger off the key.	This is not a malfunction.	---
Some keys (of certain keyboard parts) sound strange	You are playing notes outside the recommended range of the voice.	This is not a malfunction.	---
Bass is heard even though you are not playing the Bass Pedalboard	The Pedal [To Lower] button or the [Bass Split] button is ON.When the Pedal [To Lower] button is ON, the Bass will be sounded by the Lower keyboard.	In the Pedal part, press the Pedal [To Lower] button or [Bass Split] button to turn the button off (dark).	p. 163p. 165
When playing the same sound in the Upper keyboard and Lower keyboard, the volume is different	On one of the keyboards, “Initial Touch” is turned ON.	Set the initial touch settings of the Upper keyboard and the Lower keyboard to both On, or both Off.	p. 212
The sound is not played correctly	If you layer the same type of sound (for example, Strings 1 and Strings 5), or play an octave-shifted organ sound, the timing at which you play a note or the phase relationship between the two sounds may affect the way in which the sounds are heard, but this is not a malfunction.	You are layering sounds of the same type (e.g., Strings 1 and Strings 5). Alternatively, you are playing an organ sound with Octave Shift.This is not a malfunction.	---
Problem Check Solution	Page
Pressing the expression pedal while playing back ATELIER performance data produces a crackling noise	The expression pedal function is set to "PEDAL+COMPOSER" during playback of ATELIER performance data.When this setting is used, moving the expression pedal while playing back ATELIER performance data may create a difference between the expression pedal information in the performance data and the volume as set with the expression pedal, which can result in this kind of sound being produced.	Set the expression pedal function to "PEDAL" during playback.	p. 214
Even though you press only one key, a multiple number of notes sound	Harmony Intelligence is at ON.	Turn "Harmony Intelligence" off.	p. 140
	Chord Intelligence is turned ON.	Turn "Chord Intelligence" off.	p. 92
Pitch is off	Transpose is in effect.	Simultaneously press the Transpose [-] [+] buttons to cancel the transposition (the Transpose [-][+] buttons' indicators will go out).	p. 132
	The tuning is incorrect.	Adjust the standard pitch.	p. 224
	While set for an octave shift, you are playing keys beyond the recommended range. This does not indicate a malfunction.	Adjust the Octave Shift setting.	p. 76
Sound is distorted/cracked	The Part Balance volume of each part is too high.	Press the Part Balance button to lower the volume.	p. 74
	The Reverb volume has been raised when the volume of each Part Balance button is already raised.	Either lower the Reverb volume, or adjust the Part Balance of each part.	p. 74p. 151
	The [Master Volume] slider has been used to raise the overall volume excessively.	Use the [Master Volume] slider to lower the overall volume.	p. 24
The Bass Range Sounds Odd, or There Is a Vibrating Resonance	When listening through speakers: Playing at loud volumes may cause instruments near the ATELIER to resonate. Resonance can also occur with fluorescent light tubes, glass doors, and other objects. In particular, this problem occurs more easily when the bass component is increased, and when the sound is played at higher volumes.	Use the following measures to suppress such resonance.• Place speakers so they are 10-15 cm from walls and other surfaces.• Reduce the volume.• Move the speakers away from any resonating objects.	---
	When listening through headphones: Here, a different cause (such as resonance produced by the ATELIER) would be suspect.	Consult your Roland dealer or nearest Roland Service Center.	---

Registrations do not Switch Correctly

Problem	Check Solution Page
The Rhythm or Tempo does not change when you press the Registration buttons	The settings at which Registrations are recalled (Registration Arranger Update) has been set to “DELAYED.”	Set the timing at which the arranger settings are called up (Registration Arranger Update) to “INSTANT.”	p. 111p. 219

Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment does not Sound Right

Problem Check Solution	Page
When you release your fingers from keys in the Lower keyboard while Automatic Accompaniment and Rhythm are playing, the Rhythm performance only remains playing	Chord Hold is at OFF.	Turn “Chord Hold” on.The Automatic Accompaniment will play while you press a chord. If Chord Hold is turned ON, the Automatic Accompaniment will continue playing with the Rhythm even when you take your hand off of the Lower keyboard.	p. 216
Rhythm sounds odd	When performance data from a device other than the ATELIER is being played together with the Automatic Accompaniment, the Rhythm performance may not be sounded correctly.	This is not a malfunction.	---
The bass note of the Automatic Accompaniment does not sound	When a voice is selected for the Pedal Bass part, the bass of the Automatic Accompaniment will not sound.	This is not a malfunction.	---
Can’t use Chord Intelligence function	Chord Intelligence is at OFF.	Turn “Chord Intelligence” on.	p. 92
Tempo not changing even when the source tempo is reselected (when arranging Rhythms using the Rhythm Customize function)	Auto Std Tempo (Auto Standard Tempo) is set to on.When the Auto Std Tempo setting is set to ON and Rhythms are switched while the Rhythm is stopped, the tempo is automatically set to the tempo for that Rhythm.The tempo setting does not change automatically, even if the Rhythms are switched with the Auto Std Tempo setting set to OFF and the Rhythm stopped.	Turn “Auto Std Tempo” off.	p. 217
Automatic Accompaniment sounds odd	The keys for a chord were not pressed simultaneously.	Either turn on the Chord Intelligence function, or play the chord correctly.	p. 92
	When Chord Intelligence is OFF, the chord is not being pressed correctly.	Either turn on the Chord Intelligence function, or play the chord correctly.	p. 92
	When performance data from a device other than the ATELIER is being played together with the Automatic Accompaniment, the Automatic Accompaniment may not be sounded correctly.	This is not a malfunction.	---

Song does not Play Correctly

Problem	Check Solution Page
The volume changes during playback of performance data	When recording is performed repeatedly while changing the Part Balance volume, the previously-recorded Part Balance data remains in the Control track.	If you wish to get rid of the volume changes, use the Erase function to delete the Part Balance data.	p. 195
Certain instrument are not heard while playing a song	The track is muted.	Turn off track muting.	p. 170p. 172

Recording is not Possible

Problem	Check Solution Page
The recorded performance has disappeared	Any performance that has been recorded is deleted when the power to the unit is turned off.	It is not possible to recover performance data that has been lost.Before you turn off the power, save the performance data in the Favorites (User memory), USB memory, or a floppy disk.	p. 182
Recording is not possible(If you wish to erase a previously-recorded track and then re-record)	Press the track button for the desired track to make that button blink before you begin recording.	Press the track button for the desired track to make that button indicator blink before you begin recording.	p. 179
	Touch the track button for the track you want to record in the Rec/Play screen, stopping the button from flashing.	On Rec/Play screen, touch the track button for the desired track to make that button indicator blink before you begin recording.	p. 179

Problems with Playback Functions

Problem	Check Solution Page
Expression Pedal does not operate	The function of the Expression Pedal during recording or the function during playback has been set to “COMPOSER.”	Set the expression pedal function during recording to “PEDAL,” and during playback to “PEDAL” or “PEDAL+COMPOSER.”	p. 213
Can’t use the function assigned to the foot switch	If “Registration Shift” (change Registrations) is “RIGHT,” “LEFT,” or “RIGHT + Load Next,” the foot switch will be dedicated to switching the Registration.	Turn “Registration Shift” off.	p. 137
Damper Pedal does not operate	The damper pedal affects only the Lower keyboard and Upper keyboard. The damper pedal does not affect the Bass pedalboard.	You can change the settings so that the damper pedal affects the Upper keyboard.	p. 214
	The damper pedal does not affect the Solo voice.	This is not a malfunction.	---

Other Problems

Problem	Check Solution Page
Remote control does not work	Could the Remote function be turned off?If the Remote function is turned off, data from the remote control will not be received.	Refer to "Turning the Remote function on/off."	p. 230
MIDI messages received at MIDI In are not sounded	The Computer switch is not set to "MIDI" position.	Set the Computer switch to "MIDI."	p. 248
	The Computer switch was set to "MIDI" after the power was turned on.	Turn off the power, and then turn the power on once again.	p. 248
The Touch Screen doesn't respond correctly	The positioning of the Touch Screen may become displaced if some time has passed since it was last used.	Reposition the Touch screen.	p. 232
Unable to save created Rhythm to the User Memory	"Memory Full" appears in the display. The available memory remaining in the ATELIER is not sufficient.	First delete some other Rhythm saved to the User memory, then save the Rhythm you have created to the User memory once again.	p. 209p. 210
Can't read/write USB memory	Could you be using USB memory not made by Roland?	We cannot guarantee operation if you're using USB memory not made by Roland.	---
	The External Memory setting is incorrect.	Change the External Memory setting.	p. 229
DVD volume is too low (or inaudible)	Is the DVD player connected correctly?	Connect the DVD player correctly.	p. 262
	Could the DVD PLAYER INPUT [VOLUME] knob be turned to the minimum position?	The DVD player's volume is adjusted with the DVD PLAYER INPUT [VOLUME] knob; not by the [VOLUME] knob.	p. 262

Error Message	Meanings
Copy Protected.Can't Save.	To protect the copyright, this music file cannot be saved as SMF format.
Write-Protected Media.	The protect tab of the storage media is set to the Protect (write prohibit) position.Move the tab to the Write (write permit) position and try the operation again.
Can't Save This Song.	You can only play the music data. It cannot be saved on a storage media.
Master Disk	This storage media does not allow initialization or saving. Insert a different storage media and try the operation again.
Read Only File.	You cannot overwrite-save or delete a file on this storage media.
No Media	Storage media is not connected. Please connect storage media.
Media Full	Saving is not possible because the storage media does not have enough space. Please use other storage media that has been formatted by the ATELIER.
Unknown Media	This storage media cannot be used. Please format it.
Media Ejected	The storage media was disconnected while it was being accessed. Please try the operation again.
Damaged Media	A damaged area was found on the storage media.
Can't Read	This data cannot be read.
Can't Play	Playback was halted because the song could not be read fast enough.The song could not be read from the storage media fast enough for playback. Press the [Reset] button, then press the [Play/Stop] button once again.
No Rhythm	There is no Rhythm in User memory.
	The Rhythm used by the selected Registration was deleted from User memory, or its order was changed.
Designated positions are incorrect.	When calibrating the touch panel, the appropriate point was not touched correctly.If you touch a location other than the specified point, the discrepancy may become severe.Please be sure to touch the correct point.
Memory Full	The song data is excessively large, and cannot be loaded.
	The performance data is excessively large, and cannot be loaded.
	Recording or editing is not possible because the memory of the ATELIER is full.
MIDI Buffer Full	The ATELIER cannot deal with the excessive MIDI data sent from the external MIDI device. Reduce the amount of MIDI data sent to the ATELIER.
Communication Error	A MIDI cable or computer cable has been disconnected. Connect it properly and securely.
	The ATELIER is unable to handle the data that was sent. Please send data that the ATELIER is able to handle.
A MIDI transmission error has occurred.	Data transfer failed. Please transfer the data again.
Memory Error	An error occurred in internal memory. Please perform the operation again. If this indication appears even after you've repeated the operation several times, please contact Roland service.
Not found	A Rhythm or Registration that meets the conditions was not found.
This is registration data of a type that is not supported.	This instrument cannot use this Registration.
The Ext Memory port was subjected to excessive current.	USB memory not supported by the ATELIER was connected. This USB memory cannot be used with the ATELIER.

● symbol: Indicates the constituent not of chord.
★ symbol: Chord shown with an “★”can be played by pressing just the key marked with the “★.”

CC#DE EF

b

Cmaj7 C#maj7 Dmaj7 E maj7 Emaj7 Fmaj7

b

C7 C#7 D7 E 7 E7 F7

b

Cm C#m Dm E m Em Fm

b

Cm7 C#m7 Dm7 E m7 Em7 Fm7

b

Cdim C#dim Ddim E dim Edim

b

Cm7b5 C#m7b5

Eb m7b 5

Em7b5

Fm7b5

Caug C#aug

Eb aug

Eaug

Faug

Csus4 C#sus4

Dsus4 E sus4

s4 Esus4

b

C7sus4

C#7sus4

D7sus4

Eb 7sus4

E7sus4

F7sus4

C6 C#6 D6 E 6 E6

b

F6

Cm6

C#m6

Dm6

Eb m6

Em6

Fm6

● symbol: Indicates the constituent not of chord.
★ symbol: Chord shown with an "★" can be played by pressing just the key marked with the "★."

F# G A A B B b b F#maj7 Gmaj7 A maj7 Amaj7 B maj7 Bm7 b F#7 G7 A 7 A7 B 7 B7 b b F#m Gm A m Am B m Bm b b F#m7 Gm7 A m7 b Am7 B m7 Bm7 b F#dim Gdim Ab dim Adim Bb dim Bdim F#m7b5 Gm7b5 Ab m7b5 Am7b5 Bb m7b5 Bm7 b5 F#aug Gaug A aug b Aug B aug Baug b F#sus4 Gsus4 Ab sus4 Asus4 Bb sus4 Bsus4 F#7sus4 G7sus4 Ab 7sus4 A7sus4 Bb 7sus4 B7sus4 F#6 G6 Ab 6 A6 Bb 6 B6 F#m6 Gm6 Ab m6 Am6 Bb m6 Bm6

Arrangement

This refers to changes that have been made in an original tune, by adding a new accompaniment or by changing the instruments used.

Automatic Accompaniment

Automatic Accompaniment is Automatic Accompaniment when just a few keys in the lower section of the keyboard are pressed to specify the chord.

Basic Chord

This refers to the most commonly used types of chord, which are generally the following six types: major chords, minor chords, minor seventh chords, minor seventh (5) chords, dominant seventh chords, and diminished seventh chords.

Chord

Notes of two or more pitches sounded simultaneously. Chords consisting of three notes are called "triads," and are the most basic type of chord.

Chorus

An effect that adds spaciousness and richness to the sound.

Ending

This is the last part of the accompaniment. When you stop playing the Automatic Accompaniment, the ATELIER plays an Ending appropriate for the Rhythm.

Glide

An effect that temporarily lowers the pitch and then gradually returns it to normal.

Intro

This is the introductory portion of an Automatic Accompaniment performance. When Automatic Accompaniment begins, the ATELIER can add an appropriate intro for each Rhythm.

Inversion

When the lowest note of a chord is the root, the chord is said to be in "root position." In contrast, forms of a chord in which other notes are the lowest pitch are called "inversions."

Mute

To silence a sound. The ATELIER provides a Track Mute function that allows you to turn off the track button indicator of a track on which music data has been recorded, so that the corresponding track will temporarily be silenced.

Panel Settings

Settings such as sound selections, tempo, Rotary fast/slow.

Pitch Bend

An effect that smoothly raises or lowers the pitch.

Registration

A set of data that specifies the state of the instrument when performing, including sounds and panel settings.

Reverb

An effect that simulates the reverberation of a room or concert hall.

Root Note

The root note is the basis of a chord. All chords are built on a root note, which is the part of the chord name given in uppercase letters.

Rotary

An effect which simulates the modulation given to the sound when a rotating speaker is used. The Rotary effect produces two types of modulation: fast or slow.

Sound Generator

This is the section that produces the sound. The ATELIER series uses a sound generator that is compatible with GM2/GS.

Split

A function which allows the keyboard to be divided into two or more areas, and a different sound assigned to each area. The point at which the keyboard is divided is called the "Split Point."

Sustain

An effect that adds a decay to each note. The ATELIER allows sustain to be applied to the voices of the upper part, lower part, and pedal part.

Vibrato

An effect that cyclically modulates the pitch.

Voice

The ATELIER is able to produce the sounds of various instruments. These sounds are called "Voices."

What Are Music Files?

Music files contains musical information such as how long the key for a corresponding pitch is played, the force applied to the key played, and other such information. Performance data is transmitted to the ATELIER from music files saved in USB memory and CD-ROM, and played back without change as songs. This is different than a audio CD, since the music file does not contain a recording of the sound itself. This makes it possible to change tempos and keys freely, allowing you to use it in many different ways.

Regarding Copyright

Use of the internal songs and audio files for any purpose other than private, personal enjoyment without the permission of the copyright holder is prohibited by law. Additionally, this data must not be copied, nor used in a secondary copyrighted work without the permission of the copyright holder.

Please be aware that if you create derivative works that are based on existing copyrighted material, such as commercially available SMF music files, such works may violate copyright law if used for any purpose other than personal enjoyment. Roland takes no responsibility for any copyright violation you may commit by creating such works.

■ The ATELIER Allows You To Use the Following Music Files

VIMA TUNES

VIMA TUNES is a Roland specification for music files that contains image and lyric data, allowing you to enjoy songs with lyrics and images simultaneously. When data bearing the "VIMA TUNES" logo is played back on a device that bears the same logo, lyrics can be shown on the screen of a connected external display or television, letting you enjoy karaoke or watch a slide show.

SMF Music Files

SMFs (Standard MIDI Files) use a standard format for music file that was formulated so that files containing music file could be widely compatible, regardless of the manufacturer of the listening device. An enormous variety of music is available, whether it be for listening, for practicing musical instruments, for Karaoke, etc.

SMF with Lyrics SMF LYRICS

"SMF with Lyrics" refers to SMF (Standard MIDI File) that contains the lyrics. When Music Files carrying the "SMF with Lyrics" logo are played back on a compatible device (one bearing the same logo), the lyrics will appear in its display.

The ATELIER come equipped with GM 2/GS sound generators.

■ About the ATELIER Sound Generator

The ATELIER come equipped with GM 2/GS sound generators.

General MIDI

The General MIDI is a set of recommendations which seeks to provide a way to go beyond the limitations of proprietary designs, and standardize the MIDI capabilities of sound generating devices. Sound generating devices and music files that meets the General MIDI standard bears the General MIDI logo. Music files bearing the General MIDI logo can be played back using any General MIDI sound generating unit to produce essentially the same musical performance.

General MIDI 2

The upwardly compatible General MIDI 2 recommendations pick up where the original General MIDI left off, offering enhanced expressive capabilities, and even greater compatibility. Issues that were not covered by the original General MIDI recommendations, such as how sounds are to be edited, and how effects should be handled, have now been precisely defined. Moreover, the available sounds have been expanded. General MIDI 2 compliant sound generators are capable of reliably playing back music files that carry either the General MIDI or General MIDI 2 logo.

In some cases, the conventional form of General MIDI, which does not include the new enhancements, is referred to as "General MIDI 1" as a way of distinguishing it from General MIDI 2.

GS Format

The GS Format is Roland's set of specifications for standardizing the performance of sound generating devices. In addition to including support for everything defined by the General MIDI, the highly compatible GS Format additionally offers an expanded number of sounds, provides for the editing of sounds, and spells out many details for a wide range of extra features, including effects such as reverb and chorus. Designed with the future in mind, the GS Format can readily include new sounds and support new hardware features when they arrive. Since it is upwardly compatible with the General MIDI, Roland's GS Format is capable of reliably playing back GM Scores equally as well as it performs GS music files (music files that have been created with the GS Format in mind). This product supports both the General MIDI 2 and the GS Format, and can be used to play back music data carrying either of these logos.

XGlite

XG is a tone generator format of YAMAHA Corporation, that defines the ways in which voices are expanded or edited and the structure and type of effects, in addition to the General MIDI specification. XGlite is a simplified version of XG tone generation format. You can play back any XG music files using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some music files may play back differently compared to the original files, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects.

Settings That Are Stored After the Power Is Turned Off

Arranger Update

Aspect Ratio

Auto Std Tempo (Auto Standard Tempo)

Aux Out Mode

D Beam Sensitivity

Display Brightness

Exp. Curve (Expression Curve)

Lyrics

Main Background

Main Bouncing Ball

Master Tune

Metronome Sound

Mic Echo

MIDI IN Mode

NTSC/PAL

Registration Shift

Remote Control

Remote Control: FUNC1, 2

Rhythm Mode

Rotary Color

Rotary Speed

Send PC Switch

Trans. Update (Transpose Update)

USB Driver

Registration Name

EZ Touch

Settings That Are Stored In the Registration Buttons

Registration Name

Registration Shift

Arranger Update

Trans. Update (Transpose Update)

Exp. Curve (Expression Curve)

Rhythm Mode

Settings That Are Stored In the Individual Registration Buttons

Reverb Type

Reverb Depth

Solo [To Lower] button (ON/OFF)

Pedal [To Lower] button (ON/OFF)

Transpose [-] [+] buttons (Key Transpose)

L Foot Switch Assignment (Left Foot Switch Assignment)

R Foot Switch Assignment (Right Foot Switch Assignment)

Damper Pedal (Damper Pedal Assignment)

[Harmony Intelligence] button (ON/OFF)

Harmony Intelligence Type

Rotary [Fast/Slow] button (ON/OFF)

Rotary [On/Off] button (ON/OFF)

Bender/Vibrato

Pitch Bend Range

Pedal Bass Mode

Solo Mode

Solo To Lower Mode

Solo Split Point

[Bass Split] button (ON/OFF)

Bass Split Point

Sustain ON/OFF

Sustain Length

Tx MIDI Channel

After Touch ON/OFF

After Touch Sens (After Touch Sensitivity)

Initial Touch (Initial Touch Sensitivity)

Vintage Organ Type

Vintage Flute Volume

PC Number (Program Change Number)

Bank LSB (Bank Select LSB)

Bank MSB (Bank Select MSB)

Wall Type

The Voices assigned for each part

Level [▲] [▼] buttons (Part Balance Volume)

The Reverb depth for each part

The Chorus settings (ON/OFF) for each part

The Octave shift settings for each part

The voices assigned to the [Others] buttons for each part

[Drums/SFX] button (ON/OFF)

Drum/SFX Set

[Manual Percussion] button (ON/OFF)

Manual Percussion Set

Selected Rhythm

[Intro] button (ON/OFF)

[Ending] button (ON/OFF)

[Sync Start] button (ON/OFF)

Variation

Chord Intelligence ON/OFF

Chord Hold ON/OFF

Leading Bass ON/OFF

Arranger [ON/OFF] button (ON/OFF)

Lower Voice [Hold] button (ON/OFF)

Tempo setting

Volume of the Rhythm Accompaniment part

Reverb depth of the Rhythm Accompaniment part

Volume of the Rhythm drum part

Reverb depth of the Rhythm drum part

Volume of the Rhythm bass part

Reverb depth of the Rhythm bass part

MIDI Implementation Chart

Function...		Transmitted Recognized Remarks
Basic Channel	Default	1 (Solo)2 (Pedal)3 (Lower)4 (Upper)11 (Drums/SFX)13 (Manual Percussion)16 (Expression, PC, V-LINK)1-16	1 (Solo)*52 (Pedal)*53 (Lower)*54 (Upper)*511 (Drums/SFX)*513 (Manual Percussion)*516 (Expression)*51-16 (GM2/GS)*6X
Mode	DefaultMessagesAltered	x*x**********	Mode 3Mode 3, 4 (M=1)	*10
Note Number :	True Voice	24-110**********	0-1270-127
Velocity	Note ONNote OFF	O *1x 8n v=64	O*x
After Touch	Key'sCh's	x*x	O *2, 8O *2, 7, 8, 9
Pitch Bend		O *11	O *2, 7, 8, 9
Control Change	0, 32156, 387101116646566677172737475767784919398, 99100, 101	O *1xx *11O *11O xO xO xO xO *11	O *3, 7, 8O *2, 7, 8, 9O *2, 7, 8O *2, 7, 8, 9O *2, 7, 8, 9O *3, 7, 8, 9O *3, 7, 8, 9O *4O *3, 7, 8, 9O *3, 7, 8O *2, 7, 8O *2, 7, 8O *7O *7O *7O *7O *7O *7O *7O *7O *2, 8O *3, 7, 8O *3, 7, 8O *3, 8O *2, 7, 8, 9	Bank selectModulationPortamento timeData entryVolumePanpotExpressionGeneral purpose controller 1 (Glide)Hold 1PortamentoSostenutoSoftResonanceRelease TimeAttack TimeCutoffDecay TimeVibrato RateVibrato DepthPortamento controlEffect1 depthEffect3 depthNRPN LSB, MSBRPN LSB, MSB
Prog Change : True #		0-127 *1**********	O *3, 7, 8, 90-127	Program number 1-128
System Exclusive		O *11	O
System Common	: Song Pos: Song Sel: Tune	xxx	xxx
System Real Time	: Clock: Commands	OO	xx
Aux Message	: All sound off: Reset all controllers: Local Control: All Notes OFF: Active Sense: Reset	xxxxOx	O (120, 126, 127) *7, 8O *7, 8xO (123-125) *7, 8, 9Ox
Notes		*1 O x is selectable.* 2 O x is selectable by SysEx. (GS Part)* 3 Not received in the keyboard part* 4 Can be received in the keyboard part* 5 With MIDI IN Mode 2* 6 With MIDI IN Mode 1	*7 Received in GM2 mode* 8 Received in GS mode* 9 Received in General MIDI mode* 10 Recognize as M=1 even if M≠1.* 11 V-LINK

Song Title	Composer Player	Copyright
Art.Violin	Hector Olivera Hector	Olivera © 2007 Roland Corporation
Jazz Organ Akio Sasaki Akio Sasaki © 2007 Roland Corporation
Art.Cello Hector Olivera Hector	Olivera © 2007 Roland Corporation
Donau Wellen Iosif Ivanovici Yuri Tachibana © 2007 Roland Corporation
Art.Trombone Hector Olivera Hector	Olivera © 2007 Roland Corporation
Film Score Hector Olivera Hector	Olivera © 2004 Roland Corporation
VivaTheater! Tony Fenelon Tony Fenelon © 2004 Roland Corporation
Accordions Ralf Schink Ralf Schink © 2004 Roland Corporation
Greensleeves	Traditional	Yuri Tachibana © 2004 Roland Corporation
Pop Organ	Ralf Schink Ralf Schink © 2004 Roland Corporation
Pops Orch. Hector Olivera Hector	Olivera © 2004 Roland Corporation
Jazz Combo	Ric Iannone	Ric Iannone	© 2003 Roland Corporation
Slow Waltz Ric Iannone	Ric Iannone	© 2003 Roland Corporation
Hawaiian	Ric Iannone	Ric Iannone	© 2003 Roland Corporation
Dixieland	Ric Iannone	Ric Iannone	© 2003 Roland Corporation
Soft Gospel Ric Iannone	Ric Iannone	© 2001 Roland Corporation
Pipe Organ Hector Olivera Hector	Olivera © 1999 Roland Corporation
Orchestra	Hector Olivera Hector	Olivera © 2001 Roland Corporation
Soprano	W.A.Mozart	Hector Olivera © 2001 Roland Corporation
Tenor	Ric Iannone	Ric Iannone	© 1999 Roland Corporation
Jazz Scat	Ric Iannone	Ric Iannone	© 1999 Roland Corporation

* All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this material for purposes other than private, personal enjoyment is a violation of applicable laws.
* No data for the music that is played will be output from MIDI Out connector.

Profile

Akio Sasaki

After graduating from the Berklee College of Music in Boston as a principle, Akio has been active as a top jazz organ player in Japan. He performs live throughout the country, and also teaches at the Senzoku Gakuen College of Music and at the Kyoto Musical Academy. Additionally, he has published numerous arrangements, works of music theory, and music education books. In 2005 he released his own trio's CD album "Glide in Blue," receiving high praise not only from organ fans but also from many jazz fans. In 2007 he released his new album "Fly by Night," and his musical career continues to expand.

Hector Olivera

Hector Olivera was born in Argentina. He received his education at the Conservatory and the University of Buenos Aires followed by a scholarship at the famous Juilliard School of Music in New York. Olivera has performed extensively throughout the world including concerts at prestigious places such as the Notre Dame Cathedral in Paris and Carnegie Hall in New York. Hector Olivera's expertise involves both the traditional pipe organ and the electronic organ. Presently Olivera tours internationally playing some of the world's most magnificent pipe organs as well as his preferred electronic organ, the Roland ATELIER for which he continues to collaborate with its development.

Ralf Schink

Ralf Schink was born in Germany and began playing the electronic organ at the age of 9. After completing his formal education Ralf went on to study at the renowned Swiss Jazz School in Bern, Switzerland as well as the Berklee College of Music in Boston. Since then, his energetic, contemporary style has won him many accolades throughout Europe and around the world. Ralf regularly performs at the Frankfurt Musik Messe, the largest musical fair in Europe. A tremendously versatile and gifted musician, Ralf is comfortable with all types of music. From pop to jazz, Ralf's repertoire appeals to all age groups. Since 1992 Ralf has been working and touring for Roland Europe as demonstrator and product consultant. He regularly tours Europe, Asia and Canada.

Ric Iannone

Ric Iannone began playing the piano and accordion at the age of two and a half. By the time he was seven, he was performing public and private engagements with his musician father. For more than 20 years Ric has performed and traveled extensively throughout the United States and Europe, delighting audiences with his unique playing style and music arrangements. He is equally comfortable playing the organ, piano or keyboard, as a concert artist and product demonstrator.

Tony Fenelon

Tony Fenelon studied at the Conservatory of Music in Melbourne, Australia under famed teacher Roy Shepard. An internationally acclaimed artist, Tony has completed eighteen major concert tours overseas including the United States, U.K. and Japan. He has released seventeen albums, including four gold records. Tony has also been featured regularly as a solo pianist with the Australian Philharmonic Orchestra and the Australian Pops Orchestra. In June of 2003, Tony learned that he had been awarded the distinction of "Organist for the Year 2002" by the American Theatre Organ Society, and 2004 was awarded the distinction of the Medal of the Order of Australia in Queen Elizabeth's Birthday Honours List for his contributions in music.

Yuri Tachibana

Although Yuri Tachibana began playing the piano at age 3, she switched completely to the organ after winning First Prize in an organ competition. She has expanded her work to include a variety of activities, releasing two albums on Columbia Records and performing organ regularly on the "11 PM" TV program for four years. She further contributes articles on a wide range of musical genres, including classical and jazz, is an accomplished arranger, and has published numerous scores. In 2002, King Records released Yuri's album "Organ Chat," all songs of which were performed and recorded using the Roland Organ Music ATELIER. The album was acclaimed for its unique arrangements and sure playing, prompting the release of "Organ Chat 2" in 2005. Currently, her musical activities range beyond Japan to include the United States, Europe, China, and Southeast Asia, and she has appeared on numerous CDs from King Records and other record companies as a recording arranger.

Quick Guide Function

Short Cut		Screen/Setting
While the Quick Guide screen is displayed,	Expression Pedal Controller screen/Exp. Curve (Expression Curve)
	[Bender/Vibrato] lever	Controller screen/Bender/Vibrato
	Upper Keyboard Upper Keyboard screen/After Touch
	Lower Keyboard Split Point screen
	Pedalboard Pedalboard screen/Pedal Bass Mode
	Left Foot SwitchRight Foot Switch	Controller screen/L Foot Switch (Left Foot Switch)R Foot Switch (Right Foot Switch)
	Damper Pedal Controller screen/Damper Pedal
	[Solo To Lower] button Split Point screen
	[Bass Split] button Split Point screen
	Sustain [Pedal] button Pedalboard screen/Sustain Length
	Rotary [On/Off] button Effect screen/Rotary Color
	Rotary [Slow/Fast] button Effect screen/Rotary Speed
	[Count Down] button Rhythm Options screen/Count Down Sound
	Upper Voice select buttonsSolo Voice select buttons[Alternate] button	Upper Keyboard screen
	Lower Voice select buttons[Alternate] button	Lower Keyboard screen
	Pedal Voice select buttons Pedalboard screen
	Registration [Write] button Registration Options screen/Arranger Update
	[One Touch Program]button	Factory Reset screen
	[Harmony Intelligence]buttons	Panel Reset screen
	[Song] button	Song Clear screen(If the performance data has never been saved to a USB memory or "Favorites," the Song Clear screen appears.)

AT-900, AT-900C: MUSIC ATELIER

		AT-900	AT-900C
Keyboard	Upper 56 keys (C3-G7)
	Lower 76 keys (Waterfall keyboard, E1-G7)
	Pedal 25 keys (C2-C4)		OptionPK-25A: 25 keys (C2-C4)PK-7A: 20 keys (C2-G3)
	Initial Touch Upper, Lower (10 levels for each)
	After Touch Upper (10 levels)
Sound Generator	Sound Generator	Conforms to GENERAL MIDI Level 2, GENERAL MIDI System, GS and XGlite format
	Max.Polyphony 384
	Voice 450 Voices (Included 4 Articulation Voices and 31 Active Expression Voices)
	Upper Part Organ, Symphonic, Orchestral
	Lower Part Organ, Symphonic, Orchestral
	Solo Part Solo
	Pedal Part Organ, Orchestral
	Vintage Organ Flute (with harmonic bars), Pipe, Theater
Rhythm	Rhythm 307 Rhythms in 10 groups x 4 variations
	User Rhythm 99 Rhythms
	Rhythm Customize Pattern editing of the internal Rhythms (Drum Set, Beat, Tempo, Note)
Arranger Function		Tempo, Arranger On/Off, Start/Stop, Sync Start, Intro, Ending, Intro Count Down, Break, Auto Fill In, Variation (4 variations), One Touch Program, Chord Intelligence, Chord Hold, Leading Bass, Auto Standard Tempo, Rhythm Mode
Music Assistant		700 titles x 4 variations
One Touch Program		307 Rhythms x 2 groups x 4 variations
Quick Registration		248 settings in 12 groups
Drums/SFX Sets		18 Drum Sets + 1 SFX Set
Manual Percussion Sets		14 sets
Harmony Intelligence		36 types
Master Tuning		415.3 Hz-466.2 Hz (0.1 Hz steps)
Key Transpose		-4-+7 (in semitones)
Playback Transpose		-6-+5 (in semitones)
Effects		Rotary Sound, Chorus, RSS Reverb, Sustain, Vibrato, Pitch Bend, Glide
Registration	Registration	12 memories
	Function Load Next, File Edit
Composer	Tracks	7 tracks
	Note Storage Approx. 40,000 notes
	Song Length Max. 999 measures
	Tempo Quarter note = 20-500
	Resolution 120 ticks per quarter note
	Recording Realtime (Replace, Punch In/Out, Loop)
	Edit Function Delete Measure, Delete Track, Erase, Copy, Quantize
Score Display		DigiScore(Expanded Display, Lyrics Display, Change of Part Displayed, Note Name Display, Change Clef)
File Storage	Media	USB flash memory,floppy disk (in the case of using optional USB floppy disk drive FD-01A)
	Save Format MUSIC	ATELIER original format, SMF format 0
	Songs Max. 99 songs for each folder
Rated Power Output		10 W + 10 W + 60 W + 60 W + 100 W	80 W + 80 W
Speaker	Tweeter	5 cm x 4 5 cm x 2
	Full-range (small) 8 cm x 2 8 cm x 2
	Full-range (large) 10 cm x 4 20 cm x 1
	Woofer 30 cm x 1 -
Display		Graphic 800 x 480 dots backlit color LCD with touch screen
Pedals, Switches		Damper Pedal,Expression Pedal,Foot Switch: 2 pcs. (on the expression pedal, function assignable)	(attached to the optional pedalboard PK-25A, PK-7A)Damper Pedal,Expression Pedal,Foot Switch: 2 pcs. (on the expression pedal, function assignable)
Connectors		Audio Output Jacks (L/mono, R), Aux/Drums Output Jacks (L/mono, R),Bass Output Jack (mono), Audio Input Jacks (L/mono, R),External Input Jacks (Camera, DVD Player In, Ext In),Video Output Jacks (Analog RGB, Video),Phones Jacks (stereo) x 2, Mic Input Jack,MIDI Connectors (In, Out), USB Jack,External Memory Connector (USB Flash Memory connector),Ext Drive connector, AC Inlet
		-	Balanced Audio Output (L, R),PK In connector
Power Supply		AC 117 V, 230 V, 240 V
Power Consumption		420 W	220 W
Finish		Satin Walnut	Polished Cherry
Dimensions	Console(included Music Rest)	1,374(W) x 700(D) x 1,350 (H) mm54-1/8 (W) x 27-9/16 (D) x 53-3/16 (H) inches	1,299 (W) x 683 (D) x 525 (H) mm51-3/16 (W) x 26-15/16 (D) x 20-11/16 (H) inches
	Stand -		1,282 (W) x 554 (D) x 765 (H) mm50-1/2 (W) x 21-13/16 (D) x 30-1/8 (H) inches
	Pedalboard	1,160 (W) x 844 (D) x 128 (H) mm45-11/16 (W) x 33-1/4 (D) x 5-1/16 (H) inches	-
	Total	1,374 (W) x 1,020 (D) x 1,350 (H) mm54-1/8 (W) x 40-3/16 (D) x 53-3/16 (H) inches	968 (W) x 370 (D) x 614 (H) mm38-1/8 (W) x 14-5/8 (D) x 24-3/16 (H) inches
	Bench	1,075 (W) x 379 (D) x 622 (H) mm42-3/8 (W) x 14-15/16 (D) x 24-1/2 (H) inches	-
	Pedalboard (Option)	-	PK-25A:1,068 (W) x 885 (D) x 283 (H) mm42-1/16 (W) x 34-7/8 (D) x 11-3/16 (H) inchesPK-7A:905 (W) x 490 (D) x 271 (H) mm35-11/16 (W) x 19-5/16 (D) x 10-11/16 (H) inches
Weight	Console	180.5 kg / 398 lbs 64 kg / 142 lbs
	Stand - 38 kg / 84 lbs
	Pedalboard 24 kg / 53 lbs -
	Total 204.5 kg / 451 lbs 102 kg / 225 lbs
	Bench 20.5 kg / 46 lbs 11.5 kg / 26 lbs
	Pedalboard (Option)	-	PK-25A: 29 kg / 64 lbsPK-7A: 16 kg / 36 lbs]
Accessories		Music Rest, 2 screws for the Music Rest, Panel Sheet, Power Code,Bench, Remote Controller, Dry-cell Battery x 2, Owner's Manual, Voice & Rhythm Guide
		Pedalboard Console Cover, PK Cable, Code	Hook
Options		Stereo Headphones, USB Flash Memory (M-UF1G), USB Floppy Disk Drive (FD-01A),CD Drive Holder (DH-01), Microphone
			Pedalboard (PK-25A, PK-7A)

* In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice.

A

Active Expression Voice 71

Adjuster 23

AEx Voice 71

Aftertouch 211

Alternate 50

Arrangement 284

Arranger function 90

Arranger Update 219

Art.Cello 68

Art.TenorSax 70

Art.Trombone 69

Art.Violin 68

Articulation Voice 63–64, 66

Aspect Ratio 240

Audio CD 272

Auto Standard Tempo 217

Automatic Accompaniment 90,284

Aux Out 251

Aux Out Mode 251

Aux/Drums 244

B

Balanced Out 246

Basic Chord 284

Bass 244

Bass Split 163

Bender/Vibrato 214

BMP Installer 236

Bouncing Ball 31

Break 91,136

Brightness Rotary Effect 145

Brilliance 133

C

Calibration Touch Screen 232

Camera 244, 261, 266

CD-DA 272

Chord 284

Chord Hold 216

Chord Intelligence 92

Chord Name Main Screen 31

Chorus 284

Chorus Effect 146

Composer 166

Computer 246

Connecting Audio Equipment .... 245 Computer .... 246

DVD Player 262

Portable Audio/Video Player 264

Video Camera 260

Copying

Measure 197

Performance Song 190

Registration 128, 130

Rhythm 99,101

Rhythms on Disks into User Memory 99,190

cord hook 26

Correct Timing 198

Count Down 90

Count Down Sound 216

Count In 177

Count-In Recording 189

D

D Beam Controller 156

D Beam Controller sensitivity 215

Damper Pedal 133,213

Decay 133

Delete

Graphic 237

Measure 192

Performance Songs 184

Registrations 124

Rhythms Stored in User Memory 106

Track 193

Demo Song 35

Demo Song List 288

Depth

Expression Pedal 139

Disk Rhythm 98

Drums/SFX 78

Drums/SFX Sets 79

DVD 266

[DVD] button 262

DVD Player 262

Connecting 262

DVD Player In 262

E

Editing 192

Performance Data 192

Effects 140

Ending 284

Erase

Performance Song 180

Erase Event 195

Exp. Curve 139

Exp. Src (Play) 214

Exp. Src (Rec) 213

Expression Pedal 138

Function 213

Ext In 266

[Ext In] button 264

External Display Connecting 249

EZ One Finger 46

EZ Touch 46

F

Factory Reset 27

Favorites 258

Feet 57

File Edit 47,126,128

Fill In 91

Foot Switch 135-136

Format 235

G

General MIDI 285

General MIDI 2 285

Glide 136,284

Gloal Settings EZ One Finger 46

EZ Touch 46

Global Settings 46

GS 285

GS Format 285

H

Harmony Intelligence 140

H-Bar Manual 60

Headphones 25

Hold 82

Human Voice 72

|

Illumination 244

Initial Touch Sensitivity 212

Input 244

Intro 284

Inversion 284

K

Key Transpose 132

L

Leading Bass 94,136

Load

Individual Registration 119

Performance Songs 183

Set of Registrations 118

Load Next Registrations 122

Loop Recording 188

Lower Voice 51,82

Lower Voice Hold 82

Lyrics 220

M

Main 244

Main Screen 31

Background 229

Bouncing Ball 228

Manual Perc 80

Manual Percussion 80

Manual Percussion Sets 81

Master Tune 224

Master Volume 24

Measure

Copy 197

Delete 192

Metronome 221

Metronome Beat 222

Metronome Sound 222

Metronome Volume 221

Mic 244

jack 25

Mic Echo 225

Mic Volume 25

Microphone 25

MIDI 248

MIDI Devices

Connecting 248

MIDI IN Mode 226

MIDI In/Out 244

Music Assistant 39

Main Screen 31

Music Assistant Search 41

Music CD 272-273

Music Files 285

Mute 284

N

Notation 173

0

Octave Shift 76

One Touch Program 96–97

Output 244

P

Panel Reset 234

Panel Settings 284

Part Balance 74

Part Balance Monitor 75

PC Number 226

Pedal 52

Pedal Bass Voice 52

Pedal Cord 20

Pedal To Lower 165

PedalBass Mode 212

Pedalboard Polyphony 212

Percussion 59

Performance

Recommended Tones 271

Phones 244

jack 25

Pitch Bend 284

Pitch Bend Range 215

Pitch Bend/Vibrato 19,134

Playback Transpose 220

Playing

Demo Song 35

Performance Song 177

Performance Songs Stored on Floppy Disk ...... 169

Rhythm 87

Portable Audio/Video Player 264

Power On 23

Produce a Sound Effect

D Beam Controller 157

Punch-in Recording 187

Q

Quick Guide 43

Index menu 44

Main Screen 32

Quick Registration 37

Main Screen 31

R

Rec/Play Main Screen 32

Recall

Registration 110

Recommend Tone 271

Recording 166

Each Part Separately 178

Performance 176

Re-Recording 179

Recording onto SMF 185

Registration 284

Arranger Update 111

Main Screen 32

Recall 110

Rename 126

Storing Registrations 109

Registration Shift 137

Remote Control 255, 258

Rename

Performance Song 180

Registration 113, 126

Saved Rhythms 104

Re-Recording 179

Reverb 284

Reverb Effect 151

Depth of the Reverb 154–155

Reverb Type 152

Wall Type 153

RGB 244

Rhythm 83

Count Down 90

Customize 200

fill-in 91

Main Screen 31

One Touch Program 97

Rhythm Mode 217

Rotary 284

Rotary Effect 136, 143

Rotary Color 145

Rotary Speed 144

S

Saving Performance Songs .... 182

Registration Sets 115

User Rhythms 210

Search

Rhythm 85

Send PC Switch 225

Sensitivity

Aftertouch 211

Slide Show 241

SMF Music Files 169,285

SMF with Lyrics 285

Solo 53

Alternate 53

To Lower 160

Solo Mode 161

Solo To Lower 160

Solo To Lower Mode 161

Solo Voice 53

Sort

Registration 126

Sound Generator 284-285

Sound/KBD

Main Screen 32

Split 284

Split Point

Bass Split Point 164

Solo Split Point 162

Sub-window 33-34

Sustain 284

Sustain Effect 148

Sustain Length 150

Sync Start 88

System

Main Screen 32

T

Television

Connecting 249

Format 239

Tempo 89

Touch Screen 31

Tr. Mute (Track Mute) 172

Track

Delete 193

Track Button 167

Track Mute 170

Transpose

Key Transpose 132

Main Screen 31

Playback Transpose 220

Transpose Update 219

Tx MIDI Ch. (MIDI Transmit Channel 227

Type of Slide Show 241

U

Upper Voice 51

Upper/Lower 50

Alternate 50

USB (MIDI) connector 246

USB Driver 247

User Memory 84,233

User Memory Reset 233

User Rhythm 200

Save 210

V

VARIATION 136

Variation 91

Vibrato 284

Video 244

Video Camera 260

Video Function Select Buttons 266

Video In 244

Video Monitor 261, 270

VIMA TUNES 267, 285

Vintage Organ 58

Voice 49,284

Volume

DVD Player 263

Part Balance 74

X

XGlite 285

Information

When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as shown below.

AFRICA

EGYPT

Al Fanny Trading Office

9, EBN Hagar Al Askalany

Street,

ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis,

Cairo 11341, EGYPT

TEL: [phone]

REUNION

Maison FO - YAM Marcel

25 Rue Jules Hermann,

Chaudron - BP79 97 491

Ste Clotilde Cedex,

REUNION ISLANE

TEL: [phone]

SOUTH AFRICA

T.O.M.S. Sound & Music

(Pty)Ltd.

2 ASTRON ROAD DENVER

JOHANNESBURG ZA 2195,

SOUTH AFRICA

TEL: [phone]

Paul Bothner(PTY)Ltd.

Royal Cape Park, Unit 24

Londonderry Road, Ottery 7800

Cape Town, SOUTH AFRICA

TEL: [phone]

ASIA

CHINA

Roland Shanghai Electronics

Co.,Ltd

5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road

Shanghai 200090, CHINA

TEL: [phone]

Roland Shanghai Electronics

Co., Ltd.

(BEIJING OFFICE)

10F. No.18 3 Section Anhuaxili

Chaoyang District Beijing

100011 CHINA

TEL: [phone]

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

Service Division

22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen

Wan, New Territories,

HONG KONG

TEL: [phone]

Parsons Music Ltd.

8th Floor, Railway Plaza, 39

Chatham Road South, T.S.T,

Kowloon, HONG KONG

TEL: [phone]

INDIA

Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.

411, Nirman Kendra

Mahalaxmi Flats Compound

Off. Dr. Edwin Moses Road, Mumbai 40231 INDI A

TFL: [phone]

INDONESIA

PT Citra IntiRama

Jl. Cideng Timur No. 15J-15O

Jakarta Pusat

INDONESIA

TEL: [phone]

KOREA

Cosmos Corporation

1461-9, Seocho-Dong.

Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA

TEL: [phone]

MALAYSIA

Roland Asia Pacific Sdn. Bhd.

45-1, Block C2, Jalan PJU 1/39,

Dataran Prima, 47501 Petaling Ivan Selawas, MALAYSIA

jaya, Selangor, MALAYSIA TEL: [phone]

VIET NAM

Suoi Nhac Company, Ltd

370 Cach Mang Thang Tam St.

Dist.3, Ho Chi Minh City,

VIETNAM

TEL: [phone]

PHILIPPINES

G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue

Makati, Metro Manila 1200,

PHILIPPINES

TEL:[phone]

SINGAPORE

SWEE LEE MUSIC

COMPANY PTE. LTD.

150 Sims Drive,

SINGAPORE 387381

TEL: [phone]

TAIWAN

ROLAND TAIWAN

ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.

Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung

Shan N.Road Sec.2,

TAIWAN, K.O.C. TEL [phone]

TEL: [phone]

THAILAND

Theera Music Co., Ltd.

100-108 Soi Verng

Nakoritkasem, New

Road, Sumpantawongse,

Bangkok 10100 THAILAND TEL: [phone]

TEL: [phone]

AUSTRALIA/ NEW ZEALAND

AUSTRALIA/

NEW ZEALAND

Roland Corporation

Australia Pty., Ltd.

38 Campbell Avenue

Dee Why West. NSW 2099

AUSTRALIA

For Australia

Tel: [phone]

For New Zealand

Tel: [phone]

CENTRAL/LATIN AMERICA

ARGENTINA

Instrumentos Musicales S.A.

Av.Santa Fe 2055

(1123) Buenos Aires

ARGENTINA

TEL: [phone]

BARBADOS

A&B Music Supplies LTD

12 Webster Industrial Park

Wildey, St.Michael, Barbados

TEL: [phone]

BRAZIL

Roland Brasil Ltda.

Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B

Parque Industrial San Jose

Cola - São Paulo - SP, BRAZHA

TEL: [phone]

CHILE

Comercial Fancy II S.A.

Rut.: 96.919.420-1

Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor

Santiago - Centro, CHI.F. TEL: [phone]

COLOMBIA

Centro Musical Ltda.

Cra 43 B No 25 A 41 Bododega 9

Medellin, Colombia TEL: [phone]

TEL: [phone]

COSTA RICA

JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos

Musicales

Ave.1. Calle 11, Apartado

10237,

San Jose, COSTA RICA

TEL: [phone]

CURACAO

Zeelandia Music Center Inc.

Orionweg 30

Curacao, Netherland Antilles

TEL:[phone]

DOMINICAN REPUBLIC

Instrumentos Fernando Giraldez

Calle Proyecto Central No.3

Ens.La Esperilla

Santo Domingo,

Dominican Republic

TEL:[phone]

ECUADOR

Mas Musika

Rumichaca 822 y Zaruma

Guayaquil - Ecuador

TEL:[phone]

EL SALVADOR

OMNI MUSIC

75 Avenida Norte y Final

Alameda Juan Pablo II,

Edificio No.4010 San Sa

EL SALVADOR

TE1: 2H2-11785

GUATEMALA

Casa Instrumental

Calzada Roosevelt 34-01, zona 11

Ciudad de Guatemala

Guatemala

TEL:[phone]

HONDURAS

Almacen Pajaro Azul S.A. de C.V.

BO.Paz Barahona

3 Ave.11 Calle S.C

San Pedro Sula, Honduras

TEL: [phone]

MARTINIQUE

Musique & Son

Z.I.Les Mangle

97232 De Lamantin Mortiniano FWJ

Martimique F.W.I. TEL: [phone]

THE WORLD'S HISTORY

Gigamusic SARL

10 Rie De La Folie

97200 Fort De France

Martinique F.W. TEL: [phone]

TEL: [phone]

MEXICO

Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.

Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar

de los Padres 01/80 México DE MEXICO

D.F. MEXICO TEL: (57) 5669

TEL: [phone]

NICARAGUA

Bansbach Instrumentos

Musicales Nicaragua

Altamira D'Este Calle Principal

de la Farmacia 5ta.Avenida

1 Cuadra al Lago

Managua, Nicaragua TEL: [phone]

TEL: [phone]

PANAMA

SUPRO MUNDIAL, S.A.

Boulevard Andrews, Albrook

Panama City, REP. DE

PANAMA

TEL: [phone]

PARAGUAY

Distribuidora De

Instrumentos Musicales

J.E. Olcar y ESQ. Manduvira

Asuncion PARAGUAY

TEL: [phone]

PERU

Audionet

Distribuciones Musicales SAC

Juan Fanning 530

Miraflores

Lima - Peru TEL: [phone]

TEL: [phone]

TRINIDAD

AMR Ltd

Ground Floor

Maritime Plaza

Barataria Trinidad W.I.

TEL: [phone]

URUGUAY

Todo Musica S.A.

Francisco Acuna de Figueroa

1771

C.P.: 11.800

Montevideo, DRUGUAY

TEL: [phone]

VENEZUELA

Instrumentos Musicales

Allegro,C.A.

Av. las industrias edf. Guitar

import

7 zona Industrial de Turumo

Caracas, Venezuela

TEL: [phone]

EUROPE

AUSTRIA

Roland Elektronische

Musikinstrumente GmbH.

Austrian Office

Eduard-Bodem-Gasse 8,

A-6020 Innsbruck, AUSTRIA

TEL: [phone]

BELGIUM/FRANCE/

HOLLAND/

LUXEMBOURG

Roland Central Europe N.V.

Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel

(Westerlo) BELGIUM

TEL: [phone]

CROATIA

ART-CENTAR

Degenova 3.

HR - 10000 Zagreb

TEL. [phone]

CZECH REP.

CZECH REPUBLIC

DISTRIBUTOR s.r.o

Voctárova 247/16

CZ - 180 00 PRAHA 8,

CZECH REP TEL: (2) 820

TEL. [phone]

DENMARK

Roland Scandinavia A/S

Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,

DK-2100 Copenhagen DENMARK

DENMARK TEL: 2016.62

TEL: [phone]

FINLAND

Roland Scandinavia As, Filial

Finland

Elannontie 5

FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND TEL: [phone]

TEL: [phone]

GERMANY

Roland Elektronische

Musikinstrumente GmbH.

Oststrasse 96, 22844

Norderstadt, GERMANY

TEL: [phone]

GREECE/CYPRUS

STOLLAS S.A.

Music Sound Light

155, New National Road

Patras 26442, GREECE

TEL: [phone]

HUNGARY

For EU Countries

This symbol indicates that in EU countries, this product must be collected separately from household waste, as defined in each region. Products bearing this symbol must not be discarded together with household waste.

Dieses Symbol bedeutet, dass dieses Produkt in EU-Ländern getrennt vom Hausmüll gesammelt werden muss gemäß den regionalen Bestimmungen. Mit diesem Symbol gekennzeichnete Produkte dürfen nicht zusammen mit den Hausmüll entsorgt werden.

Ce symbole indique que dans les pays de l'Union européenne, ce produit doit être collecté séparément des ordures ménagères selon les directives en vigueur dans chacun de ces pays. Les produits portant ce symbole ne doivent pas être mis au rebut avec les ordures ménagères.

Questo simbolo indica che nei paesi della Comunità europea questo prodotto deve essere smaltito separatamente dai normali rifiuti domestici, secondo la legislazione in vigore in ciascun paese. I prodotti che riportano questo simbolo non devono essere smaltiti insieme ai rifiuti domestici. Ai sensi dell'art. 13 del D.Lgs. 25 luglio 2005 n. 151.

Este símbolo indica que en los países de la Unión Europea este producto debe recogerse aparte de los residuos domésticos, tal como esté regulado en cada zona. Los productos con este símbolo no se deben depositar con los residuos domésticos.

Este símbolo indica que nos países da UE, a recolha deste produto deverá ser feita separadamente do lixo doméstico, de acordo com os regulamentos de cada região. Os produtos que apresentem este símbolo não deverão ser eliminados juntamente com o lixo doméstico.

Dit symbool geeft aan dat in landen van de EU dit product gescheiden van huishoudelijk afval moet worden aangeboden, zoals bepaald per gemeente of regio. Producten die van dit symbool zijn voorzien, mogen niet samen met huishoudelijk afval worden verwijderd.

Dette symbol angiver, at i EU-lande skal dette produkt opsamles adskilt fra husholdningsaffald, som defineret i hver enkelt region. Produkter med dette symbol må ikke smides ud sammen med husholdningsaffald.

Dette symbolet indikerer at produktet må behandles som spesialavfall i EU-land, iht. til retningslinjer for den enkelte regionen, og ikke kastes sammen med vanlig husholdningsavfall. Produkter som er merket med dette symbolet, må ikke kastes sammen med vanlig husholdningsavfall.

Symbolen anger att i EU-länder måste den här produkten kasseras separat från hushållsavfall, i enlighet med varje regions bestämmelser. Produkter med den här symbolen får inte kasseras tillsammans med hushållsavfall.

Tämä merkintä ilmaisee, että tuote on EU-maissa kerättävä erillään kotitalousjätteistä kunkin alueen voimassa olevien määräysten mukaisesti. Tällä merkinnällä varustettuja tuotteita ei saa hävittää kotitalousjätteiden mukana.

Ez a szimbólum azt jelenti, hogy az Európai Unióban ezt a terméket a háztartási hulladéktől elkülönítve, az adott régióban érvényes szabályozás szerint kell gyűjteni. Az ezzel a szimbólummal ellátott termékeket nem szabad a háztartási hulladék közé dobni.

Symbol oznacza, że zgodnie z regulacjami w odpowiednim regionie, w krajach UE produktu nie należy wyrzucać z odpadami domowymi. Produktów opatrzonych tym symbolem nie można utylizować razem z odpadami domowymi.

Tento symbol udává, že v zemích EU musí být tento výrobek sbírán odděleně od domácího odpadu, jak je určeno pro každý region. Výrobky nesoucí tento symbol se nesmí vyhazovat spolu s domácím odpadem.

Tento symbol vyjadruje, že v krajinách EÚ sa musí zber tohto produktu vykonávat' oddelene od domového odpadu, podľa nariadení platných v konkrétnej krajine. Produkty s týmto symbolom sa nesmú vyhadzovat' spolu s domovým odpadom.

See sümbol näitab, et EL-i maades tuleb see toode olemprügist eraldi koguda, nii nagu on igas piirkonnas määratletud. Selle sümboliga märgitud tooteid ei tohi ära visata koos olmeprügiga.

Šis simbolis rodo, kad ES šalyse šis produktas turi būti surenkamas atskirai nuo buitiniių atliekų, kaip nustatyta kiekviename regione. Šiuo simboliu paženklinti produktai neturi būti išmetami kartu su buitinėmis atliekomis.

Šis simbols norāda, ka ES valstīs šo produktu jāievāc atseviški no mājsaimniecības atkritumiem, kā noteikts katrā regionā. Produktus ar šo simbolu nedrīkst izmest kopā ar mājsaimniecības atkritumiem.

Ta simbol označuje, da je treba proizvod v državah EU zbirati ločeno od gospodinjskih odpadkov, tako kot je določeno v vsaki regiji. Proizvoda s tem znakom ni dovoljeno odlagati skupaj z gospodinjskimi odpadki.

Το σύμβολο αυτό υποδηλώνει ότι στις χώρες της Ε.Ε. το συγκεχμένο προϊόν πρέπει να συλλέγται χωριστά ατο τα υπόλουτα οκαιά αποφίμματα, σύμφωνα με όσα προβλέπονται στ κάθε περιοχή. Τα προϊόντα κον φέρουν το συγκεχμένο σύμβολο δεν πρέπει να αποφέπονται μαζί με τα οικαιά αποφίμματα.

For China

有关产品中所含有害物质的说明

本资料就本公司产品中所含的特定有害物质及其安全性予以说明。

本资料适用于2007年3月1日以后本公司所制造的产品。

环保使用期限

此标志适用于在中国国内销售的电子信息产品，表示环保使用期限的年数。所谓环保使用期限是指在自制造日起的规定期限内，产品中所含的有害物质不致引起环境污染，不会对人身、财产造成严重的不良影响。

环保使用期限仅在遵照产品使用说明书，正确使用产品的条件下才有效。

不当的使用，将会导致有害物质泄漏的危险。

产品中有毒有害物质或元素的名称及含量

部件名称	有毒有害物质或元素
	铅(Pb)	汞(Hg)	镉(Cd)	六价铬(Cr(VI))	多溴联苯(PBB)	多溴二苯醚(PBDE)
外壳(壳体)	×	○	○	○	○	○
电子部件(印刷电路板等)	×	○	×	○	○	○
附件(电源线、交流适配器等)	×	○	○	○	○	○
○:表示该有毒有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在SJ/T11363-2006标准规定的限量要求以下。×:表示该有毒有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出SJ/T11363-2006标准规定的限量要求。因根据现有的技术水平,还没有什么物质能够代替它。

For EU Countries

This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89/336/EEC and LVD 73/23/EEC.

For the USA

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
  – Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.

This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.

For C.A. US (Proposition 65)

WARNING

This product contains chemicals known to cause cancer, birth defects and other reproductive harm, including lead.

For Canada

NOTICE

This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

AVIS

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.

For the USA

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Compliance Information Statement

Model Name: AT-900, AT-900C

Type of Equipment : Digital Organ

Responsible Party: Roland Corporation U.S.

Address: 5100 S. Eastern Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938

Telephone : [phone]

Roland